COMMON RULES

–2022–

ORDER OF THE

PIOUS SCHOOLS

DECREES

COMMON RULES

Chapter I

OUR ORDER AND ITS LAW

1. Our Order is included among the various religious families of the Church of God. Its official title is Order of the Poor Clerics Regular of the Mother of God of the Pious Schools or, simply, Order of the Pious Schools, or Pious Schools. It can also be designated by the names adopted in the legally approved translations of the Constitutions and the Rules. Each and every one of these names may be used with the same rights in any ecclesiastical or civil document.

2. According to the foundational documents of Paul V, Ad ea per quae, and of Clement XII, Nobis quibus, the interpretations of the General Chapters and the Constitutions, the specific goal of our Institute is the integral education of children and youth, especially the poor.

3. The motto of our Order, which our Holy Founder formulated in different ways, can be expressed as: “For the praise of God and the benefit of our neighbors” or “For the glory of the all-powerful God, and the benefit of our neighbors”. Tradition has also accepted these other formulations: “For a greater increase of piety” (A. M. P. I.) or simply “Piety and Letters”.

4. Our Order takes great pride in having the Blessed Virgin Mary, Mother of God of the Pious Schools, as its Patroness, and as its Title the illustrious name of the same Virgin Mary. The expression of this Patronage and Title is the Order’s own shield, used since the very beginnings of our foundation.

5. The Order of the Pious Schools is governed partly by Church law, and partly by its own law, mainly contained in the Constitutions and in the Common Rules. The Constitutions are the fundamental laws, the cornerstone of our Order. The Common Rules that explain, complement and safeguard the Constitutions are the internal laws, usually promulgated by the General Chapters or confirmed in them.

6. The Constitutions and the Rules, written in Latin, must be considered the authentic texts. They may be translated into other common languages, but these versions need the approval of the General Congregation.

7. 1. The General Decrees are rules, promulgated for the entire Order by the General Chapters or, through its delegation, by the Superior General with the consent of his Assistants; they are effective until another General Chapter abrogates them, or, confirmed by practice, they become Common Rules.

2. Directories are executory General Decrees promulgated, according to the law, by a General Chapter or by the Father General with the consent of his Assistants, for the whole Order or for some Demarcation, and affect certain groups of persons or some particular matters.

3. Statutes are rules established by the respective Major Superiors with the consent of their Assistants for groups of persons or for different matters by which their aims, constitution, policies and activities are defined.

4. Declarations are the authentic interpretations about the nature and ends of the Order, about the Rules and Chapter Decrees, as well as practical interpretations and solutions to questions with regard to the Constitutions, given by the General Chapter or by the Superior General with the consent of his Assistants.

5. Executory Decrees are rules legitimately promulgated by the Major Superiors for a limited or indefinite time by which the application of the laws is determined or their fulfillment is urged.

6. Chapter Decrees are norms of a Provincial Chapter, confirmed by the Superior General with the consent of his Assistants, which affect a particular Demarcation and its members or Houses; they are binding until another Provincial Chapter abrogates them with the approval of the Superior General with the consent of his Assistants.

If such Chapter Decrees are approved by a General Chapter, they become particular laws only for that Province and can be abrogated only by another General Chapter.

7. Instructions are rules legitimately published by the Major Superiors that develop and determine the prescriptions of the laws and the procedures to put them into practice; they are directed to those who have the responsibility to take care that the laws are fulfilled and are obliged to execute them.

8. A Singular Decree is an administrative act of the competent authority, by which, according to the norms of the law and in a particular case (for example, the erection or suppression of a House), a decision or provision is made, that, by its own nature, does not require any petition.

9. A Singular Precept is a decree by which, directly and legitimately, the obligation to do or omit something is imposed on some designated person or persons, especially in the case of urging the observance of the law.

10. A Rescript is an administrative act that the competent executive authority legitimately promulgates in writing and that, by its own nature, grants at the request of those interested, a privilege, dispensation, or another favor (for example, an indult for secularization).

11. Ordinances are rules or norms that must be observed at meetings, in which their constitution, policy and procedure are determined.

8. The documents listed in number 7 and all the other official writings of the Order must be published with the seal of the institution that enacts them and with the signatures of the competent authorities. Electronic signatures are valid if they comply with the civilly required guarantees.

9. The Sources of our Rules are: The universal laws of the Church; the universal laws concerning religious; the pontifical documents of any kind promulgated for us from the foundation of our Institute; the Constitutions, and the Common Rules; the Documents, Declarations and Decrees of the General and Provincial Chapters, celebrated over the course of time; the various Directories and Statutes; the General and Executory Decrees; the different regulations contained in the Rituals and Prayer Books; and instructions, privileges, exemptions and dispensations, as well as sound customs and traditions.

10. 1. In our Order, a religious House, in the strict sense, always requires a community or group of persons composed of at least four professed religious members; at least one of whom must be a priest; they must live together in a canonically erected House under the authority of a legally designated Superior and must lead a common life.

The religious House acquires canonical status by a formal decree, given in writing by the Supreme Moderator, observing all the requirements stated in the law, and with the previous written consent of the diocesan bishop.

In particular cases, and by necessity of the Order, the Fr. General may permit members of a canonical house to live not only at the main see but also in other community nuclei, constituting together a single religious community.

2. For a religious House to be called formed, and thereby to exercise all its rights and be subjected to all the obligations, it must have at least six solemnly professed religious, and one must be legitimately appointed as Superior.

3. A Station, or a House in the broad sense, is one that lacks canonical status, and, therefore, has no juridical personality, nor is it capable of rights or obligations.

4. A Filial Community is a part of the main Community that, in a different place somewhat close-by, leads a common life dependent on the same Rector, although another religious presides over it at the will of Fr. Provincial.

5. There can also be communities of presence, living in two or more houses with less than four religious each, forming a community of communion that cares for and energizes the life, vocation and mission of religious. The community project must be guaranteed with the appropriate mediations for this model. The community is presided over by a Local Superior, a member of the Presence.

11. 1. A Work of the Pious Schools, in a strict sense, is a center of activity depending on some Local Community, or on a Demarcation or on the General Congregation, erected according to ecclesiastical and civil laws, where one or several religious members of our Order, or one or several lay people connected with the Order, exercise a ministry.

2. If the legal ownership is shared with others, our rights, obligations and responsibilities should be defined in Statutes or Ordinances.

3. Works of the Pious Schools in a broader sense could be considered endeavors and institutions that, in accordance with our charism, are carried out by any Piarist community.

12. Piarist presence is the set of community and apostolic institutions (and related platforms that are established in their environment) that constitute and form the local, demarcacional or general specific Piarist reality. We will give to our Piarists presences suitable projects and teams for their growth and consolidation.

13. The relationships and responsibilities of the religious and the Communities have as their foundation, and according to their particular status, the principles of faith and the sacred ties of religious life and the common vocation, and the principles of identity, authority, co-responsibility and subsidiarity, conveniently harmonized with the principles of sound decentralization.

14. In our Order, in accordance with what the law states, the service of authority is exercised by each and every one of the Local and Major Superiors, as well as by the General Chapter and other Chapters, each one according to its respective status and jurisdiction.

The Superiors and Chapters have the obligation of demanding and encouraging the enforcement of the norms by which the Order is governed.

15. Our Superiors and their Vicars must be priests. By virtue of their legitimate election or appointment, they enjoy ordinary authority and exercise ecclesiastical jurisdiction in both the internal and external forum, in accordance with the norms of the law, the Constitutions and the Rules.

16. In our Order, the supreme internal authority is held by the General Chapter which alone, by law, has the power to dictate laws for either the whole Order or each Demarcation.

Other organs and Superiors can give norms or precepts within the limits of their jurisdiction, which, although they do not have the character of law, bind the religious.

These prescriptions and other norms both of the universal law and laws that concern only us, have juridical force and bind us, according to the sources from which they come.

17. 1. The Superior General is the priest who at a particular moment exercises authority over the whole Order either by being elected in a General Chapter or being appointed by the Holy See, or by having succeeded the previous Superior General because of death, resignation, or removal. He may also be called by other names, such as General Superior, Supreme Moderator, or, simply, Father General.

2. The Vicar General is the priest General Assistant, who, with ordinary vicarial authority, acts for the Superior General when he is absent or impaired, or holds any other assignments which have been entrusted to him.

3. The Provincial Superior is the priest who, at a given moment, is at the head of a formed or non-formed Province. He may also be called, simply, Father Provincial.

4. The Vicar Provincial is the priest Provincial Assistant who, with ordinary vicarial power, acts when the Provincial Superior is absent or impaired, or deals with any other matter that has been entrusted to him.

What is stated here about the Vicar Provincial is also valid, proportionally, for the Vicars of other Major Superiors of lower degrees.

5. The Vice-Provincial is the priest who is in charge of a dependent or independent Vice-Province.

6. The General Delegate is the priest who, with ordinary vicarial authority, directs a Demarcation that is called a General Delegation.

7. A Delegate (of Fr. General, Fr. Provincial, etc.) is the person who takes care of the matters entrusted to him by the respective Major Superior. If he is not a priest, the issues that involve the Order of Priesthood do not belong to his function.

8. The Provincial Vicar is the priest who, with ordinary vicarial authority, is in charge of a Provincial Vicariate.

9. The Rector or Local Superior is the priest who governs a canonically erected Local Community. He must be appointed for four years at Chapter time, or outside of Chapter time, until the end of the four-year term. Only for a just and reasonable cause, and with the consent of Father General and his Assistants, can Rectors be named for a shorter and definite time, but this should rarely be done.

10. The President is the religious who directs a Station (a House in the broad sense).

11. General or Provincial Visitors are religious priests, delegated by Father General or a Provincial, to make visitations of the Order, Provinces, or Houses. The same must be said of the Visitors in the Vice-provinces, Vicariates and Delegations, keeping the due sense of proportion.

12. By the name General Council is understood the group of four Assistants who, together with Father General, constitute the General Congregation. The General Curia, however, is comprised of all the religious who hold any office in the supreme government of the Order.

13. By the names Provincial Council, Vice-Provincial Council, Vicariate Council, or Delegation Council, is understood the group of Assistants or Consultors who, with their respective Superiors, constitute the Provincial Congregation, Vice-Provincial Congregation, Vicariate Congregation or Delegation Congregation. The Provincial Curia, Vice-Provincial Curia, Vicariate Curia or Delegation Curia includes all the religious who hold any office in the government of the corresponding Demarcation.

18. The Superior is the priest who enjoys ordinary authority and exercises it by virtue of the office in both the internal and external forum.

Major Superiors are Father General, the Provincial or Vice-Provincial Superior, the General Delegates who preside over any General Delegation, the Provincial Vicars who govern any Provincial Vicariate, and their Vicars.

Other Superiors are the Rectors or Local Superiors of canonically erected Houses.

19. The Delegate of any Superior has only delegated authority. Visitors, Assistants, and Consultors of any kind, Vice-Rectors, as well as major and minor officials, and the President of a House are not, strictly speaking, superiors.

20. It is not expedient that the Major Superiors and Assistants be appointed Rectors.

21. All Superiors and Officers should keep all documents and other things belonging to their office in perfect order, clearly separated from all personal documents and objects. Once their term of office is completed, they must transfer everything to their successors.

22. The religious who renounces his office or work must remain in it until he receives definite news concerning the acceptance of his resignation on the part of the competent Superior. In the same manner, the Superior or Official who, when his time in office has elapsed, must continue exercising his office with the extension of his authority until the new Superior or Official takes possession of his office.

23. 1. For the processing of all types of personal data, the Order and the Demarcations will be governed as follows:

1. With respect to candidates and novices, with the express consent of the interested parties.

2. With regard to religious, they may act freely, as long as the relevant data are used for the organization of their life and mission.

2. In the processing of all types of personal data we will act with the utmost care. The heads of the different juridical persons of the Order, within their competences, will issue norms in accordance with canonical and civil legislation, guaranteeing the safeguarding of privacy and the use of these data.

24. The Superiors or Officials, of any degree, appointed for a definite time, can be transferred to another duty, or removed from their office by their Major Superiors with the consent of their Councils, having first notified Father General, or his consent has already been obtained, when the well-being of the Order, the Province, or the House requires it for reasonable causes (for instance, the foundation of a new House or Work or the suppression of one; the difficulty or special importance of some office; a grave defect of authority, organization or administration; negligence in exercising his office, and other similar reasons). If they had been appointed with the “nihil obstat” of Father General or the General Council, the same “nihil obstat” is required for their transfer or removal.

In case of removal, the norms of the universal law must always be faithfully observed in a spirit of charity.

25. During the last three months preceding the celebration of a Local Chapter, no Superior should be removed from his office, unless he has committed some serious fault and after the cause of his removal has been communicated to him.

26. The Chapters and Superiors can, within the limits of their faculties, and in accordance with the norms of the law, delegate their ordinary executive authority to subordinate Superiors, Visitors, other individual persons and Commissions.

In the case of Superiors, this faculty is only valid in matters where the advice or consent of the respective Council is not required.

Regarding Major Superior’s Vicars, nos. 278, 306 and 307 should be taken into account.

27. 1. A vote can be collegial, deliberative, or consultative. In all Chapters, when canonical balloting is used, the vote is always collegial, in compliance with Canon 119. In other cases, according to our law, the voting is never collegial unless this is expressly stated.

2. Superiors sometimes need the deliberative or consultative vote of their Council to act. When the deliberative vote is needed, the consultors must express their opinion corporately, that is, through an act celebrated by the persons present who must have been legitimately convoked. Except in those cases prescribed in our law, a secret ballot is not required, unless the Superior or a Consultor asks for it.

3. In the case of a consultative vote, the Superior may convoke his Consultors so that they may express their opinion corporately through an action among those present, or he may ask each one of them separately.

In those matters where the Consultors have a consultative vote, in order to act validly, it is enough for the Superior to listen to them in either of the aforesaid ways, although he is not bound to follow their opinion, even when it is unanimous.

However, when the consent of the Consultors is required, the Superior acts invalidly without their vote, or against their unanimous vote, or against the vote of the absolute majority of the Consultors present. Nevertheless, he is not at all obliged to carry out the acts in the way the Consultors like if he does not agree and can abstain from acting.

4. In the case of a collegial vote, the result of the vote is binding.

5. In the Councils convened to ask for the deliberative vote, the Superiors and their Vicars, when acting as such, have the right to vote, as it is customary in our tradition.

28. 1. When, by universal or our own law, the vote of the Assistants or Consultors is required, it is supposed to be only consultative, unless it is clearly stated that it must be deliberative.

When in our laws the expressions General Congregation, Provincial Congregation or something similar appear, the vote is always deliberative, and the respective Superior with the consent of his Council must perform the act.

But when it is stated, “the Superior with his Council,” a consultative vote is always understood

2. It is understood that the Assistants and Consultors give their consent to the matters presented for their deliberation unless they expressly oppose them. And although they may expressly refuse their consent to the decision made by the majority, they cannot refuse their signature. But, if they request it, their opposing opinion must be stated in the minutes. They must keep the matter secret according to its seriousness.

29. When a deliberative or consultative vote is required, it must proceed in accordance with no. 27, except in the special cases in which the full Congregation is required or the vote should be collegial.

30. In cases of necessity, if Father General or some of his Assistants are absent, the Procurator General, in the first place, and the General Secretary, in the second, should be called to substitute for them.

31. At the beginning of their term, all Major Superiors, except the Supreme Moderator, with the consent of their Assistants and according to what has been stated in no. 281.1., should appoint one religious possessing the qualities of a Provincial Assistant who, when necessary, may take the place of any absent member of the respective Congregation. If the Demarcation is conformed by several countries, one religious could be appointed in every country to replace the Assistant who is absent. But only one of them could act each time.

32. 1. When, according to our law, the presence of the whole Congregation is required, the Major Superior and his four Assistants must be present at the session; if anyone is absent, it is necessary that he be replaced by the religious designated for this purpose in accordance with the prescribed order.

2. In other cases, with regard to the juridical effects, it is considered complete and its decisions valid, when its convocation has been made in the usual way, and the Major Superior or his Vicar and two Assistants are present, although the rest are absent.

3. If there is someone absent, in order to meet the required number of three members, it is necessary that the religious appointed for this purpose be called according to the prescribed order. When this happens, an absolute majority is required in making the decisions.

33. When the Congregation of any Demarcation is composed of only three members, namely the Major Superior and two Assistants or Consultors, three religious must always attend the sessions of the Congregation in which there must be voting.

34. The law that comes from the Church does not allow for any changes on our part.

35. With regard to change, interpretation, dispensation or suppression of the Constitutions, the norms prescribed in no. 126 of the same Constitutions must be observed.

36. Changing or suspending the Common Rules belongs exclusively to the General Chapter by an absolute majority; interpreting them authentically is incumbent upon both the General Chapter and the General Congregation, unless the issue is addressed in the norms of general ecclesiastical law.

37. The Superior General can occasionally dispense from the disciplinary norms of the Constitutions and Rules, when he deems it to be for the good of the religious.

Both the Major and Local Superiors can grant the same dispensation within the limits of their jurisdiction.

No dispensation should be granted without a just cause; and, if it concerns an especially important law, the Superior granting the dispensation must inform the Major Superior of a higher level.

Chapter II

CONSECRATED LIFE IN COMMUNITY

The Calasanctian Practice of the Vows

38. The Piarist religious must adapt his life to the evangelical lifestyle that Saint Joseph Calasanz made his own. He must become aware of the duty he has of knowing profoundly the person of the Founder, accepting the sound traditions of the Institute and conforming all of his life to the Constitutions and Rules prevailing in the Order.

39. By his incorporation into the Order, he contracts the obligation of assuming the lifestyle of Calasanz himself, and of acquiring the virtues that most helped him to attain holiness: love and contemplation of Christ crucified, devotion to Mary, humility and poverty, simplicity of life, patience, respect for persons, fidelity to the Church and the Sovereign Pontiff, and an attitude of permanent conversion.

40. By his religious profession he promises publicly to fulfill the religious vows of chastity, poverty and obedience, as well as our particular fourth vow to educate children and youth. According to our Holy Founder, this last one is not an absolute vow, as are the other three, but is one assumed under the vow of obedience.

Chastity

41. By professing the vow of chastity, the religious strives to live celibacy for the sake of the Kingdom. This forbids marriage, and, in the case of a religious who has professed solemn vows, invalidates the marriage itself.

42. To become worthy of the gift of chastity, the religious must avail himself of all natural and supernatural means, such as: self-knowledge, the harmonious integration of the elements that constitute his personality, a spirited and patient struggle, resources offered by a healthy psychology to help reach personal maturity, and especially the assiduous practice of prayer and a spiritual intimacy with Jesus and the Virgin Mary.

43. Among the means most in accordance with our tradition are: embracing our work with generosity; the continuous effort to acquire strong virtues, as recommended by our Founder; joy in community life; an open and unselfish friendship among our religious, especially with those most in need of understanding; simplicity of spirit; and an openness of heart to our Superiors and to other people endowed with experience and the gift of counsel.

44. Knowing the fact that Christ demands from us the greatest fortitude in the face of danger, as well as that serenity and solitude of heart which we take up as part of the cross in following Christ, we shall practice the ascetic norms of austerity and frugality that the experience of the Church has consecrated.

Let us strive to fulfill the divine law of penance. As regards fasting and abstinence, we can adapt ourselves to the laws of the Church, the special indults, and the practices and customs of each place.

45. With regard to human relations, reading, shows, entertainment and other such things, we must proceed with a critical sense, avoiding all that is harmful to our own vocation and dangerous to the chastity of a consecrated person. In this matter, we shall adapt our behavior to the norms given by our Superiors or those of the diocese in which we reside. And through our behavior, in words and deeds, we will belie the doctrines that offend chastity, which we have freely embraced for the Kingdom of Heaven.

Poverty

46. By the solemn profession of poverty, we follow Christ, who was poor, and reject not only the right to own personal property but also lose the capacity of acquiring and owning, and undertake to obtain by work whatever is necessary to live, to practice sobriety, to use material goods with the proper dependence upon legitimate Superiors, and to give to the common fund all the fruits of our labors and talents, personal gifts, salaries, social pensions, and whatever else is given or owed to us. Likewise, we endeavor to improve the inhumane situations in which poor people are found. Any act against the solemn vow of poverty is by its own nature null.

47. The lifestyle of our communities must not surpass that of a family of modest means that lives from its work. Consequently, everything related to our housing, food, drink, clothes, and vacations should be submitted for frequent revision, in order to practice rigorously the austerity in which the poor live. As a general rule, our meals should reflect poverty and simplicity, should seldom be expensive, and should not be exquisitely prepared.

48. We will avoid sterile idleness, as well as endless alienating work, which deprive us of adequate time and the tranquility of spirit necessary to restore energy, to participate in community acts, and to devote ourselves to personal prayer.

49. Individual responsibility in the search for more rigorous poverty should be encouraged. Each Demarcation will establish its own norms for personal expenses in such a way, however, that even the appearance of having strict personal rights on the part of our religious should be avoided. The amount of money assigned to each religious should be in accordance with our poverty, and it should never exceed the expenses of the common people of the region. Later on, an accurate review will be carried out.

50. With regard to our family, we will maintain prudent independence so that we should neither use their worldly goods customarily for our own benefit nor procure goods for our relatives. If they are in need, we should inform the Major Superior so that he can decide what he can provide for them.

51. We shall use the goods of the Community and those given to us for our personal use sparingly, not following the ways of the world.

Any means of transportation belongs only to the Community, should never be luxurious, and should be used as instruments of work in a spirit of poverty. The Major Superior, after having heard the request of the Community, will decide concerning the expediency of acquiring them.

In the same way, the Community only can acquire appliances, considered expensive in the opinion of the Major Superior, with the permission of the same Major Superior.

52. As for allowing others the use of our buildings and concerning collaboration with the local Church, which is peacefully engaged in helping the poorest people to exercise their rights, we must always act in accordance with the norms given by our Major Superiors and the local Church.

Our religious in their actions will avoid becoming instruments of any political party, and they should not refrain from doing for others out of inexcusable idleness based on fear or apathy. Rather, they will try to improve the inhuman conditions in which the poor live.

Obedience

53. The profession of the vow of obedience demands from us that, in imitation of Christ, we devote ourselves solely and totally to the will of God, and, moved by faith and love, we fully observe what our moderators or superiors stipulate, according to the spirit and lifestyle stated in the Constitutions.

54. Superiors must exercise the authority that they have received from God, through the ministry of the Church in a spirit of service; they should govern their subjects as children of God and encourage their voluntary obedience with respect to their human persons and promote in their initiatives the good of the Institute and the Church, always safeguarding their authority to discern and command what must be done.

They should also remember that, by virtue of their office, they have been made the link between the religious and all the Order.

55. The Community must exert itself to give the Superiors advice and help in the discernment of God’s will. The Superior, on his part and being aware of his own limitations, should ask for advice from his religious, either individually or as a community, and also from other experts if necessary. The Community, however, enjoys a deliberative vote only on the occasions established by our Rules.

56. The Superior, conscious that the will of God is not shown always through the majority and much less through pressure groups, must proceed with great freedom of spirit.

When in the Community meeting there are opposing opinions and important matters are at stake, the Superior should postpone the decision to another time and, meanwhile, have recourse to prayer in order to find a fitting solution.

57. When a decision has been legally made in a Community, the religious must feel bound by it, even though he may not personally agree with it.

58. Our religious must remember that they are members not only of the Local Community, but also of the Provincial and the General Community, and that the Superiors can transfer them from one House to another when required by the needs of the Order or for the good of the religious.

59. Although our religious are bound to obey by virtue of the vow only when the Superior expressly orders something in the name of holy obedience, they should try, when fulfilling their daily duties, to embrace a sincere obedience, thus practicing both the virtue and the vow.

Community of Prayer

60. Our religious should remember, in the first place, that religious life cannot exist without daily and sufficiently long prayer, the source of our life of piety. This life certainly grows from within but should be promoted by a wise external program.

61. Therefore, at the beginning of the school year, each Local Community should establish a program of its own acts of piety, bearing in mind the Constitutions, the traditions of the Order and the guidelines of the Major Superiors, presenting this program for approval by the respective Major Superior and his Council; and it should be revised periodically.

62. The Superior must also take care that all the religious assign sufficient time for individual prayer in their daily schedule. In the same way, he should provide that all may attend the Community acts where, beside vocal prayers, they should devote themselves to meditation on the Word of God for at least half an hour, with deep quietude of body and soul.

63. The Superior must take care that every religious has prepared his own personal project in writing.

64. We encourage the concelebration of the Eucharist as a distinctive sign of our union with Christ. During the celebration, at least sometimes, there should be a homily.

65. The priests and deacons have the duty of faithfully celebrating the Liturgy of the Hours, the prayer of the whole Mystical Body of Christ. When programming the daily schedule, the Local Community will give proper importance to the recitation of Morning Prayer and Evening Prayer. And, whenever possible, it is desirable that students and the faithful participate with us in this prayer of the Church.

66. In an attempt to intensify our union with God and our brothers, we will frequently receive the Sacrament of Reconciliation. The Superiors, on their part, must encourage the frequent reception of this sacrament. We will have communal penitential celebrations, especially during Advent and Lent.

67. We will perform a daily examination of conscience, in common or privately; and according to the Community program, we will review together our religious life and apostolate.

68. Our religious should be well versed in the sacred rites and liturgical rules of the Church and keep them faithfully.

69. In our Churches, we will celebrate the mystery of Christ throughout the year, and, in a special way, during the Paschal Triduum, which has as its apex the Resurrection of the Lord. As to the Liturgy of the Hours during those days, the customs of the Provinces should be followed. The entire Community will celebrate Christ’s Nativity with special solemnity and after proper preparation. The liturgical feasts must be celebrated with special care in our churches where there is a great number of faithful.

70. We will faithfully venerate the Blessed Virgin Mary, Patroness of our Order, and celebrate her feasts with filial devotion. According to the Roman and our own calendars, the main feasts are: the Solemnity of Mary, Mother of God; the Presentation of the Lord, the Annunciation of the Lord; the feast of the Blessed Virgin Mary, Mother of God of the Pious Schools; the solemnity of the Assumption of the Blessed Virgin Mary; the feast of the Holy Name of the Blessed Virgin Mary – celebrated especially because of the Title of our Order; and the Solemnity of the Immaculate Conception of the Blessed Virgin Mary.

When organizing our acts of piety, we should give proper importance to our traditional prayers, especially the Rosary and the Crown of the Twelve Stars composed by Saint Joseph Calasanz, adapting them to our times.

Following our custom, a Marian prayer should conclude all other Community prayers.

71. On August 25th, the whole Order will celebrate with the greatest possible devotion the solemn Liturgy of our Holy Founder. In those nations where this solemnity coincides with summer vacations, we should have at another proper time a worthy celebration with our students. In the same way, each Community will celebrate with proper honor the memory of St. Pompilius and its own Community Patron, and also the memory of the Saints and Blesseds of the Calasanctian Family.

72. To encourage the celebration of our liturgical feasts, the Superiors must take care to publish the Calendar of our Order every year.

73. Each year, our religious should attend a spiritual retreat for at least five complete days, during which time, in the presence of God, we must also deal seriously within ourselves with our personal and Community renewal.

74. Besides frequent talks about spiritual matters, we should occasionally have days of recollection during which, through prayer and meditation, we should renew our spiritual life and review our religious life.

75. We will keep internal and external silence, not only because it makes us more docile to the voice of the Spirit, but also as a sign of respect toward our brothers, especially in those places reserved to the Community and during the night, as well as during those times established by the Community schedule.

76. We should devoutly pray for the good of the Church and society, especially during the community recitation of Morning Prayer and Evening Prayer, observing the proper formulae; and we should also frequently pray in Community for the good governance of the Order, for the whole Calasanctian Family, for our Superiors, and for the increase of vocations. Also, at Chapter time, we should implore Divine assistance through special prayers.

77. To help the religious in the practice of prayer, there should be in each Community an inviting and reverent chapel, easily accessible to the religious, where the Blessed Sacrament is reserved so the religious will be able to pray not only in common but also privately.

Community Life

78. We must live the four vows of chastity, poverty, obedience, and, together with them, a special dedication to the education of children and youth in the bosom of an apostolic Calasanzian community. To contribute to the formation of this community, it is necessary to intensify our interpersonal relations and accept the structures that lead to the attainment of this goal.

79. In order to safeguard the intimacy of the religious family, the cloistered life should be kept without being this an impediment for our Community to accept and give hospitality.

When there is a reasonable cause, the Superior may allow that outsiders could enter the reserved places in the Communities.

80. When somebody goes out of the House, a notice should be left in some way of his having done so.

When planning summer vacations, the Superior and the religious should keep in mind the needs of the Houses and of their own Demarcation; nobody should dare to prolong his vacation time.

When there is a legitimate reason, the Local Superior can allow the religious to spend some days outside the House, unless it is a temporary absence in the service of the Community.

81. When a religious is taking a long and expensive trip, he should ask the Major Superior for written permission, stating the reasons for the trip and the economic means by which it will be financed with the approval of the Local Superior. The Superior must take into account the spirit of poverty and the social conditions of the place.

82. The Major Superior, with the consent of his Council and for a just cause, may grant the religious permission to live outside of a House of the Order, but not for more than a year, unless it is to recuperate from sickness, to study, or to practice some apostolic work of the Order.

83. Ordinarily, the Major Superior should not give permission to a religious without first hearing from his immediate Superior and should always inform the immediate Superior about the granted permission.

84. To have unity and to protect the legitimate freedom of the religious, we will try to maintain equanimity, especially when dealing with political matters.

We must obtain sufficient information about political matters but should not become members of any political party. We will embrace all of them in the Lord and pray that all their efforts bring about the good of society.

The practice of civil duties must be considered the personal obligation of every religious. In this matter, we must respectfully accept and faithfully practice the instructions of the Holy See and the local Church.

85. We must keep silence out of respect and prudent charity about anything which could harm the good name of the religious, in particular, and the good of the whole Community.

86. Meetings with another Community are very useful to awaken a sense of co-responsibility with regard to the whole Demarcational Community and to promote fraternity among all the members. The Superior will promote these meetings without loosing sight of the local and personal situations.

87. To publish their works our religious follow the Church’s laws.

Treatises about the life of Saint Joseph Calasanz or about the history of all the Order can be published only with the written permission of Father General unless they are reprints or translations into other languages.

Two copies of any work published by our religious must be sent to Father General.

88. Our presence on social networks and other Internet platforms, whether on a personal level as well as on a community and institutional level, will be done without hiding our identity as consecrated persons. We will use these platforms, essentially, for the educational, pastoral, and evangelizing purposes proper to our Order, avoiding all kinds of scandalous or superficial content.

89. Since daily recreation promotes fraternal union among our religious, there should be a recreation time and room specifically for these fraternal meetings.

90. In all communities, time shall be devoted to reading, studying, and commenting on our Constitutions and Rules.

91. Each house must take special care of the sick and the elderly with the help, if necessary, of its own Demarcation. The Superior, aware of his pastoral responsibility, should take care that the sick are helped at the proper time with the sacraments of the Church, and the sick religious themselves should ask for them spontaneously.

92. When a religious dies, the Superior of the community will immediately notify the Major Superior so that he can inform Father General and all the religious of his Demarcation. Father General will notify all the Order in the usual way.

93. 1. The Superior or his delegate, with another religious, should take care of the room of the deceased religious and take an inventory of the things found there. If something seemingly important is found, it should be sent to the Major Superior. He should discern, too, what should be discarded, distributed, kept in the House Archives, or sent to the Superior Archive.

2. When the Local Superior dies, the Vice-rector must take care; in the case of a Major Superior, this duty falls on his Council.

3. When the Father General or the Father Provincial dies outside of his residence, or when who expired was a former General, or has been for some time General Assistant, Procurator, Administrator, or General Secretary, the above mentioned inventory must not be taken, but his room should be shut and sealed, until the respective Congregation or Father General decides what to do.

Suffrages for the Dead

94. Upon receiving the news that one of our religious or a member of our Calasanzian Family with which we have a communion of suffrages has died, each of our Communities will remember them in the memento of the Community Mass, or in the common prayer of the Liturgy of the Hours, or by reciting other prayers from our Prayer Book.

95. The funeral Masses for our dead will be community gatherings.

The following suffrages must be offered for each religious who has died:

1. Each priest of his Community will celebrate three Masses.

2. Each priest of his Province will celebrate one Mass.

3. Each Community of the other Demarcations of the Order will celebrate one Mass.

96. The common suffrages are:

1. A Mass each month in every Community for the deceased of the Order. (That is to say, religious of our Order, members of the Calasanzian Family, those who have received a Fraternity diploma, the lay people who took part in our mission work, relatives and alumni).

2. On November 3rd, a Community Mass will be celebrated for our deceased; the same day, if possible and, if not, as soon as possible, each priest must offer a Mass for them.

3. Likewise, on November 3rd, each Community should recite Morning Prayer or Evening Prayer of the Office for the Dead for our deceased religious.

97. When the Supreme Pontiff dies, each Community will celebrate or concelebrate a Mass for his soul.

When the father or mother of a religious dies, a Community Mass must be offered in the Community to which he belongs.

During the month of November, all our Communities will offer a Mass and recite Morning Prayer or Evening Prayer of the Office for the Dead for our relatives, benefactors, and those who had received Diploma of Fraternity.

Also, in the month of November, all the Communities will celebrate a Mass for the other members of the Calasanzian Family

98. The respective Chapter of each Demarcation may add other suffrages for its dead.

99. To write about the main deeds of the deceased religious helps to deepen our love for the Order. Therefore, the proper Major Superior should care that a clear and brief article may be written to be published in Ephemerides Calasantianae.

Chapter III

OUR MINISTRY

100. The reason for our Order’s existence is derived from its office of evangelization entrusted to it by the Church. For this reason, it proceeds with all humanity, experiences the world situation, and endeavors to accomplish its own renovation and transformation through the integral promotion of man, as the Gospel requires.

101. Therefore, anything related to the education of children and youth and the problems of their evangelization is to be considered as pertaining to our vocation as Christian educators, to whom we are engaged by our fourth vow.

102. No discrimination should be made by reason of race or social status, but rather we should take special care of the poor or needy, according to the inclination of Calasanz. This criterion should have great weight when planning the work of the Demarcations.

103. We are committed so that in our environment everyone, and especially minors and vulnerable people, are protected against all types of sexual, conscience or power abuse and any type of exploitation.

Father General shall issue regulations for the protection of minors for the entire Order, and the Major Superiors shall adapt them to the legislation in force in each country and apply them rigorously, always looking to the good of the victims of such abuse.

104. The Calasanctian ministry, following the example of Calasanz, considers as most important that education is enlightened by faith. Therefore, our religious must constantly strive to live their faith deeply, following the teachings of the Church and the principles contained in our Constitutions and other documents of our Order.

105. Calasanctian educational activity offers a specific contribution to evangelization because evangelization is a transforming process of human promotion starting from within, modeling the individual and collective conscience according to the Gospel so that the synthesis of culture and faith, and of faith and life, is achieved without subordinating the Gospel to culture.

106. We will show special interest in creating a Christian community that will try with utmost care to evangelize itself and others; this should be done by proclaiming the word of God and experiencing it with a firm adherence to the Church, and the frequent reception of the sacraments, the apex of which is the Most Holy Eucharist.

107. We will strive to strengthen our presence at each place constructing the Piarist Christian community in which religious, members of Piarists Fraternities and all those who are part of the set of the Piarist presence may meet to share their faith and grow in Calasanctian identity.

108. We will take special care of the dignity of women, above all guaranteeing an education in equality and equity, as well as the co-responsibility of men and women in our Works, in communion with the Church and society.

The Education of Our Students

109. The education that we impart aims to make our students capable of satisfying their human needs and legitimate aspirations on all levels, taking pains to create a more just society. Hence, it tries to enable them to devote themselves to political realities through free, active and responsible participation.

110. With utmost care, we must see to it that our students achieve psychological maturity, gradual integration into society, and critical assimilation of cultural values so that they can directly unite them with the Gospel, and, thereby, attain their personal identity and internal freedom.

111. Through this integral education, we will collaborate with the Church and society in creating critical persons who will be able to distinguish earthly realities from a Christian perspective, to grasp the present social reality and to know how to accept and promote necessary change; to be open to a dialogue in the community, where the involved individuals, with mutual reverence, attentively listen to the opinions of others.

112. With the greatest respect for our students, we should lead them toward a personal encounter with Christ. We must offer the evangelical message in a progressive way adapted to their level of personal development, as well as their concrete circumstances.

113. We must educate our students to appreciate highly all natural and supernatural values, and we especially must instill in them the greatest respect for the dignity of the human person; we must always remember this love and have before our eyes this same piety in our work of educating the children and youth.

The Calasanzian Educator

114. Since we are co-operators of truth, we must pay great attention to and be sensitive of different cultures trying to enrich them with values they do not have. In this matter, we must always be very prudent and avoid abolishing existing doctrines or realities, unless, at the same time, we have something better to offer them.

115. Our office of evangelizing demands of us fidelity not only to the message, of which we are the servants, but also to the persons. We must transmit in a vital way the pure and complete evangelical message.

116. Following Calasanz’ example, we must consider the witness of our lives as the main and primordial means of evangelization; since this witnessing, though silent, is soundly strong and very effective proclamation of the Good News.

117. Considering our Founder as a perfect model for educators, we will cultivate with a special love the virtues that he taught by word and deed. Therefore, we should try to achieve simplicity of life, purity, humility, poverty and charity as the fundamental dispositions to bring efficaciously the message of our Savior to our children and youth, specially the poor.

Catechesis

118. We will consider catechesis as the best means to bring forth and strengthen Faith, to nourish life in the spirit of Christ, and to achieve an active participation in the liturgical mystery as well as in the apostolic commitment.

119. Faithful to the Calasanzian pedagogy, we must strive so that catechesis would lead our students to a sacramental life, especially with regard to Penance and the Eucharist, and in them they may nourish their love to the Blessed Virgin Mary and the Church.

120. Therefore, our Superiors must take care that those who work as catechists may receive serious preparation. They should also take care that among our religious there are specialists in catechesis who will promote and guide the constant renewal of our religious.

121. Catechesis must be carried out in celebrations of the Word of God, Reconciliation and the Eucharist, where the liturgical symbols, ministries and a festive character are of the most importance, in accordance with the liturgical year.

It is also very important that the children and youth are initiated in the spirit and practice of prayer, in proper places, times, and by persons qualified for this purpose, and exercise also the Calasanzian practice of continuous prayer, according to the conditions of the present time.

122. We must organize groups and movements of children and young persons, according to their faith development. These groups will encourage the children and youth in a most effective way to immerse themselves in the Christian message and to grow in the life of prayer. Thus, the number of children and young persons who take seriously the commitment to conform their lives to the Gospel will increase, and a propitious atmosphere will be created in which vocations for the service of the Church, priestly ministry and religious life will achieve this maturity.

123. We will pay special attention to the formation of the parents of our students through specific pastoral work and should work for their permanent formation so that they effectively help us to solve the educational problem.

124. The responsibility of evangelization lies mainly on the ecclesial community. The Christian community of our institutions must perform and periodically revise the planning of the catechetical program and all pastoral work and integrate it into the diocesan and parochial pastoral activity.

The Calasanzian School

125. Among the means chosen by the Church to evangelize, the school, as a social institution for the integral formation of children, enjoys a privileged place. According to Calasanz and our tradition, the popular school is the main activity which, in some way, constitutes our mission and gives it a particular character. Even more, by its nature and by the inspiration of our Holy Founder, it has such a connection with the Calasanzian charism, that, where our school activity is not forbidden, it is important that we do not abandon his task.

126. The calasanzian school, rooted in Christian principles as stated explicitly in our Constitutions, and in continuous growth to become a true educational community, is formed, first of all, by those persons who wish to testify to Christian values in the work of education and are open to those who responsibly accept our educational project.

127. In order to make this educational community a reality, our Order as a promoter of educational centers, will involve the participation of the students’ parents, the teachers, the employees, and the students themselves in its mission. This active and responsible participation should reach all levels and aspects of education, in a progressive way, according to the degree of their involvement and what circumstances permit.

128. All our centers should have a Declaration of Ideals that must gather the basic ideas and the fundamental values that ought to govern all the educational work of each Demarcation. This Declaration must be drawn up by each respective Congregation, and must be approved by Fr. General. It should be inspired by the documents issued by the competent ecclesiastical authorities, our Constitutions and Rules, as well as by the consideration of the educational norms of each nation

129. The school community, having this Declaration of Ideals before its eyes, will create a concrete Educational Project approved by the Major Superior with the consent of his Council. The acceptance of this program is the primary condition for the enrolment of the students in the school. In the same way, all the teachers must know and accept it before any contract is made with them and must also promise that they will act prudently, avoiding any personal internal conflict which could arise among them, thus disturbing the students.

130. In all our centers, the Christian message should be explicitly proclaimed, and community manifestations of our faith should be demonstrated. We must also take care that the Christian formation of those who have made the option for the faith, through their parents or by themselves, can find efficacious help to accept and cultivate this gift of faith.

131. Having the starting point in the Educational Community, children and youth natural groups, etc., we will try to form and foster Christian communities and insert them in the local Church, and make them live as a part of it. Without forgetting the proper pastoral care of the local Church and helping when it might be necessary, as a pastoral service, on Sundays and in the feast days, in our Churches the Eucharist should be celebrated, inviting the members of the Educational Community and our Christian Communities. Besides that, taking into account the wish of the Church and our traditions, even during weekdays we should invite our students to take part in the Mass.

132. Where circumstances forbid catechetical instruction in our schools or other institutions that we supervise, we must give a religious culture and a human education that is agreeable with faith. And we must always establish some Christian community that, through its witness might be the light and promoter of life in the educational center.

133. Faithful to the spirit of our Founder, we must avoid that the only reason for our teaching is the mere transmission of knowledge, rather our efforts should be directed to establish a school that is not only creative but also leads to a continuous renewal of society. To achieve this type of school, it must continuously renew itself and adopt the most up-to-date methods and means to find the best solutions to the educational problems.

To reach this goal, we must know the reality we are trying to influence through our planning; and we must value the results obtained. In our times, all this requires teamwork.

134. The Calasanctian school, non-formal education and all our mission platforms must be open to life through their insertion into the Church and local society. They will thus be able to complete education with the means of social communication and other educational-teaching resources; In this way, together they will turn our educational places into centres that animate socio-cultural activities for children and young people and will provide a more qualified service to local needs.

135. It will be the concern of the Piarist to educate the student for free time. Aware, moreover, that the presence of the educator is irreplaceable, he will give his time to children and young people with generosity and will lead them to apostolic commitment.

136. In our Centers of formal and non-formal education there must be no lack of timely and constant professional and vocational guidance, open to evangelical instances, which helps children and young people to know each other, to accept themselves and to project their life in society and in the Church of the future.

137. Among the laity who help us with their advice and works to interpret the signs of the times, there should be a preferential place for our alumni who love our Order and Institutions with a sincere heart. Our care for them, especially for the youngest, is a necessary complement of our educational activity and must be included among the para-scholastic activities, and it is not allowed to dispense with it.

138. Performing the scholastic, pastoral, and other kind of work entrusted to them, our religious should enjoy proper freedom so that, while practicing obedience, they can act with greater personal responsibility.

139. Our religious will consider as brothers and co-operators all lay people who, with their pedagogical activity or any other kind of co-operation in our school community, participate in our educative apostolate. It is most important that we take mature care of them from the start. We should choose them, preferably from among our alumni, helping them with careful attention, so that we may have more capable co-operators in our schools.

140. We should pay a just and equitable salary according to our capability and contribute to social security, following civil legislation and the teachings of the Church. We should receive their children with Calasanzian charity and try to educate them in our schools free of charge.

141. We must demand of ourselves a periodical evaluation and survey of our educational activity that leads to a revision of goals, strategies, methods and means, values we try to transmit or create, type of person we wish to form, and kind of organization and participation we have.

142. Keeping the due reverence to the different cultures, our works should be open to children and youth without any discrimination of sexes, making possible for all an adequate and harmonious education.

143. Taking into consideration the ordinances of the Church, civil law, and our Constitutions and Rules, the Provincial Congregation will draw up a Directory, where the rights and duties of the institution towards the Province or Community are clearly stated, if the latter is the owner of the Work. In it, among other things, the rules for appointment and the office and duties of the director, the professors or teachers, and other persons who work in the institution should be clearly defined. Also there must be norms concerning the economical administration.

These rules are also valid for all the Demarcations.

Other Activities

144. In addition to Catechesis, School, and Non-Formal Education, with the permission of the Major Superior we can assume, as ours, other activities in any sector and educational level, in the field of research on the sciences of education; as well as in the centers and groups of children and young people or in the spiritual direction of them.

145. In order that our boarding homes serve society and the family, especially when they are necessary because of the difficult conditions of many families, they should be continuously adjusted to the demands of a modern and sound pedagogy.

We also should take the same care of the students who have lunch at the school, and of the students who remain after school hours, or those who live in boarding houses for university students.

For the good direction of all these institutions, we must look for greater efficiency rather than numbers.

146. Our churches, even though they may not be parishes, are a field for our apostolate according to an old tradition. Therefore, we should exercise in them the holy ministry on behalf of the faithful according to the ideals of Saint Joseph Calasanz, and in taking special care in proclaiming the word of God, in celebrating liturgical activities, and in promoting Calasanzian associations for the children, youth and adults so as to nourish their spirituality, and to stimulate them to practice some apostolate.

147. In our desire to serve the needs of the Church, if concrete circumstances so warrant, in the judgment and with the consent of the General Congregation, we may also accept parishes. This principle will help to develop our ministry in all contexts, and especially in nations and regions where we cannot otherwise develop our childhood and youth apostolate.

148. Our parishes must have a Calasanctian seal. The Piarist Christian Community and Fraternity will be strengthened in them, we will create children’s and youth centers in them and we will collaborate with particular commitment in the schools and educational works already existing; we will carefully organize the catechesis of children, young people and adults; and encourage any initiative that contributes to the education of children and youth, preferably poor, whether in schools themselves or any other type of organization. We will take care of the relationship between all our parishes and their network collaboration.

149. Always following the call of the Church, our Order will serve the missions “ad gentes” with its charism. Therefore, our religious and laity attached to us could be sent to help those peoples more in need of an evangelizing education.

150. For greater efficiency in government, the Major Superior, within his Demarcation, may establish the Ministry Secretariats or create other agencies to assist him in the performance of his office.

151. The Major Superiors, as the responsible persons of the Works, should guide, approve, and evaluate their activities.

Chapter IV

VOCATIONAL PASTORAL AND FORMATION OF THE RELIGIOUS

152. Although the religious vocation is a gift from God, we must ask the Lord, with fervent prayers and with loyalty to our vocation, pastoral work and community of joy, to send workers into the harvest. All the vitality of the Order and its adequate renewal depends primarily on the proper and continuous education of our religious

153. In order to put this principle into practice, we must adapt our vocational ministry to the different stages of life. These are the stages of formation of the members of the Pious Schools:

1. Beginning of the Vocational journey

2. Initial formation with three steps: Pre-Novitiate, Novitiate, Juniorate.

3. Permanent formation.

The Order has a General Directory for each one of these formation periods.

154. Each religious and every Community must feel responsible for collaborating in the birth and maturity of vocations. Therefore, besides Christian formation and vocational orientation, which we must offer to our children and youth through the practice of our apostolic ministry, we must also have a special care either individually or in-groups of the young persons who manifest signs of a vocation.

155. All religious have the duty of helping their Major Superiors in promoting vocational pastoral. The Major Superiors with their Councils, should do the following:

1. Establish Formation Houses and other structures suitable for the development of vocations.

2. Prepare some religious who may become formators in the different stages of formation.

3. Compose a Directory to lead and regulate the vocation ministry, and, among other things, to deal, with the Piarist formation, as well as with study programs at all stages of life, from that which precedes admission into the Order to the permanent formation, inclusively.

For the composition of this Directory, what has been decreed in the Chapters and by the General Congregation should be taken into consideration. The General Congregation must approve the Directories developed for each Demarcation.

156. To organize the work concerning vocations within the Order, the Major Superiors should appoint vocational pastoral coordinators for all their Demarcation and each House; their work will consist of forming a responsible conscience in all the religious concerning their responsibility with regard to vocations in orienting those who work in that field and in giving them books, holy pictures and other suitable material to spread the knowledge concerning our Holy Founder and mission. All Demarcations should designate an amount of money for this purpose in their annual budget.

Father General should appoint a Delegate for Vocational Pastoral for the whole Order.

Formation Centres and Formators

157. With regard to the Novitiate and Juniorate, the formation of the candidates must be performed in houses designated for this purpose. The Supreme Moderator with the consent of his Council has the right to establish, transfer or suppress the Provincial or Inter-provincial Novitiates and Juniorates by a written decree.

Father General, with the consent of his Council and having heard from the respective Provincial, can allow the establishment of several novitiates in the same Province when it is necessary.

158. Formation Houses could be Demarcational or Inter-Demarcational and should be shaped according to the General Directory. To secure a better formation these houses should be dedicated mainly to formation. Demarcational Formation Houses should be open to the necessities of other Demarcations. The Inter-Demarcational Houses of Novitiate and Juniorate follow the Statutes approved by Fr. General with the consent of his Council

159. The Master of Novices and the Master of Juniors, in the strict sense, will be named by the Provincial Congregation, with the «nihil obstat» of the General Congregation; and, in the dependent Vice-provinces, after having heard the opinion of the Vice-provincial Congregation. In the case of Inter-Demarcational Houses, are appointed according to the Statutes They should be appointed for four years and will not be removed unless there is a just cause, but, at the end of this four-year period, they can be re-appointed. They must program the order and way of the candidates’ lives, although the responsibility of their formation rests on the whole Community. In all other matters related to the Community family, they and their students are under the Superior of the House.

160. The Major Superiors must take care that in every Demarcation there are religious prepared to fulfil the offices of Master of Novices and Master of Juniors, as well as competent members in every aspect regarding our charism. These Formators have the duty of permanently improving their specific and personal preparation.

161. When the number of students or any other just cause so requires, the immediate Major Superior, with the consent of his Council, can appoint an Assistant to the Master.

It belongs to the same immediate Superior to designate the professors for the Houses of Formation.

162. Formation must develop in candidates the ability to exercise their future vocation to accompany and serve according to the Piarist criteria expressed in the training curriculum: the spirit of service from the last, sensitivity for the poor, the gift of themselves to the mission and the community, the willingness to educate continuously, transparency of life, willingness to be accompanied, overcoming clericalism and secularism, training in the integral protection of minors, teamwork.

Aspirancy and Pre-novitiate

163. It is expedient to establish in every Demarcation, a house for aspirants or some other center for vocations, taking into consideration the characteristics of each place. In them, the candidates who show signs of a vocation, at least at the level of giving hope, must be formed under the direction of an experienced Piarist religious, so that they might discern and develop their vocation

164. It is incumbent upon the Major Superiors to prepare carefully communities ready to receive young men who wish to experience our life and ministry before making a decision.

165. The candidates for the Novitiate should have taken the curriculum prescribed in their own country to initiate higher studies. Those who do not aspire to the priesthood should have finished at least the general studies established for everybody in their country. However, the Major Superiors must determine the conditions prevailing in each region.

166. In our Order, the Pre-novitiate is compulsory as a preparation for the Novitiate; the respective Major Superior must decide its activities, place and duration, taking into account the need of the candidates and the General Directory for Formation. The purpose of this time is candidates reach an appropriate human and Christian maturity before starting Novitiate.

167. In order for this trial to be effective, it should not be too short and must be performed under the guidance of an expert religious, appointed by the Major Superior. The young men can devote themselves to study during the time of Pre-novitiate.

Where there is an Aspirants’ House properly organized, the Major Superior can dispose things so that the last year of the aspirant’s formation, or a good part of it, can be designated as a Pre-novitiate formation.

168. The Major Superior, or somebody delegated by him, should check with great prudence whether the candidate for the novitiate is psychologically sound, free of any impediments, possesses sufficient maturity to begin religious life, and has all the documents required by law.

169. The impediments that forbid the admission of the candidates, unless they receive a dispensation, are as follows:

1. The following are invalidly admitted to the novitiate:

1. Those who are not yet seventeen years old.

2. A spouse, during marriage.

3. Those who are bound by a sacred tie with any institute of consecrated life or are incorporated into any society of apostolic life, unless he is to transfer into our Order.

4. One who enters the Order by force of violence, grave fear or fraud, or he who is admitted by a superior who is forced in the same way.

5. One who has hidden his incorporation into some institute of consecrated life or a society of apostolic life.

6. One who has committed any offence by which he should have been or must be automatically expelled from the Order, unless there is previous and clear proof of his repentance and conversion.

7. One who is liable to punishment on account of having committed a serious crime, of which he is or may be accused either in the ecclesiastical or civil forum.

2. The following are illicitly admitted to the novitiate:

1. A bishop, without consulting the Holy See.

2. A secular priest, without consulting his own Ordinary.

3. Those who are encumbered with debts that they cannot pay.

4. Those who must pay off debts or are involved in secular matters from which may originate lawsuits or other troubles.

5. Sons who must help their parents or other relatives, and fathers whose work is needed to rear and educate their children.

6. Those who are destined for the priesthood in the Order but are bound by some irregularity or canonical impediment.

7. Those who publicly belong to some political party or actually remain enrolled in it.

3. Less serious impediments that do not absolutely exclude the candidates from our Order are certain defects, which, perhaps, could be an obstacle for the efficacious exercise of our ministry.

The Novitiate

170. The Novitiate starts with the Rite of Initiation into Religious Life, as it is in our Ritual, which should be presided over by the Major Superior or his delegate.

171. The candidates should make a spiritual retreat for at least five full days before starting the Novitiate.

172. To be valid, the Novitiate must be carried out in a house properly established for this purpose. For validity, it is required that the Novitiate is completed over twelve months in the same Novitiate Community. The Major Superior may permit that the group of novices lives in another canonical House of the Institute designated by him and for a determined length of time.

In some particular cases, by way of exception, the Supreme Moderator with his Council’ s consent may allow that the candidate performs his Novitiate in another canonical House of the Institute, under the direction of an experienced religious who will act as Master of Novices.

173. An absence from the Novitiate House for more than three months - be they continuous or interrupted - makes the Novitiate invalid.

If the absence is more than two weeks, the time must be made up.

174. When admitted to the Novitiate, the candidate must sign in the presence of two witnesses a document wherein he clearly declares that he will not ask for any salary or compensation in the event of leaving the Order for whatever reason.

175. In the Novitiate, all novices, independently of their option for priesthood, will receive the same formation as regards human, Christian, religious and Calasanctian education, according to the Directory for Formation.

176. The Novitiate, which initiates the religious life in our Institute, has as its objective that the novices can know more fully the divine vocation, especially in connection with our Order, can experience our way of life, can model their mind and heart on the spirit of our Order, and can verify their purpose and fitness. During the time of his Novitiate the novice should be instructed mainly in the new spiritual and charismatic identity as member of the Pious Schools.

177. The novices should be progressively introduced into our way of life through the practice of the evangelical counsels and of community life, as well as through the study of our Founder’s life and the history of our Order, our Constitutions and Rules, our traditions, and the actual needs of our Institute.

178. The time of Novitiate must be properly used for the novices’ formation, and, therefore, the Novitiate should not be devoted to studies and works that do not contribute directly to this formation.

Nothing forbids, however, the novices from spending some limited time in the study of some subjects such as recreational arts, languages, and especially Latin.

During the time of Novitiate, it is forbidden to study in order to obtain academic degrees.

179. The total time that the novices devoted to practicing the apostolate outside the novitiate community is not included in the twelve months required for the validity of the Novitiate. On the other hand, the total time of the Novitiate, the time of apostolic activity included, is not allowed to be extended beyond two years.

180. Any work or occupation entrusted to the novices will be performed under the direction and supervision of the Master of Novices. But in undertaking and carrying them out, the formation of the candidates must be sought, not the benefits to the House.

181. To assess the training process of the novices and to have a better discernment of their vocation, the Major Superior or his delegate should visit them at least three times a year. Before this four-month visit, the Master will send a report to the Major Superior about the growth of each novice. In case of an Inter-provincial Novitiate, this information should be sent according to the Statutes of the House.

182. The novice may freely leave the Order, and the Major Superior may also dismiss him.

Once the Novitiate is finished, if the novice is considered qualified, he should be admitted to simple profession; if such is not the case, he must be dismissed.

When any doubt remains about his qualification, the Major Superior may extend the time of Novitiate but not for longer than six months.

183. Before the profession of simple vows, the novice must present in writing to the Major Superior a petition where he will clearly declare his vocation to the religious life and manifest his honest intention and his firm decision to devote himself to the religious state. This petition and declaration must be kept in the archives.

184. Before professing simple vows, and for all the time he is bound by the vows, the novice must hand over to whom he chooses the administration, use and usufruct of his property.

The obligation of making a will, if it is necessary, can be postponed until the time immediately preceding solemn profession.

To change these norms for a just cause or to perform any act concerning his temporal property, the religious who has professed simple vows needs the permission of the Major Superior.

185. It belongs to the Major Superior with the consent of his Council to admit the novice to simple profession. In houses belonging to the Demarcation, before proceeding to vote for his admission to profession, the Major Superior, orally or in writing, should explain the information received from the formators and the outcome of the consultative vote of the Novitiate Community.

In inter-Demarcational houses Statutes should be followed.

186. For the validity of simple profession, the following conditions are required:

1. The person making the profession must already be at least eighteen years old.

2. He has validly finished the Novitiate.

3. He has received admission freely granted by the Major Superior, with the consent of his Council.

4. This profession must be made expressly and without violence, grave fear, or deceit.

5. Must be received by the Major Superior himself or by somebody else.

187. Before profession, the novice must make a spiritual retreat for at least five full days.

188. When the time for the Novitiate is finished, the novices must make simple profession for one year, and it should be renewed every year until solemn profession, according to the norms established in n. 201.

189. For a just reason, the Major Superiors may allow that the simple profession be made outside of the Novitiate House and be anticipated, but not for more than fifteen days, provided that the candidate is already eighteen years old.

190. The documents of simple profession and of the successive renewals must be made in duplicate; one of the copies must be kept in the archives of the House where the profession was made and the other in the archive of the Province; both copies should be signed by the newly professed religious, by the Superior who received the profession, and by two witnesses, and must bear the seal of the House.

In dependent Vice-provinces, Provincial Vicariates and in inter-Demarcational novitiates, three copies must be made.

191. The Major Superior or his delegates, following the ceremonies prescribed in our Ritual, must receive the simple profession and its renovations.

192. The novices and the religious who have professed simple vows enjoy the same privileges as those who have professed solemn vows, and, in case of death, have the right to the same suffrages.

Juniorate

193. By Juniorate is understood the period of at least six years, during which our candidates, in a House legitimately appointed for this purpose, devote themselves to study, especially philosophy and theology. During this time and for a good charismatic formation, Juniors should enrich themselves with our religious, community and apostolic life, and to fulfil their human, spiritual, and Calasanctian formation.

194. Because of the special responsibility that rests on the formation of our Juniors, whether destined to the clerical state or not, their education will be carried out in a House especially established for this purpose and under the direction of a Master of Juniors who will progressively lead them to a religious and Calasanctian life, according to the norms established in the Directories for Formation and Study.

195. In order to attain the desired religious formation, it is very important that the Formation begun in the Novitiate be carefully continued in the Juniorate.

196. Those who are called to the diaconal or priestly ministry must follow the established curriculum with great diligence and dedication in a House of Formation, in the strict sense, or in another properly established centre of studies, and they should receive an adequate pastoral preparation. In very rare cases, the Major Superior may grant permission to some Juniors to take simultaneously subjects not included in the theological curriculum. For those who do not intend to enter the clerical state, there should be a special theological course.

During this time devoted to studies and formation, there should not be any duty or work entrusted to the candidates that could prevent them from reaching their main goal.

197. The Superiors should have care that all our religious study in a university, or at least acquire some specific technical expertise that could be useful for our ministry. For the intellectual formation, a psychological, pedagogical, catechetical and sociological preparation that will help our religious to be eminently qualified for Piarist ministry is most important.

198. The Juniors should feel responsible for creating a community where they live, and they should never consider this stage of their formation as a transitory period but rather as an opportunity to build and dynamically renew the Order, and so they will become better qualified for their own apostolic life. They should also remember that, by professing the vow to teach, they contracted the duty of learning, and so they should unite study with piety in such a way that they may serve as a stimulus for each other.

199. The Master should send a report in writing about the functioning of the Juniorate and about each student at least once a year to the Major Superior. The visit of the Major Superior or his delegate will deal with the life, customs, and studies of the Juniors.

200. The candidates must ask the Major Superior in writing for the renewal of vows and admission to solemn profession.

201. The Major Superior, under whose immediate jurisdiction he is, grants the Junior’s admission to the renewal of vows. However, before admitting him, the above mentioned Superior should require the proper information and consult both the Community of the Juniorate and his Council.

If the Juniorate is Inter-Demarcational, in the strict sense, norms content in the Statute should be followed

202. Once the time of simple vows is finished, the professed may freely leave the Order. In the same way, the Major Superior, for just and reasonable causes and after having listened to his Council, may exclude the professed from the renewal of vows or from making solemn profession; however, he will make this decision after he has tried in vain all the means of fraternal correction.

203. For a valid solemn profession, besides what is stated in no. 186, c, d, and e, the following is required:

1. The candidate is at least twenty-one years old

2. The candidate has been in simple profession for at least three years before, except for what is established in n. 204.

204. Solemn profession may be anticipated for a just cause, but not for more than a trimester, provided the candidate is already twenty-one years old.

205. The Supreme Moderator, with the consent of his Council, may dispense from simple vows, at the request of the religious. In the same way, the Superior General may dismiss the professed who, for any reason, is considered unworthy of making solemn profession.

206. Any physical or psychological sickness fraudulently hidden or disguised before profession, and even when contracted after profession but is of such a nature that, according to the experts’ judgement, it makes the religious unable to live in the Order, is sufficient cause not to admit him to renewal of profession, or to make solemn profession, unless the sickness was contracted through the Order’s negligence or because of the work performed in the Order.

On the contrary, if the religious becomes insane during the period of simple vows so that he cannot renew simple profession, he cannot be dismissed from the Order although he is not able to renew his simple vows or make his solemn profession.

207. One who legitimately left the Order after finishing the Novitiate or making his profession may be received again by Father General with the consent of his Council and without the obligation of repeating the Novitiate. The same Supreme Moderator should determine what kind of probation he should serve before simple profession and the length of time that the vows should be in effect before solemn profession, observing what is established in no. 115 of the Constitutions and no. 204 of the Rules.

208. It is the responsibility of the Major Superior that before solemn profession the candidates should dedicate a sufficient length of time of at least one month to special preparation in a holy retreat and prayer, free, as far as possible, from any other occupations; they should prepare to consummate their perpetual consecration to the Lord. For immediate preparation they should make a spiritual retreat for at least eight full days.

209. 1. In order that he may be admitted into our Order as really poor, the professed in simple vows, before his solemn profession if it was not been done before, by a Deed of Will valid in civil forum, must renounce all his present possessions and rights, in favor of whom he prefers; and in favor of the Order (Province …) regarding what he will receive in the future.

2. The solemnly professed who did not do it in the proper time should do the Deed of Will as soon as possible and with legal validity, according to the common law.

3. The solemnly professed loses the capacity to acquire, possess, administer or alienate any property; therefore, any act contrary to the vow of poverty is invalid and any thing he acquires belongs to the Order.

210. Nothing prevents that, when the candidate makes his profession, he may add some personal provisions provided they do not contradict the profession nor constitute any condition. However, the formula of the profession should appear in all its integrity, undivided, and in the pre-eminent place.

211. There should be three authentic copies of the solemn profession document, with the signatures mentioned in no. 190, which must be kept in the Local, Demarcational, and General Archives.

212. The solemnly professed, according to the disposition of the law, ceases to belong to the diocese to which he belonged when he was in the world. The Superior who received the solemn profession must notify the pastor of the church where he was baptized of this fact. Following the norm of law, the Major Superior in his Demarcation, or Major Superior under whom comes the Inter-Demarcational Juniorate, who gave the dimissorial letters to receive Holy Orders, must notify the above mentioned pastor, personally or through another person, about the received Orders.

213. The Major Superiors will not admit anyone to Holy Orders while they are not sure, after careful examination, of the candidate’ s good religious behavior, their qualification for the diaconate or priesthood, and their diligence in studying. When any grave doubt about their behavior and qualifications remains, they should not be allowed to be ordained.

214. Only those who have professed their solemn vows may be admitted to Holy Orders. Before the solemn profession, the candidates for Holy Orders must give the testimony prescribed by Church law.

Permanent Formation

215. Our consecrated life demands that, with great diligence and vigorous determination, we constantly pursue the maturation of our vocation, we adopt a really evangelical attitude before the changes occurring in modern society, and, with a continuous renewal of our lives, we encourage the children and youth to join our communities and devote themselves to our apostolic activities.

To give a full response to these three postulates, we must think seriously about formation, following the directions content in the Directory for Permanent Formation. This should be the object of a personal and irrevocable purpose that will urge us to keep and renew our Piarist vocation.

216. As Christian educators, we are under the obligation of living in a state of permanent formation that will lead us to a continuous growth in faith, courageously accommodating our lives to the life and doctrine of Christ, carefully interpreting the signs of the times, rediscovering the Calasanzian charism, existentially translating it into our daily activity and overcoming, as much as we can, all difficulties with a Christian spirit.

217. The responsibility for permanent formation, which concerns each religious, must be assumed by the Community as its own. And, knowing that the Community is the proper place for this formation, all of them must create the favorable conditions to foster it.

218. Our ministry with youth urges us to a continuous renewal, accepting the values of cultural development and the achievements of the science of education, as well as the adoption of the best systems to promote the reform of society.

It is necessary, above all, that, in ways always new; we make our pastoral activity more efficient, especially in the teaching of catechesis and in the spiritual direction of children and youth groups.

219. The Major Superiors should systematically see to it that our religious devote themselves to university studies or obtain in some other way the available degrees, and acquire technical ability in the pastoral ministry not only for the children and youth but also for the pupils’ parents and the lay teachers.

220. The Congregation of each Demarcation, at the beginning of its quadrennial term, must plan the permanent formation of all the religious of the Demarcation, according what is statute in the Directory of Permanent Formation.

221. At the beginning of their mandate, the major superiors shall appoint the religious responsible for the accompaniment of young adult religious who are in their first six years after solemn profession.

Chapter V

THE ORGANIZED STRUCTURE OF OUR ORDER

The Religious

222. With their first profession, our members are admitted into the Order, where they have rights and duties both by universal law and our own statutes.

223. At the time of first profession, the religious should take a religious name of his own choosing. On the other hand, he should show in his writings and documents, when possible, at least by the initials Sch. P. or S. P. that he is a member of our Order.

224. Although the order of precedence depends on the time of first profession, the Superiors, during their tenure, precede other religious according to their status. In this question, however, courtesy and mutual reverence should prevail.

225. The religious, grouped according to the rules of our law, form local communities, fundamental nuclei of the Order, established in religious Houses, lawfully erected. The groupings of Houses, also according to the law, form the communities of upper degree: Provincial Vicariates, Vice-provinces, Provinces and General Delegations, formed respectively by their communities. All these Demarcations work properly in their own territorial circumscriptions. Finally, from the properly structured union of all communities and all members, arises the General Community or Order of the Pious Schools. Precedence among the various Demarcations and Houses depends on the priority of their date of erection. In the event of a merger of several Demarcations, the resulting new retains the historical priority of the most ancient of them

226. Every religious must be incardinated into a Province or independent Vice-province, either by religious profession of vows or by a legitimate subsequent agreement of incardination.

Nobody can be excardinated from his Province or independent Vice-province against his will, unless Fr. General, for the good of the Order, decides otherwise.

227. All religious must be assigned to some determined House or Community. The novices are considered assigned to the House where they live.

As to the participation of the students who have professed simple vows in the community meetings, what is stated in no. 350.1 should be kept.

The novices may occasionally attend the Community meetings only as listeners, if the Superior, together with the Master, thinks it to be good.

228. Unless something to the contrary is expressly stated in the Constitutions and Rules, only the professed in solemn vows may enjoy active, passive, or both voices when there is balloting or an election.

229. Assignment takes place when the legitimate Major Superior gives a legal order either orally in the presence of two witnesses or through letters of obedience. And, if nothing is expressly said against it, from the moment of this order or the date of the letters of obedience, the religious acquires in his new House all the rights that he enjoyed in the previous one.

230. 1. When a religious is sent by virtue of obedience to another Province, independent Vice-province, General Delegation, or is assigned to the General House, he does not lose his incardination in his original Demarcation although he must obey the Major and Local Superiors of his new residence. In it from the first moment, he enjoys all the rights and has all the duties he had in the previous place, as it is stated in no. 229, if nothing to the contrary has legitimately and expressly been said.

2. Only Father General can give these Letters of Obedience. According to circumstances, sometimes they can be given for a limited time. When this period is finished, it is prolonged by the same law until Fr. General gives new obedience.

3. The religious who lives in a General Delegation, does not lose the passive voice for the office of Provincial or Assistant Provincial in his own Province. However, in order for the election or the appointment to be effective, the General Congregation’s «nihil obstat» is always needed.

231. He who, either by his Superior’s order or for another legitimate reason resides temporarily in any of our Communities is considered as a guest; but he still belongs to the Community from which he came with all rights and obligations.

During the period of time that he lives in the new Community, he is under the authority of the Local Superior as regards common life and the acts of prayer, excepting what could be an obstacle to fulfil the mission entrusted to him.

The guest may participate in the Community meetings, with voice but without vote. With regard to the economical aspects, the Superiors of both Communities must decide what should be done.

Our Communities should always foster a spirit of hospitality toward everybody; on his part, the guest religious should graciously offer his collaboration because of the hospitality received.

232. As far as possible, no one should be given any assignment without first consulting with him.

233. The Major Superior, with the consent of his Council and after having gathered the necessary information, may admit, as aggregates, to live with and work with us, not only priests, but also lay people who share our spirituality and mission. In the case of marriages, with or without children, special care will be taken of the autonomy and space proper to their family life, and their participation in the life of the community will be defined with the approval of the Major Superior with his Council.

To avoid difficulties, a temporary and renewable agreement will be signed between the attaché and the Major Superior; It will explain the conditions of admission and possible departure or dismissal. This agreement must conform to civil laws, so that it is also civilly valid. The Major Superior may allow the attaché to speak at Community meetings. He shall be deemed to be attached to the Community in which he resides.

234. Laymen gathered together in different Christian communities and participating in the Calasanzian spirit enrich that same spirit both with the lay dimension of the life they profess, as well as with the help they lend our ministry. The Major Superiors in their respective Demarcations will fervently promote and co-ordinate these associations according to the general guidelines of the Order regarding this matter.

235. 1. The Order will promote the birth and consolidation of Piarist Fraternities. The Piarist Fraternity is the group of Christian faithful associated into small communities in order to live the Piarist Charism (spirituality, action and life), everyone according to his laity, religious or priestly vocation. The Fraternity is, therefore, an Association of Faithful integrated into the Piarist Charism, which has been recognized as such by the Order of the Pious Schools.

2. The Piarist religious, always with the permission of their respective Major Superiors, may integrate the Piarist Fraternities.

3. The Demarcations and the Order will establish with the Piarist Fraternities the necessary institutional relationships in order to favor the dynamism proper for the charismatic integration and to promote, together, the development of the Piarist charism and mission.

236. The Demarcations will try to organize and implement the processes of participation in the Pious Schools, considering:

1. Training plans in initial and permanent Piarist identity for the cooperation modality

2. Itineraries for the development of the shared Mission in all presences

3. Strategies for implementing presence projects with appropriate teams

4. Encounters and meetings of enrichment and collaboration between the Demarcation and the Piarist Fraternity or other similar associations

237. Father General, by his own initiative or at the request of some Major Superior, may grant Letters of Fraternity to those persons who, by their love and beneficence, have deserved them. The Major Superiors should inform Father General every year about the Letters of Fraternity granted.

Those who receive the Letters of Fraternity participate in the spiritual benefits of the Order.

In each Demarcation, there should be a catalogue of the persons who have received the Letters of Fraternity.

238. 1. The special situations in which the religious may be found from a juridical viewpoint are:

1. Legitimate absence: one who, with the permission of the Major Superior and following the norms of canon 665, 1, legitimately lives out of the House.

2. Illegitimate absence: one who is absent without the required permission of the Superior from the religious House with the intention of evading the authority of the Superior, or who, when the time of the legitimate absence is finished, unduly prolongs his stay outside of the House. The intention of not following the authority of the Superior is presumed after fifteen days following the departure of the religious or one-month after the time granted.

3. Exclaustrated: one who, having professed solemn vows, has obtained an indult from either Fr. General or the Holy See, or has been imposed by the Holy See itself, and lives temporarily outside of the House, remaining dependent on and under the care of his Superiors and also of the Ordinary of the place, according to the norms of the law.

4. Admitted in a diocese on an experimental basis: one who, having professed solemn vows, has requested and has received from the Holy See the indult to leave the Order and has found a bishop who will receive him on an experimental basis. During the experimental period, they remain dependent to and under the care of the Ordinary, and the obligations and rights derived from profession are suspended.

5. Transferring to another Institute: one who, having professed solemn vows, has obtained from the Holy See, according to the norms of law, an indult to transfer into another Religious Institute. During the time of probation, which must precede perpetual profession in the new Institute, although the vows remain in force, the rights and duties that he had in our Order are suspended. By profession in the new Institute, the religious is incorporated into it, and the preceding vows, rights and obligations cease.

For transferring to a secular institute, or to a society of apostolic life, the same norms must be observed, except for the special mandates of the Holy See.

2. The Superiors will not allow their subjects to live in an unclear juridical situation; on the contrary, they must strictly observe the prescriptions of the law.

239. 1. The following religious are deprived «ipso facto» (by that very fact) of active and passive voice, although they enjoy the merely spiritual privileges of the Order:

1. The exclaustrated who have been received in a diocese on an experimental basis and those who have initiated the probationary time in another Institute.

2. Those who, in accordance with the norms of the law, have already presented a petition to transfer to another Institute, or have asked for an indult of exclaustration, or a dispensation from the vows, or, being clerics, have requested a dispensation from clerical celibacy, or an indult to transfer to another diocese.

3. Those who are absent from the religious House, even with the permission of the Major Superior, to solve their doubts about their vocation.

4. Those who have illegitimately abandoned the Order or live outside of it longer than the allowed period of time.

2. Those who live outside of the Community for other reasons and with the Superior’s legitimate permission retain all rights and privileges.

240. When the Superior gives an order in virtue of holy obedience - which should be done rarely - and the religious refuses to obey it, they should establish a dialogue; and, if it is in vain, he proceeds according to canons 696-701.

The Local Community

241. To attain the objectives of our lives, appropriate material and juridical structures are needed in every community. However, the center of the community is each person and everything is for its service.

242. Although, according to our laws, four professed religious are required and are sufficient to establish a Community, it is desirable, however, that the Major Superior assigns six or more religious to each Community.

243. Since, according to our laws, four religious are required to establish a community, no Major Superior may grant a dispensation except Fr. General with the consent of his Assistants and then only temporarily or in exceptional cases.

If the number of professed religious in any House becomes less than three so that only two remain, after six months, unless there is a strong hope that new religious will be received, Fr. General with the consent of his Assistants must declare it a Filial House of some principal House, the Superior of which becomes «ipso facto» the Superior of the Filial House also.

244. To establish a new House or start a new Work, previous written permission, granted by Fr. General with the consent of his Assistants is required. And before the Supreme Moderator issues the decree of establishment, the written consent of the diocesan bishop is also needed.

To establish canonically a religious House as well as to suppress or abandon it, a formal decree in writing issued by the Supreme Moderator is required, wherein it is explicitly stated whether the House is going to be established, suppressed, or abandoned.

The canonically erected House thus established enjoys public juridical personality; the suppressed House loses it; but the abandoned House keeps it, and, strictly speaking, the diocesan bishop’s consent is not required to perform again our activities, if the occasion arises.

245. To create a new House, the Provincial Superior, after previously obtaining the consent of his Assistants and following the norms of no. 281.1.d), must present to Fr. General the project, where the following points should be clearly stated:

1. The purpose of the foundation.

2. The need or great convenience of establishing this community.

3. The possibility of assigning to it at least four religious, according to no. 242.

4. The possibility of observing religious life in all its integrity.

5. The needs of the local Church.

6. The hope for future vocations.

7. The continuation or guarantee of such conditions.

8. The adequate means to provide for the needs of the religious.

246. The procedures to suppress or abandon a House are as follows: The Provincial Superior, after listening to the Community of the House in question, will formulate the course to follow, including the conditions of no. 245; and having previously obtained the consent of his Assistants, according to no. 281.1.d) will propose to Fr. General the decision of the Provincial Congregation. Fr. General, after having informed the diocesan bishop, in the case of abandonment, or having consulted with him in the case of suppression, will proceed in accordance with no. 159 of the Constitutions, and no. 244 of the Rules, clearly distinguishing whether it is suppression or simply an abandonment of the House.

247. When suppressing or abandoning a Work, in addition what is told in no. 246, would be carefully thought if the permanence is possible provided that the Work is assumed by another religious Community or Institution.

248. When accepting new activities, the Community, together with the Superior, must discern whether the new activity or apostolate can be harmonized with the approved projects and the concrete possibilities of the Community. For increasing the activities’ Project the permission of Fr. Provincial and of the diocesan Bishop – if the case so demands – is also required.

Our religious may only accept permanent posts, offices, or obligations outside of our institutions by order or explicit permission of the Major Superior, and the religious must inform his Community about his experiences. The same permission is also required for our members to give their name to groups or societies of any kind. The Major Superior, on his part, may grant this permission only after mature deliberation and having the necessary information.

249. The living quarters of the religious Community must be clean, in accordance with poverty, and foster the intimacy of life; therefore, they must be separated, as far as possible, from the working place.

250. 1. The Rectors will be appointed in the following way:

1. In the Provinces and independent Vice-provinces by the respective Major Superior, with the consent of his Council and according to what is established in no. 281.1.b), with the «nihil obstat» of the General Congregation;

2. In the dependent Vice-provinces and the Provincial Vicariates, by the Provincial Congregation, with the «nihil obstat» of the General Congregation, and, additionally, in both cases, after previously listening to the immediate Major Superior with his Council;

3. In the General Delegations by the General Congregation, having previously listened to the Delegate General with his Council;

4. In the Communities or Houses immediately subject to Fr. General, by Fr. General with the consent of his Council;

2. The Rectors will be appointed for four years, or until the end of the four-year term, except for what is stated in no. 17.9. of the Rules. The Rector who has laudably finished his term may be appointed for a second and third term to the same office, but not for a fourth consecutive term in the same Community.

3. The office of Rector should not be coupled with other offices of great importance, except in the case of small Communities.

4. A President is appointed by the Provincial Congregation.

251. It is expedient that, before naming the Rector or President, Fr. Provincial consults with the Community.

252. The appointment of Superiors should always be made following the norms of no. 281,1.b), and no. 315.1.c) of the Rules.

253. The main duties of the Rector or President are:

1. To love the religious of his community over which he presides and treat them with charity and patience.

2. To take care of their health.

3. To have pastoral care for them counting on their cooperation, especially of Fr. Vice-rector.

4. To promote community life through opportune meetings.

5. To co-ordinate the needs of the religious with the duties of the whole Community and its activities, either when he assigns offices, or when he asks for their participation in the governance of the Community.

6. To take care of the activity the Religious have regarding educational and apostolic ministry.

7. To supervise the activities of the religious in order to determine that the work of each one is consistent with Community life.

8. To carry out the co-responsibility in the government of their own Demarcation, according to the Rules.

254. 1. It will be expedient in many instances to entrust the duties of Rector of the Community and Director of the Work, in the strict sense, to different persons.

2. In cases when a legal Responsible or a Legal Owner would be necessary to represent the Community or the Work, then he should be nominated by the Major Superior with the consent of his Council.

3. Unless the civil laws require otherwise, the appointment or proposal of the appointment of the Directors of the Works belongs to the Major Superior with the consent of his Council. Otherwise, no presentation should be made without the previous consent of the Major Superior and his Council.

4. When the Legal Responsible and the Director of some Work are religious, as religious they are under the Superior of the Community; on the other hand, the Director of a Work, either religious or lay, is immediately under the Major Superior in the exercise of his duties, or under the person who has the legal representation or entitlement of the Work, unless in the guidelines of the Demarcation something else is prescribed.

5. The rights and duties of Directors of Works and Responsible Persons should be defined in the Statutes of the different Demarcations, taking the civil laws into account, when necessary.

255. Before the civil law, both, the Rector and the Director of the Work will be responsible according to the specific duties determined by the respective Provincial Congregation, keeping in mind the laws of the different countries. The same should be told of other kinds of Works.

256. In any community of six or more religious, the Major Superior, after hearing his Council and the respective community, may, if appropriate, appoint a Vice-Rector. This will not only replace the absent or disabled Rector, but will also perform fixed tasks, even if the Rector is present.

The Vice-Rector, as such, has no power of jurisdiction.

257. In the Community where at least six religious live, the Major Superior, after listening to the Rector and Community, if he thinks it expedient, will name two Consultors, on whose opinion the Rector must rely in matters of the greatest importance, according to the universal law.

The consultors in the case stated in can. 703 have a deliberative vote.

258. 1. The religious Community, which must convene frequently according to annual Community Planning, must be called together by the Local Superior not only in the cases stated below, but any time that the Local Superior deems to be convenient, or when the majority of the Community asks for it.

2. The Local Superior needs the consultative vote of the Community:

1. To make up the program of the Community’s life, or of the educational and pastoral activity of the religious at the beginning of the school year.

2. At the end of the year, to oversee and evaluate the execution of the annual planning.

3. To prepare the Chapters.

4. To oversee the actions ordered by the Major Superior.

3. The Local Superior needs the deliberative vote of the Community:

1. To accept new permanent obligations.

2. To examine the expediency of closing a House or Work, in case that Works depends upon Local Community.

3. In the cases stated in n. 445, 3.

259. In every Community and Work the necessary number of officers for its good administration should be appointed.

1. After previous consultation with his Assistants, and having listened to the opinion of the Local Superior and his Community, the Major Superior should name for the Community the Vice-rector, consultants, administrator, and the person in charge of the Masses.

2. For the Work, previous consultation with his Assistants, and having listened to the opinion of the Legal Owner, if he exists, the Director of the Work and the religious engaged in it, the Major Superior will nominate the administrator and responsible people for educational and pastoral charges

3. The Major Superior also has the right to present to the bishop a religious to be appointed pastor, and to nominate the rector of the church (rector ecclesiae).

4. The respective Local Superior and Director of the Work should name all the other officials, after receiving counsel and exchanging impressions with the concerned parties.

260. The religious in charge of the Masses will carefully record in the book for this purpose the suffrages for our dead and the particular obligations of the Houses or Communities. In the same way he will record the number of Masses accepted, their intention, stipend, and celebration.

The Superior of the Community has the duty of watching that the obligation of offering the Masses always be properly fulfilled.

Following a very old tradition, every month there should be offered for the intention of Fr. General as many Masses as priests who reside in the Community.

261. 1º The duties of the Secretary are to keep the Archive and to record in a book for this purpose:

1. The decisions taken in Community meetings

2. Anything that has an official character.

3. Record of the official documents received or issued.

2º If the Secretariat book is produced in digital format, it must be printed at the end of each year to be bound, signed and sealed. This volume shall be kept in the local community archive or, if deemed more appropriate, in the demarcation archive.

262. 1º The Chronicler will describe in his book anything that may be useful for history, even if it has no official character, without injecting any personal judgment about persons or happenings. As much as possible, he will enrich his report with photographs and press clippings, adding to each document the date, and, in the case of newspapers, the title. It will be very helpful if the names of the persons in the photographs are noted in some way. There is no obstacle that Chronicles and Secretary Books would be united in the “Book of the Community”.

2º Both the book of Chronicles and the Graphic Chronicle, if they are made in digital format, must be printed, taking care of the quality of the printing, at the end of each year to be bound, signed and sealed. It will be kept in the local community archive.

263. The Librarian will diligently take care that books and magazines are bought, in accordance with the annual budget. He is to keep them in an orderly way. He will make indices through catalogue cards, according to modern systems. He will see to it that the readers remain in the library room, as far as possible. If there is any need to take books out of the library, he should write carefully in the book designated for this purpose the title of the books, and should watch whether they are returned to their places after the allotted time has elapsed. Finally, he should take care that neither the books nor the furnishings of the library are damaged.

264. The Sacristan has the duty to care for the cult in the Church and all things related to worship. The Local Superior may request his collaboration in the exercise of pastoral activity for the whole Community.

The Provincial Community

265. The Provincial Community or Province is the union of all the Houses and Institutions under the same Fr. Provincial that constitute an immediate part of the Order. A Province can include Provincial Vicariates and dependent Vice-provinces.

1. The Province in the strict sense

266. In our Order there are formed and non-formed Provinces. To constitute a formed Province it is necessary to have no less than six canonical Houses, of which, at least four must be formed Houses according to the law, and fifty professed religious of whom at least thirty must be priests.

267. Non-formed Provinces are considered those that do not enjoy the above mentioned conditions. A Province, because of the decrease of the number of religious or Houses can become non-formed, but it has the same rights as a formed Province until Fr. General, with the consent of his Assistants, declares it non-formed by a formal decree. Only for serious reasons, to be judged by the General Congregation, can a new non-formed Province be established.

The Superior of a non-formed Province enjoys in his Demarcation the same faculties as a Provincial, except for those that Fr. General expressly reserves for himself, or those that by their nature or by the law are reserved to him.

268. In order for a Province to be able to develop its activity in a harmonious way, besides the Chapter, the Provincial Congregation and Curia, it should have, among others, these organs of government: the Council of the Province and the Provincial Secretariats.

269. 1. A Provincial Secretariat is formed by religious and lay persons named by Fr. Provincial, after listening, as far as possible and in the way he deems most suitable, to the members of the Province, having a Provincial Assistant or some other religious especially expert in the matter as moderator. They will collaborate on the subjects of pedagogical, pastoral, juridical, Calasanzian, vocational and economical themes according to the needs of the Province and the indications of Fr. Provincial. Their proposals have a consultative character and should be carefully considered by the Provincial Congregation, so that the good things found in them be approved and executed for the benefit of the Province.

2. The same applies to all other Demarcations, keeping proper proportion.

270. The Provincial Secretariats enjoy administrative executive authority under the direction of the Provincial Congregation.

271. 1. Unless the Provincial Chapter determines otherwise, the Provincial Congregation has the right to determine the number of members who will constitute the Council of the Province and whether, for example, this number will be formed by only the Local Superiors, or by the Local Superiors and delegates to be elected according to the system established by the Provincial Congregation, or will be constituted by the members of the last Provincial Chapter.

Their propositions have only a consultative character. The Provincial Congregation must belong to this Council, the president of which must be Fr. Provincial, although somebody else could be appointed moderator.

2. The same applies to all other Demarcations, keeping proper proportion.

272. If, perhaps, other Provincial or Local positions may be added to those established in the Constitutions and Rules, they must always be in conformity with the universal as well as our own laws.

273. The name, Provincial Curia, means the sum of all the religious who, in a permanent and immediate way, work with Fr. Provincial. The Assistant Provincials constitute the Council of Fr. Provincial, and, together with Fr. Provincial form the Provincial Congregation.

274. Fr. Provincial must be elected for four years at the time of the Chapter by the Provincial Chapter from among the candidates presented by the General Congregation, observing what is established in no. 315.

Outside of Chapter time, he will be named by the General Congregation at the proposal of Fr. General, until the next Provincial Chapter, observing the norms of no. 315.

275. Fr. Provincial, in virtue of his own office and keeping what the law requires, represents his Demarcation in both the civil and ecclesiastical forums, with full responsibility and by full right; he may delegate or commit this official representation to somebody else. When another religious or person, acting in the name of Fr. Provincial, represents the Province in either forum, he must always act with Fr. Provincial’s permission.

276. Since the welfare of the Province depends on the full dedication of Fr. Provincial, he should not accept any office that involves any other task or responsibility; on the contrary, he should try to promote the growth of his Demarcation with all his strength and utmost care. In fact, the duties and rights of Fr. Provincial are many, the most important of which are as follows, under different titles:

1. The pastoral care of the religious:

1. He must visit frequently, at least twice a year, by himself, or by another person, all the Communities to promote religious life, to listen to the religious and promote Community meetings.

2. He must strengthen the religious in their Calasanzian vocation and our ministry by means of either talking or circular letters.

3. He must propose a program of spiritual life and permanent formation for each religious and for each community, which should be continuously accommodated to the new needs.

4. He must take persistent care of the formation of the Local Superiors.

2. Increasing of vocations:

1. Fr. Provincial should be the first promoter of vocations and should appoint in the Province and the Communities other promoters, whom he must constantly urge to action.

2. He must take care that in the Province there is a well organized itinerary of Formation, either Demarcational or Inter-Demarcational, following the Directory of Formation.

3. He must choose with great care the Masters of Novices and Juniors and appoint them according to the law.

4. He will admit to the novitiate, simple profession, and solemn profession those whom he judges to be fit, according to nos. 109, 110, 113, 117 of the Constitutions.

3. Structures and customs of the Province:

1. To give norms and supervise the religious life and the apostolic and educational activities of every Community.

2. He must examine and approve the program of the Community acts, which every religious House makes at the beginning of the year, and demand its later fulfillment.

3. He must appoint the officials of the Houses, according to the Rules.

4. He may accept the renunciations of those whom he himself appointed to some office.

5. He must give instructions concerning summer vacations according to the customs of the Province and try to organize them considering the needs of the Province.

6. He must see that legitimate customs are kept, and new ones be discerned and tested.

7. He must work to promote the improvement of the Province, using the necessary material resources to promote both the improvement of the religious and renewal and apostolic activity.

8. He must take care that the distribution of the religious contributes to obtaining the better service for the Province as well as for the Communities and the individuals.

4. Problems of greater importance for the Province:

1. He should take care that the religious acquire a most vivid conscience of the Provincial community, and, therefore, inform them about the matters of the Province; at the same time, he should frequently ask for information and collaborate to solve the most urgent and serious problems.

2. He must convene, according to the need and his own prudence, the meetings of the Rectors and the Council of the Province.

5. Conserve and promote union with all the whole Order:

1. Feeling co-responsible with the whole Order, he has to be an agent of initiatives from Generalate that refer to the consolidation and promotion of the Order.

2. He must inform his religious about the documents received from the General Curia and demand the observance of the requirements of Fr. General.

3. He must attend the meetings of the Major Superiors.

4. He must ask from Fr. General the permissions required by our laws.

5. He must frequently inform Fr. General about the life of the Province.

6. He must send a yearly written report, together with a catalogue of the religious that should be published, at least, every four years.

277. The seat of the Provincial Curia Fr. Provincial must be fixed, but, when the circumstances change, it may be moved to another place with the permission of Fr. General, granted after hearing his Council.

278. 1. The Provincial Superior, having listened to his Council, and after having consulted with Fr. General, may nominate one of his Assistants, who must be a priest, for the office of Vicar Provincial, who with ordinary vicarial authority acts in the place of Fr. Provincial, when absent or impaired, or fulfils other tasks entrusted to him.

2. The nomination can be for a limited time and must be officially communicated to the entire Demarcation.

3. The Vicar Provincial has the faculties granted to him by Fr. Provincial. If Fr. Provincial becomes totally impaired, the Vicar Provincial enjoys in his own right all the faculties that the Provincial has by law, provided that he actually exercises this office.

4. The Vicar Provincial, during his term of office, is a Major Superior; however, as Vicar he does not have the right to take part in the General Chapter.

5. Fr. Provincial, for a reasonable cause, may freely remove the Vicar Provincial, confirm him again, or name someone else in his place keeping what law prescribes.

6. Any faculties the Vicar Provincial enjoys cease either when the term of his nomination has elapsed, or at the moment that he is recalled or removed or if Fr. Provincial dies or ceases in his office for whatever reason.

7. If Fr. Provincial dies or ceases in his office, the first priest Assistant assumes, with full right, the governing of the Province until Fr. General, informed of the case, provides otherwise.

279. 1. In order to perform his duties more easily, Fr. Provincial will have four Assistants in formed Provinces, and two in non-formed. He can use their co-operation and will ask for their vote according to the Constitutions and Rules.

For just and grave causes, the General Congregation may grant that in the non-formed Provinces four Assistants may also be chosen.

2. During Chapter time, the Provincial Chapter will elect the Provincial Assistants for four years. Outside of Chapter time, they will be named by the Provincial Congregation upon the proposal of Fr. Provincial until the end of the four-year term, with the «nihil obstat» of the General Congregation, taking into consideration what is stated in no. 281.1 of the Rules.

Among the Assistants, at least one must be a priest.

3. As far as possible, the Assistants will be free of other duties so that they devote their full activity to perform their office.

280. The Provincial Congregation should meet, at least twice a month, to deal with the Provincial business, according to the previously and carefully prepared agenda and after all have thoroughly studied it. At the beginning of the session, the minutes of the preceding meeting should be read and signed. One of the Assistants or the Provincial Secretary must act as Secretary of the Congregation.

281. 1. The attendance of the full Provincial Congregation, namely five members - or in the case of non-formed Provinces, three - is required to:

1. Appoint an Assistant Provincial outside of Chapter time.

2. Appoint a Superior at any time.

3. Name the Master of Novices or Juniors.

4. Open or close a House or Work.

2. In these cases, if any member of the Provincial Congregation is absent, what is stated in no. 32 must be kept.

282. In every Province, besides the Administrator and the Provincial Secretary, Fr. Provincial will designate an Historian of the Province, whose duty will be to gather news and photographic documents, as well as articles from newspapers, which have something connected with the history of the whole Demarcation or each one of its Houses.

283. In each Demarcation, the Major Superiors will appoint a Communications Officer. Its functions will be described in the corresponding Manual of functions, once approved by the Demarcational Congregation.

2. Dependant Vice-provinces and Provincial Vicariates

284. In our Order, besides independent Provinces and Vice-provinces, there are dependant Vice-provinces and Provincial Vicariates; both of these enjoy a public juridical personality from the moment of their canonical erection.

2.A. Dependant Vice-provinces

285. In order to erect a dependent Vice-province at least three canonical Houses are required, as well as eighteen religious, of whom a minimum of twelve must be priests.

286. If the required conditions to be a dependent Vice-province are lost because of the decrease of religious or Houses, it still enjoys the rights of a Vice-province until Fr. General, with the consent of his Assistants, and, if needed, after listening to the respective Provincial Congregation, will declare it through a formal decree a Provincial Vicariate.

287. The Vice-provincial in a dependent Vice-province is the Major Superior who directs the Vice-province. He has the same rights and duties as Fr. Provincial, except those that Fr. Provincial reserves for himself or those that are reserved to Fr. Provincial by their own nature or the disposition of the law.

288. The Vice-provincial represents his own Demarcation both in the ecclesiastical and the civil forum with full responsibility and full right, keeping the norms that in each case must be observed; this official representation can be delegated to other persons. But, when another religious or person acting in the name of the Vice-provincial legally represents the Demarcation, he should always act with his consent.

289. The Vice-provincial and his Assistants must be named for a four-year term during Chapter time, observing nos. 404-409; but outside of Chapter time, the Provincial Congregation makes the appointment until the end of the four-year period, obtaining beforehand the «nihil obstat» of the General Congregation.

290. The Vice-provincial Congregation composed of Fr. Vice-provincial and two Assistants must be convoked at least once a month. A minimum of one of the Assistants must be a priest. For a just cause, the Superior General, with the consent of his Council, may grant permission to designate four Assistants, according to the law.

291. The Vice-provincial, appointed or elected for one four-year term, may be re-elected for a following term; but not for a third consecutive four-year term, unless the General Congregation grants a dispensation and according to the prevailing requirements of the qualified majority if he is elected in the Chapter. However, he loses the passive voice for a fourth consecutive nomination.

2.B. The Provincial Vicariates

292. In our Order there are also Provincial Vicariates, which must have at least two canonically erected Houses and not less than ten religious, at least five of whom must be priests.

293. A Vicar Provincial, who enjoys ordinary vicarial authority, presides over the Provincial Vicariate. The Vicar Provincial is appointed for a four-year term or until the end of the four-year term with the consent of his Council and after obtaining the «nihil obstat» of the General Congregation.

The Vicar Provincial, named for a four-year term, may be confirmed for a second and a third consecutive four-year term. He loses his passive voice for a fourth consecutive appointment.

294. The Vicar Provincial is a Major Superior, and by his office has all the faculties that our law grants specifically to the Vicar Provincial and to the Major Superiors, unless Fr. Provincial reserves some of them for himself.

In addition, he enjoys all the faculties that the Provincial Congregation decides to grant to the Vicar according to the norms or statutes by which the Provincial Vicariate is governed. He also has the right to attend the Provincial and General Chapters.

295. The Provincial Vicariate is ruled according to the norms contained in our laws, and by its own special Statutes prepared by Fr. Provincial with the consent of his Council and approved by the General Congregation.

296. The Vicar Provincial, by virtue of his office and observing what the law states, represents his Demarcation with full responsibility and right, both in the ecclesiastical and the civil forum. He may delegate this official representation to others.

If a religious or another person acting by the delegation of Vicar Provincial represents the Demarcation in the ecclesiastical or civil forum, he should always act with his consent.

297. The Vicar Provincial should have two consultors appointed by Fr. Provincial with the consent of his Council for a period of four years, or until the end of the four-year term, who, together with him, constitute the Vicariate Congregation. They will meet at least every two months to discuss with the proper attention the business of the Vicariate. At least one of these consultors must be a priest.

298. The Statutes of the Vicariate should be revised every four years, and opportune changes will be introduced in them observing the norms of law.

The General Community

299. Our Order as a whole, is governed by Fr. General, and it is principally composed in the first place of the Provincial Communities, or Provinces; it can also include independent Vice-provinces, General Delegations, and Houses and Works which depend immediately on Fr. General.

1. The Order in General

300. Our Order, which was legitimately erected or founded by Pope Paul V, enjoys a public juridical personality.

In order that the General Community can more efficaciously exercise its function, in addition to the General Chapter, and the General Congregation and Curia, it must have these organs of government: The Council of Major Superiors and the General Secretariats.

1.A. The Father General

301. The Fr. General is elected for six years, and he represents the entire Order and every Demarcation and House, both canonically and civilly; this representation, keeping in mind what the law demands, may be entrusted or delegated to other persons.

The supreme responsibility for all the Order falls on him, and he has full governmental authority over each and every Demarcation, House and religious, which he has to exercise in accordance with the Gospel and in accordance with the laws of the Church, our Constitutions and Rules and, if such be the case, according to the laws of each nation.

302. Among others, the Supreme Moderator has the following duties:

1. To foster through his words and example devotion to the Church and fidelity to the magisterium.

2. To safeguard and foster everywhere fidelity to the Calasanzian charism in our ministry.

3. To defend and confirm the identity and unity of the entire Order.

4. To foster by all means religious and Community life.

5. To intensify with all determination the promotion of vocations in the entire Order

6. To supervise very attentively the formation of candidates in the Interdemarcational, Provincial, Vice-provincial and Vicariate Houses.

7. To instruct the religious through timely teaching and circular letters.

8. To examine the new experiences and customs of the Demarcations, and approve or refuse them.

9. To promote among the religious, with the help of all the Superiors of the Order, the knowledge and execution of the ideals and decrees of the Holy See.

10. To take care that in the Demarcations, Communities and Works capable Superiors are named who have a particular skill, especially in the pastoral care of the religious and students.

11. To visit the entire Order.

12. To exercise in the Houses and Demarcations that are immediately under his authority the rights and duties that belong to Fr. Provincial in his Province.

13. To convoke the Chapters and to preside over the same, if necessary.

14. To send to the Holy See, in the way and time determined by the same Apostolic See, a short report about the situation and life of the Order.

303. During his six-year term, he will complete an accurate visitation of the entire Order, either by himself or by a delegate.

In order for the visit to be fruitful, the General Congregation, and the Congregation of the Demarcation to be visited, should prepare at the proper time and with common study and agreement, a definite, clear and concrete program. In this program there will be due consideration of the Houses which cannot be physically visited, respecting however the right that any religious has to go personally to the Visitor.

304. To avoid the General Visitation becoming a duplicate of the Provincial Visitation, the General Visitor must devote his efforts only to the most important problems of the Demarcation or Communities. He should try to promote in the first place the increase of vocations, the community’s renewal, our ministry, and permanent formation.

Together with the Curia, he should deal with the problems and general programs of the Demarcation. He will convoke different groups, among which should be the Council of Local Superiors, to examine and resolve the most important problems and business.

305. Fr. General should conduct somewhat frequent pastoral visitations, so that religious fraternity and the joy flowing from it will be continually renewed through dialogue with the religious.

306. 1. Besides the Vicar Successor (Const. 208), the Superior General, after having consulted with his Council, should name one of his Assistants, who must be a priest for three years, Vicar General, who with ordinary vicarial authority, represents and acts in the place of Fr. General when he is absent or impaired, or performs other matters entrusted to him.

2. This nomination may be freely made for a limited time and must be officially communicated to the whole Order

3. The Vicar General enjoys the faculties granted to him by Fr. General.

4. The Vicar General, during his tenure, is a Major Superior.

5. For a reasonable cause, Fr. General may freely remove the Vicar General, confirm him again, or name somebody else, observing what should be kept by law.

6. All the faculties that a Vicar General enjoys cease when the time of his nomination has elapsed, or at the moment his appointment is revoked or he is removed, or when the Fr. General dies or for any reason ceases to exercise his office.

7. When the Vicar General ceases in his office because of a full impediment, transfer or removal, the first Assistant legally acquires all of the faculties; but in case of death, resignation, or promotion, the norms of n. 208 of the Constitutions must be kept.

307. In special situations, and, above all, if he cannot act otherwise, Fr. General may name Vicars of Father General who will carry out the business entrusted to them; or they may preside and rule with ordinary vicarial authority over some Demarcation which is found to be in special circumstances. In this last case, the Vicars of Father General are Major Superiors and have, by law, all the faculties of a Major Superior specifically mentioned, and those which Fr. General grants them; they also enjoy the right of attending the General Chapter.

308. The Delegate of Fr. General is a person named by Fr. General for the transitory or permanent exercise of an office or mission. If he is not a priest, the issues that involve the Order of Priesthood do not belong to his function.

309. The Delegate of Fr. General has faculties granted by the same Fr. General, and, although he enjoys certain prelature, he is not a Superior in the strict sense, neither has he the right to intervene in a General Chapter.

1.B. General Assistants and the General Congregation

310. There must be four General Assistants, who are elected by the General Chapter for a six-year period, in order to adequately take care of the different Circumscriptions defined by the same Chapter.

Although by reason of their office they must feel responsible for the good of the whole Order, each one of them will promote the common activities in his Circumscription.

They must remember, however, that they must always act as members of the General Congregation; and that they are obliged to inform the Congregation about their own activities. According to their competence, they may be Presidents of the General Secretariats.

They should visit their Circumscription and even all the Order, if necessary.

311. Outside of Chapter time, the General Assistants will be nominated by the Superior General, with the consent of his Council, following the norms of nos. 30 and 315, after having received nominations from the Demarcations in the related circumscription. In this case, each interested Demarcation can present only one candidate.

312. In the case when Fr. General or one of the Assistants is absent, in order to constitute the Congregation, it must proceed according to no. 32.

313. The General Congregation must meet every week to deal with matters of the Order, following an agenda, which has been carefully prepared and attentively studied by each one in advance. At the beginning of each session, the minutes of the previous meeting should be read and signed.

314. One of the Assistants must be the Secretary of the Congregation, unless another religious has been appointed to this office.

315. 1. The full attendance of the General Congregation, namely the presence of the five members, is necessary for the following:

1. To remove and to nominate a General Assistant, or to accept his resignation.

2. To designate candidates for Major Superiors at Chapter time.

3. To nominate a Major Superior outside of Chapter time.

4. To remove some Major Superior or to accept his resignation.

5. To decide the erection or suppression of a Province, Vice-province, or General Delegation; to unite some already existing Provinces, or circumscriptions in a different way; to declare a formed Province non-formed; to reduce a Vice-province to the status or condition of a Provincial Vicariate.

6. To appoint the first Demarcational Congregation of a newly erected Demarcation, both during and outside of chapter time.

2. In these cases, if any member of the General Congregation is absent, the norms of n. 30 and 32.1. should be followed.

316. When deciding whether to expel or dismiss a professed religious according to the norm of can. 699, the decision should be made in a strictly collegial way.

1.C. The Officials of the General Curia

317. It belongs to Fr. General, with the consent of his Counselors, to appoint for six years the Procurator General, who must always reside in Rome.

For just and reasonable causes, Fr. General may remove him from office, with the consent of his Assistants, and appoint a new one, in accordance with the law.

318. The duty of the Procurator General is to report to the Holy See and diligently expedite all the business of the Order before it, and nobody should interfere in his business in any way, unless he has Fr. General’s special order.

319. Whenever the General Congregation deals with a matter of some importance that should be presented to the Holy See, the Procurator General must be called, listened to, and his opinion must be recorded in the minutes.

320. The Procurator General must keep a register in which he will diligently and exactly record everything that happened in the Roman Curia relating to the Order, the Demarcations, Houses and persons during his term of office. All these documents will be kept in the archives of the General Secretary.

321. Having heard the opinion of his Council, Fr. General will name the General Treasurer. It is not expedient that he be one of the General Assistants. He should duly conduct what is related to his office, and twice a year he must submit his accounts for the inspection of the General Congregation.

322. The General Secretary of the Order, appointed by Fr. General according to the law, will act as notary, and his signature will give public witness. His duty is to take care of all the documents received in the General Curia or sent out from it. In addition, his office is to co-ordinate any work related to the General Secretary.

323. Fr. General will name a General Postulator whose office will be to deal with the causes of our Servants of God before the Holy See. The General Postulator will take care that books, leaflets, holy pictures, and medals of our Holy Founder and of our religious worthy of being remembered, be written about, published, printed, coined, and distributed freely and abundantly, according to the budget assigned for this purpose. Fr. General Postulator himself should not omit writing some propaganda of this kind.

324. Also, it belongs to the Superior General of the Order to appoint a General Archivist and a General Historian. The General Archivist will take care of the historical cultural goods which are in San Pantaleo and other general houses. The Historian of the Order will make efforts to investigate our history and promote its knowledge among religious and laity of the Calasanzian Family and other people interested in it.

325. Fr. General will appoint a Communication Officer of the Order who will promote the work of the General Communication Team and coordinate the networking of the demarcation communicators.His functions will be approved by the General Congregation.

1.D. The Council of Major Superiors

326. All the Major Superiors should promote with solicitude the unity and growth of the whole Order.

All of them, as a whole and when convoked by Fr. General, constitute the Council of Major Superiors.

327. Fr. General, according to the ways and reasons determined by the General Congregation, may convoke the Council of Major Superiors at least every two years when the General Chapter is not celebrated to deal with matters related to the whole Order or when a considerable number of the Major Superiors request it.

328. It is recommended that regional assemblies of Major Superiors with Fr. General or his delegate be held once a year.

1.E. General and Interdemarcational Secretariats

329. The persons or teams who through their advice and work help the General Congregation in promoting the pastoral, pedagogical, juridical, vocational, economic and Calasanctian activities are called the General Secretariats . Fr. General should appoint the members of these Secretariats, after listening to his Council and to the corresponding Major Superiors.

330. One of the endeavors of the General Secretariats, under the direction of the General Congregation, is to promote meetings and other periodical initiatives for the benefit of the whole Order or of each Demarcation.

331. The President of each General Secretariat will establish contacts with the Interdemarcational Secretariats, which, together with the Demarcational Secretariats, will take care to intensify relationships among the religious and the Superiors in those matters that belong to the scope of each Secretariat.

332. The General Secretariats have, under the direction of Fr. General and his Congregation, executive administrative power.

333. Several Demarcations may establish Interdemarcational Secretariats. These Secretariats, in every field or matter, will be composed of one member from each Demarcation, appointed by the respective Major Superior. Any of the members or another religious, who is an expert in the matter, may be President of the Secretariat.

334. Interdemarcational Secretariats have, under the direction of the respective Major Superiors, executive administrative power.

2. Independent Vice-provinces and General Delegations

2.A. Independent Vice-provinces

335. In our Order there are independent Vice-provinces that are under the immediate jurisdiction of the Supreme Moderator; they enjoy public juridical personality from the moment of their canonical erection.

In order to establish an independent Vice-province, there should be at least three canonical Houses and eighteen religious, of whom at least twelve must be priests.

336. If the number of religious or Houses decreases, it loses the conditions required to be a Vice-province, although it still enjoys the rights of a Vice-province until Fr. General, with the consent of his Assistants, declares it through a formal decree to be a Provincial Vicariate, dependant on its respective Province, if it is considered convenient, and provided it fulfills the required conditions.

337. Fr. Vice-provincial is the Major Superior who governs a Vice-province. He is under the same obligations and enjoys the same rights as the Provincials, excluding those that Fr. General reserves for himself, or those that by their own nature or by law belong to Fr. General.

338. Fr. Vice-provincial in both the ecclesiastical and civil forums represents the Vice-province with full responsibility and right, and he may delegate to other persons this official representation. If another religious or person acts in the place of Fr. Vice-provincial, and represents juridically the Demarcation, he should always act in everything with the consent of the same Fr. Vice-provincial.

339. The Fr. Vice-provincial of an independent Vice-province, as well as his two Assistants, both, at Chapter time and outside of Chapter time, must be appointed in accordance with the norms of nos. 274, 279.2. and 397 of the Rules.

340. The Vice-provincial Congregation, which consists of Fr. Vice-provincial and his two Assistants, must meet at least once a month. At least one of the Assistants must be a priest. For just reasons the Superior General, with the consent of his Council, may grant that four Assistants be named.

2.B. General Delegations

341. A General Delegation is a Demarcation which may be created by Fr. General and depends directly on his immediate jurisdiction. To create a General Delegation, at least two canonically erected Houses are required and not fewer than ten religious, of whom at least five must be priests.

342. The General Delegate is the Major Superior who presides over a Delegation. He enjoys ordinary vicarial authority and by his office has all the faculties that our laws grant to the General Delegate and to the Major Superior concretely, except those that Fr. General may reserve for himself.

He also enjoys all the faculties that the General Congregation decides to grant to the same Delegate in the Statutes by which the General Delegation is governed.

343. The Delegate General represents the Delegation in the ecclesiastical as well as in the civil forum and may entrust this representation to other persons, observing the appropriate laws.

344. The Congregation of the General Delegation that is formed by the Delegate and two Assistants, who on their part constitute the Council of the Delegation, will meet at least once a month.

345. The norms established in the Statutes must be kept in all things related to the celebration of Chapters and to nominations.

Interdemarcational Associations

346. The Fr. General with the consent of his Assistants and after hearing the involved Demarcational Congregations, may establish some common bodies within several Demarcations not directly dependent upon him. It will be done to coordinate and foster some aspects of the life and apostolate of the Demarcations. Each one of these common bodies will have a proper Directory, which defines its rights and duties.

347. Similarly, if some Demarcational Congregations want to create similar common bodies, it can be done with the approval of the General Congregation and once the proper Statutes have been prepared.

Canonical Visitation

348. During their tenure, all Major Superiors must personally or through a delegated person pay a thorough visit to all the Houses and Works of his jurisdiction, during which the Visitor will listen to any religious who wishes to be heard. After the visitation, he should send a report to his immediate Major Superior and to the Fr. General.

349. It is incumbent upon the Fr. General to supervise the administration of all Demarcations; the Fr. Provincial will do the same in Demarcations dependent on his Province.

Chapter VI

THE PARTICIPATION OF THE RELIGIOUS IN THE GOVERNANCE OF THE ORDER

Voice and Vote

350. The following religious have voice but no vote:

1. In the Community meetings: Every religious in simple vows and assigned to the Community, unless the Local Superior or the appropriate Master judges differently about his presence.

2. In the Local Chapter: Any religious with simple vows, assigned to the Community. Also the associates, priests or laymen, living in the Community

3. In the Chapters of the respective Demarcations: Juniors with simple vows may participate as representatives with voice but without vote, the same as lay persons mentioned in nos. 233 and 234, according to the judgement of the Major Superior, with the consent of his Assistants. It will be designated by the same determining Superiors, so that in any case the number of participating juniors and lay persons who attend the Chapter does not surpass 10% of the Chapter members.

351. The following religious enjoy active voice:

1. In the Community meetings and the Local Chapter: any religious in solemn vows in the House where he is assigned although his course of studies is not finished and he is still assigned to the House of Formation.

2. In the Chapters of the respective Demarcation and in the General Chapter: those who by law or by election are members of these Chapters.

3. In the meetings of the Demarcational Works, if existing: Religious and lay persons elected in each Work and others who have responsibilities in the Demarcation, according to the Demarcational Statutes.

352. The Assistants, Procurator, Administrator, and General Secretary, when assigned to a Community, may exercise their right to vote in the meetings convened to deal with matters of that Community. The same may be said of the Major Superior with respect to any Community of his Demarcation where he may find himself at the moment.

353. The following religious have a passive voice:

1. For the office of Delegate in the Chapters of the Vicariate, Vice-province, Province, and of the General Delegation: any religious who has made his solemn profession and is not a member of the Chapter by right.

2. For the office of Master of Novices or Master of Juniors strictly speaking, and for the office of Rector: any priest who has been solemnly professed for at least three years.

3. For the office of Assistant Master of Novices: any religious, even if he is not a priest, who possesses the other qualities required in the Master of Novices.

4. For the office of Provincial Assistant and Vice-provincial Assistant: any religious, even if he is not a priest, provided he has been solemnly professed for at least three years.

5. For the office of Delegate to the General Chapter, and for the office of General Assistant: any religious, even if he is not a priest, provided he has been solemnly professed for at least six years.

6. For the office of Major Superior: any religious who has been a priest for at least three years and has been solemnly professed for at least six years.

354. 1. Those who have been designated for the position of Superior, especially Major Superior, should be able to govern, have priestly and pastoral experience, and have for some time laudably exercised our ministry, or another work imposed by obedience.

2. It is desirable that the Master of Novices and the Master of Juniors receive special preparation for the exercise of their office.

355. The Fr. General, the General Assistants and the Procurator General during their office lose the passive voice for the position of Provincial.

Chapters in General

356. Chapters may be Local, Vicarial, Vice-provincial, Provincial, General Delegation, and General.

357. The Supreme Moderator’ s convocation precedes the General, Provincial, and other Demarcational and House Chapters directly subjected to him; however it belongs to Father Provincial, with Father General’s mandate, to convoke the Vice-provincial, Vicariate and Local Chapters.

358. In order to determine the days for the celebration of the Provincial Chapter, Father General should consult with the respective Provincial Congregation.

359. The Local, Vicariate, and Vice-provincial Chapters must be celebrated before the respective Provincial Chapter; when it happens that the General Chapter is to be held in the same year, the Provincial Chapter must precede by two months the General Chapter.

The Provincial Chapter can be celebrated only one month after the celebration of the Local Chapters.

360. Father General, personally or through a representative, may preside over any Chapter; other Major Superiors may preside over any Chapter in their own Demarcations. However, the Presidents of a Chapter, if they are not a member of it, do not enjoy the right to vote. The Rector presides over the Local Chapter, unless the Major Superior decides otherwise.

361. All Chapters must have three parts:

1. A serious and accurate examination of the reality or actual situation of the House, Demarcation or the Order and their Works, considering especially the report of the respective Superior.

2. Elections of candidates.

3. Planning and studying of the proposals and propositions that may have any connection with it.

362. One of the first actions of the Chapters is the election of the Secretary and the Assistant by a majority of votes (a relative majority is enough.) They, together with the President, will be the scrutinizers of the elections. All Chapter members have to fulfill their duties faithfully and must feel themselves naturally bound to secrecy.

363. To improve the state of the Houses, Works, and Demarcations, it is advisable that from the beginning the Vice-provincial and Provincial Chapters be divided into commissions, which will perform a diligent and careful study of the Demarcation from different aspects (religious, pastoral, pedagogical, economic, etc.).

Before the celebration of the Chapters, one of the duties assigned to the Economic Secretariat is to certify the administration by elaborating a report –prepared directly or by means of other people- and entrusting it to the Economic Commission of the Chapter to issue a judgement (n 434).

364. The following elections must be held by canonical ballot according to the norms of nos. 368-374, unless something to the contrary is expressly stated:

1. The Delegate to the Chapter of his own Demarcation, when the election of delegates is held according to the mixed system.

2. Delegates and Alternates in the Vicariate, Vice-province, Province and General Delegation Chapters.

3. The Provincial and Provincial Assistants in the Provincial Chapter.

4. The Vice-provincial and his Assistants in the Chapter of an independent Vice-province; and, if such is the case, in the Chapter of a dependent Vice-province.

5. Fr. General and General Assistants in the General Chapter.

365. A relative majority is sufficient:

1. In the election of candidates for the office of Vice-Provincial Assistants in Chapters of a dependent Vice-Province or a General Delegation

2. In the election of Delegates and Alternates to the Provincial and Vice-Provincial Chapters whom everyone in the Province, or Vice-Province or Provincial Vicariate elects.

3. Also, for the candidates for the office of Provincial, Vice-Provincial, or General Delegate.

366. Before proceeding to the election of the Major Superiors, each and every Chapter member will conscientiously elect those whom he thinks is worthy and suitable.

367. 1. In the Provincial and Vice-provincial Chapters, as well as in the General Chapter, an exploratory, non-canonical scrutiny should be made before proceeding to the canonical elections, at least when they pertain to the election of Superiors and Assistants, in order to know the opinions of the voters, and thereby avoid an excessive dispersion of votes.

2. In the case where, after the exploratory scrutiny, one of the candidates thinks that he has serious reasons not to accept the office, he must explain before the Chapter these reasons, and it is the Chapter which must weigh the reasons, and, in the case of candidates for General or Assistants, to accept or reject the refusal. Once the election has been held, there is no opportunity for refusal, unless the elected person is absent.

368. In any Chapter, if the election is by a relative majority, he who, in a single scrutiny, obtains the greatest number of votes is considered elected and must be proclaimed so by the President.

369. In all Chapters where the election is by an absolute majority of votes, he who obtains the absolute majority of the votes of those present (if the majority of the persons who must be convoked are present) is considered elected and must be declared so by the President.

370. 1. If, after three scrutinies there is no election, a fourth scrutiny must be made in which the Chapter members must elect one of the two who obtained the most votes in the third scrutiny; if in the third scrutiny several persons received the same number of votes, the two who, besides having the majority of votes, are the oldest by their simple profession remain. In the case where in the fourth scrutiny both obtain the same number of votes, he who is older by simple profession will be considered elected. If, by chance, both made their profession on the same day, the older in age is elected.

2. In the case where neither of the two receives an absolute majority, a new scrutiny cannot be made, but the votes must be counted again, and he, who received more than half of the valid votes, after discounting the invalid votes, is considered elected and must be proclaimed as such by the Chapter President. If the number of votes is equal, he who is senior by simple profession is elected. If both made their profession on the same day, the oldest in age is elected.

371. Those who need a qualified majority - that is to say, two thirds of the votes - to be elected for a second or third time immediately after their previous term (nos. 397, 420, 423) lose their passive voice if they are not elected in the first three ballots.

In this case, for a fourth scrutiny or ballot, only those who do not need a qualified majority have passive voice. If in the fourth ballot nobody received absolute majority, then it is necessary to proceed to fifth ballot. At that time, only the two persons who received a relative majority of votes in the fourth ballot have passive voice and the voting proceeds is described in no. 370.

372. A fifth scrutiny cannot be held validly, except in those cases where a qualified majority is required.

373. If one of the electors is actually present in the House where the election takes place but cannot be present because of sickness, the scrutinizers are to get his written vote.

374. When in our laws a qualified majority is required - that is, two thirds of the votes - the counting must be made according to the norms of law; and, if the number of votes is not exactly divisible into three equal parts, the greater number nearer to the mathematically calculated two thirds will be taken.

375. A postulation is admitted only in extraordinary cases and according to law.

376. 1. Whoever wishes to renounce active or passive voice, or both, shall do it in writing and in explicit terms; the President of the Chapter may accept his resignation, but, for the common good, he also has the authority to oblige him to remain on the ballot.

2. The Delegates to the General or Provincial Chapter cannot refuse the election without the written permission of Fr. General or Fr. Provincial respectively.

3. The religious who has refused to attend the Local Chapter without a just reason, in the opinion of the Major Superior, cannot be elected as a Delegate.

377. The faculty to vote by letter or by proxy is excluded.

378. The canonical voting by the Chapter members on the propositions or other documents must be carried out according to the norms of canon 119.2.

379. When conducting the Chapters, the norms of the Chapter Directory approved by the General Congregation must always be faithfully observed, but especially with reference to elections.

The Local Chapter

380. The Local Chapter is convened to:

1. Perform an accurate examination of the actual state of the House and Works entrusted to the community, always considering the planning and evaluation of the previous years. A report of the previous four years by the Local Superior must be presented in advance to the members of the Chapter.

2. a) To hold elections for Delegates and Alternates to the Provincial Chapter that are to be sent to Fr. Provincial; and, in Independent Vice-Provinces, to make the above mentioned elections and send the votes to Fr. Vice-Provincial.

b) In the Dependent Vice-Province elect candidates for Delegates and Alternates to the Vice-Provincial Chapter and send the votes to Fr. Vice-Provincial.

c) In the Local Chapters, elect Delegates when it is required.

d) In the Province, in the strict sense, to present candidates for the office of Provincial and to send them to Fr. Provincial.

e) In the Independent Vice-Province, to hold the election of candidates for the office of Vice-Provincial and to send the results to Fr. General.

f) In the Dependent Vice-Province, to elect the candidates for the office of Provincial and Vice-Provincial and to send the results to Fr. Provincial in order that the Provincial Congregation may perform a scrutiny of them.

g) In a General Delegation, to nominate candidates for the office of Delegate General and to send the results to Fr. General.

3. To formulate some planning and to submit propositions for examination.

381. During the three months preceding the Demarcational Chapter, it is forbidden to change the juridical status of the Houses, when such changes involve an alteration of the rights either of the Houses or the persons in relation to the Chapter.

382. The religious enjoying active voice may make in the Local Chapter propositions in writing for the Provincial and Vice-Provincial Chapters, which should be given, as soon as possible, to the Chapter members of the Community.

383. In all communities that have at least three members with an active voice, an administrative Local Chapter will be held, to deal with the corresponding matters and study the proposals presented.

The Provincial Congregation, with the N.O. of the General Congregation, shall determine whether the religious of the filial see will exercise their capitular rights in the main house or in the filial headquarters itself. The same should be said in the case of a community in several locations, with chapter celebration in its own headquarters.

384. For the election of Delegates and Alternates to the Provincial or Vice-provincial Chapter the process is as follows:

1. The Administrative Local Chapter will be held in accordance with no. 383.

2. a) The Fr. Provincial or Vice-Provincial will inform the entire Province or Vice-Province respectively, and within sufficient time, of the number of Delegates and Alternates to be elected, taking into consideration the number of Chapter members who attend the Chapter by right.

b) At the same time, a list of all the religious who enjoy passive voice for the office of Delegate will be given to all of the religious who have active voice; another list of those who have passive voice for the office of Provincial or Vice-Provincial will be given in the same way.

c) They will fill in the ballots for Delegates, writing as many names as equal to two thirds of the total number of candidates; if it happens that the total number is not exactly divisible by three, then each religious, in order to complete the ballot, must use the number mathematically calculated nearest to two thirds.

d) In ballots for the nomination of Provincial or Vice-Provincial, each religious will write two or three names, giving preference to the order, according to whether it is a formed or non-formed Province.

3. During the celebration of the Chapter there must be a special session in which the religious who have active voice will place the ballot without signature into an envelope, close it, and place it into an urn in the presence of all the members of the Chapter. The President, together with the examiners, will count the number of envelopes and on the outside of each envelop will emprint the seal of the community, and then put all the envelopes into a larger one, close it, and take care to send it in the safest way to Fr. Provincial or Fr. Vice-Provincial.

4. Once all the envelopes have been received, the Provincial or Vice-Provincial Congregation -either by themselves or by a committee especially appointed by the Congregation for this purpose- will scrutinize the ballots. Before that, they will swear to keep the results secret and will properly perform their duty.

5. When the scrutiny is finished, those who obtained the greatest number of votes will be declared and proclaimed Delegates and Alternates. The number of Alternates declared elected will be equal to one-fifth of the total number of Chapter members.

6. If several religious obtained the same number of votes, they will be put on the list of Delegates and Alternates by order of precedence according to the date of their simple profession, and, in case some made their simple profession on the same day, by order of age, until the required number is filled.

385. If a religious lives outside the Province or Vice-province without being attached to any community, he will send to Fr. Provincial or Vice-provincial, in the way that he deems most appropriate, his lists of candidates.

Special cases should be treated as prescribed in nos. 238, 239, 240.

386. 1. The elected Alternates replace only the Chapter members designated by election.

2. If any Delegate who belongs by right to the Provincial or Vice-Provincial Congregation must be replaced, the General Congregation designates a new Delegate; in other cases, the Provincial or Vice-Provincial Congregation designates the Delegate.

387. The list of Delegates and Alternates with the number of votes that each candidate received must be published for all the religious within a sufficient time.

388. 1. The procedure for the proposals of candidates for Provincial or Vice-Provincial which must be sent to the respective Major Superior, that is, to Fr. General and Fr. Provincial, following the norms of no. 380.2.d),e),f), should be the same as in the election of Delegates.

2. Once all of the envelopes have been received and the votes scrutinized (no. 384.4) Fr Provincial will send, as quickly as possible, the list of those who had the greatest number of votes for the office of Provincial or Vice-Provincial together with the number of votes and the corresponding number of points.

With the prior permission of Fr. General, the Provincial may announce this list to the religious of the Demarcation.

3. In order to count the number of points, it should be remembered that the votes written in the first place have a double value (that is, 50 x 2 = 100), those in the second place have the face value (that is, 20 x 1 = 20); and the names in the third place only get half a point for each vote (that is, 20 x 0.5 = 10).

4. If, by mistake, some religious wrote more names on a ballot than is permitted, either in the election of Delegates or of the candidates for Provincial or Vice-Provincial, the elections and candidate names which surpass the established number are to be considered invalid.

389. In the Houses directly depending on Fr. General that do not form a Demarcation, the following norms must be observed.

1. The Local Chapter will be celebrated in these Houses, but without elections of either candidates for Delegates or Alternates to the Chapter of the Demarcation, and without proposing candidates for the office of Provincial or Vice-Provincial, which are ordinarily made in the Local Chapters.

2. With regard to the list of all the religious who have passive voice for the office of Delegate in the Chapter of the Demarcation, a list must be sent by Fr. Provincial, or Fr. Vice-Provincial of an Independent Vice-Province, to each of the religious who enjoy active voice:

1. The religious of these Houses must be included in this list, and must receive it before the Local Chapter of the respective Province, or Independent Vice-Province.

2. From the list received, the religious of these Houses will select their candidates and send them in the way they judge best to Fr. Provincial or to Fr. Vice-Provincial of an Independent Vice-Province, respectively.

3. With regard to the list of the religious who enjoy passive voice for the position of Provincial or Vice-Provincial of either an Independent or Dependent Vice-province, which Fr. Provincial or Fr. Vice-Provincial must deliver to each religious who has active voice, the same things must be kept as those prescribed in 2.a), b), changing what must be changed.

4. The Rectors, Master of Novices and Master of Juniors of these General houses are regarded the same way as the other religious and can also be elected as Delegates to the Provincial Chapter of the Province or the Vice-provincial Chapter of the independent Vice-province, in which they remain incardinated respectively.

5. Concerning other questions regarding the Local Chapters, all things should be done as in the Local Chapters of the Province, referring any issues to the proper people.

The Provincial Chapter

390. The Provincial Chapter will take place every four years, and it may begin only a month after the celebration of the Local Chapters.

391. The Provincial Chapter is convened to:

1. Examine the state of the Communities, of the Provincial Vicariate, the Vice-Provinces, and the Province, and their respective Works through the reports prepared by the Local, Vicariate, and Vice-Provincial Chapters, and by the Provincial Congregation.

2. Hold elections and elect candidates, that is to say:

1. To constitute a new Provincial Congregation.

2. To elect the Delegate or Delegates with their respective Alternates who will attend the next General Chapter.

3. Make some planning and discuss the propositions connected with it, which have been proposed by the Local, Vicariate, and Vice-Provincial Chapters, and by the Provincial Congregation, as well as by the members of the Chapter; and also to deal with dubious or difficult problems.

392. In the Provincial Chapters:

1. The following have active voice:

1. The Provincial and his Assistants.

2. In the Province where they reside, those who have held the office of General, Assistant General, and Procurator General for at least three years; the former Provincials who have discharged this office for at least four years in their own Province; but only in the first Chapter following the end of their term in office.

3. The Vice-Provincials.

4. The Provincial Treasurer and the Provincial Secretary, if they meet the other conditions required to be a Delegate.

5. The Provincial Vicars.

6. The Rectors of all of the Communities of the Province, taken in a strict sense.

7. The Master of Novices and the Master of Juniors of the Province itself.

8. The Delegates of the Province, Vice-Province and Provincial Vicariates.

2. With the approval of the General Congregation, Provinces are granted the faculty to determine that the next Chapter will be constituted in a different way, keeping what is prescribed in the Constitutions, and what is included in no. 392.1 y 3 of the Rules.

3. The following have passive voice:

1. For Provincial: no. 353.6.

2. For Provincial Assistant: no. 353.4.

3. For the office of Delegate to the General Chapter: no. 353.5.

4. Religious and lay people refered to in no. 350.3 have voice without vote.

393. 1. The General Congregation will propose as candidates for the office of Provincial at least three of the six religious who the Provincial Congregation of a formed Province have presented to him or, respectively, at least two of the four religious candidates whom the Provincial Congregation of a non-formed Province will have sent to him. Once the Chapter has begun, the names of the candidates will be made known to the members of the Chapter in sufficient time but before the solemn session.

2. In order to avoid the inconveniences derived from a sudden resignation, the General Congregation must inform the candidates beforehand.

3. If any of the candidates believes that he has serious reasons to resign his passive voice, he should offer his reasons to the General Congregation, whose duty it is to weigh the reasons and accept or refuse the resignation.

The aforesaid list will be made up of the six or four religious, respectively, who had the greatest number of votes in the nominations of the religious, and who are endowed with the qualities required of a Provincial.

394. From these candidates, the Provincial Chapter will elect Fr. Provincial by canonical ballot, and he will be confirmed immediately by the President of the Chapter, in the name of Fr. General, and he will take immediate possession of his office. This applies equally to the formed and non-formed Provinces.

395. “The chapter of the provinces formed shall elect four provincial assistants, or only two, in the event that the new major superior deems it appropriate and with the approval of the Provincial Chapter and the General Congregation. In the same way, the Chapter of an unformed Province will elect two or four, with the permission of the General Congregation and in accordance with no. 279, who, in the name of Father General, will be confirmed by the president of the chapter, as soon as the election has been made.

It is up to the Provincial Chapter to decide, by canonical vote, whether the assistants will be chosen for specific areas, determined by the Chapter itself, or whether the new Provincial Congregation can decide in the way they consider most convenient.

396. Prior to the exploratory scrutiny (no. 367), the elected Fr. Provincial may propose some names for the election of the Assistants.

397. Father Provincial and the Provincial Assistants will be elected for a period of four years. For a third consecutive election a qualified majority is required. At a fourth consecutive election, they lose the passive voice.

398. In the Provincial Chapter of a formed Province two Delegates for the General Chapter are elected. In the non-formed Provinces only one, except for what is prescribed in no. 417.

The Vice-Provincial Chapter

399. In Independent Vice-Provinces, the Vice-Provincial Chapter is comparable to the Provincial Chapter in the fact that both are convoked by the Supreme Moderator, and that the Fr. Vice-Provincial and his two Assistants must be elected in it; the calling together of the Local Chapters is made by Fr. Vice-Provincial, by the authority of Fr. General; whenever the General Chapter is celebrated, the Vice-Provincial Chapter must precede it.

400. In Dependent Vice-Provinces, the Vice-Provincial Chapter is convened:

1. To examine the state of the Communities and the condition of the Vice-Province and its Works, according to the reports prepared by the Local Chapters and the Vice-Provincial Congregation.

2. To hold elections and suggest candidates:

1. To propose, by a relative majority (no. 365) and by separate ballots, four names from which the Provincial Congregation, as far as possible, must nominate two Vice-Provincial Assistants.

2. To elect two Delegates from the body of the members of the Chapter, who will go together with Fr. Vice-Provincial to the Provincial Chapter, and also to elect one Alternate; this Alternate does not necessarily have to be a member of the Chapter, neither must he necessarily actually reside in the Vice-Province.

3. To elect one Delegate and one Alternate to attend the General Chapter (cf. no. 401), in cases where the Vice- Province has, at least, twenty religious.

3. To make some planning and to discuss the propositions offered by the Local Chapters which have some connection with it, by the Vice-Provincial Congregation, and by the members of the Chapter, and to resolve dubious and difficult problems.

401. The Alternate will substitute for the Vice-Provincial or the Delegate, if there is one, in case they are impaired or have been elected Provincial in the Provincial Chapter.

402. The members of the Vice-Provincial Chapter are:

1. The Vice-Provincial and his Assistants.

2. Those mentioned in no. 392.1.b), if they reside in the Vice-province; the former Vice-Provincial in his Vice-Province, but only in the first Chapter after he has finished his term.

3. The Vice-Provincial Secretary and the Vice-Provincial Treasurer, provided they have met other conditions required for the role of Delegate.

4. The Rectors of all the Communities of the Vice-Province.

5. The Master of Novices and the Master of Juniors, strictly speaking, of the Vice-Province.

6. The Delegates of the Vice-Province.

7. Religious and lay persons as mentioned in no. 350.3 may attend the Chapter with voice but without vote.

403. The dependent and independent Vice-Provinces are granted the faculty of deciding whether the next Chapter could be constituted in a different way, provided it is approved by the General Congregation, after listening to the Provincial Congregation if it is a Dependant Vice-Province, keeping what is prescribed in the Constitutions and in n. 402 of the Rules.

404. When conferring the different offices in a Dependent Vice-Province, at the designation of Fr. Vice-Provincial, be it at Chapter time or outside of Chapter time, the “nihil obstat” of the General Congregation is required; but if the question is the nomination of the Vice-Provincial Assistant, the “nihil obstat” is required only outside of Chapter time.

405. The appointment to offices may be done by the nomination of Fr. Provincial, with the consent of his Council, or by election to be done in the Vice-Provincial Chapter.

406. The Provincial Congregation, at Chapter time, with the consent of the General Congregation and after hearing, as far as possible, the members of the Vice-Province, must decide whether for that time the faculty of electing the Vice-Provincial and his Assistants should be granted or not to the Vice-Provincial Chapter; and the Vice-Province should be notified of the decision immediately.

407. If the appointment is made by nomination:

1. After receiving the nominations made by the religious of the Vice-Province in the Local Chapters, and once the scrutiny is finished (no. 388.1.2), a list of four candidates for the office of Vice-Provincial will be made, considering both the nominations of the religious and the faculty of Fr. Provincial to substitute some names and add others, and when this list is prepared it must be sent to Fr. General in order to obtain the “nihil obstat” of the General Congregation.

2. Having obtained the “nihil obstat”, the Provincial Congregation will notify beforehand the religious whom they intend to nominate. If, for a serious reason, the candidate judges he cannot accept the office, the Provincial Congregation will weigh the reasons and accept or refuse the resignation.

3. Finally, after receiving the candidates’ names from the Vice-Provincial Chapter for the office of Assistant, Fr. Provincial, with the consent of his Council either before or after the Provincial Chapter, will nominate the Vice-Provincial and his Assistants from the four candidates presented by the Vice-Provincial Chapter, as far as possible.

4. Outside the Chapter time, in order to nominate Vice-Provincial Assistants, it is necessary to obtain the “nihil obstat” of the General Congregation.

408. If the appointment is made by election in the Vice-Provincial Chapter:

1. Once the nominations for the office of Vice-Provincial made in the Local Chapters by the religious of the Vice-Province have been received, and the scrutiny has been finished, (no. 388.1.2), the list of candidates, as stated in no. 407.1, should be made and sent to Fr. General in order to obtain the “nihil obstat” of the General Congregation.

2. Once the “nihil obstat” has been received, the Provincial Congregation, in order to avoid the inconvenience of an untimely resignation, must inform the candidates beforehand of their nomination. In the case that any of the candidates thinks that, for serious reasons, he should not accept the office, he must present his renunciation to the Provincial Congregation, which has to weigh the reasons and accept or deny the resignation.

3. Having done what previously has been said, the Provincial Congregation will propose at least two religious for the office of Vice-Provincial; and, if the Congregation wishes, they may propose some religious for the office of Vice-Provincial Assistant.

4. The list, thus prepared and clearly distinguishing between the candidates for Vice-Provincial, and those proposed for Assistants, will be sent to Fr. Vice-Provincial in a closed envelope with the seal of the Province emprinted on it to be opened at the Vice-Provincial Chapter in the presence of the Chapter members.

5. The election of Fr. Vice-Provincial must be made from the candidates presented by the Provincial Congregation; however, the election of the Assistants may be made freely either from the religious presented by the Provincial Congregation, or from other religious residing in the Vice-Province.

6. The Vice-Provincial, as well as the Assistants, will be confirmed by the President of the Chapter, in the name of Fr. Provincial.

409. The Provincial Chapter, after consulting the General Congregation, and hearing the opinion of the Vice-Province in the way determined by the Provincial Congregation, if it so wishes, may decree whether the designation of the Fr. Vice-Provincial and his Assistants will be made by nomination or by election.

The Vicariate Chapter

410. The Vicariate Chapter is convened:

1. To examine the state of the Communities, as well as the state of the Vicariate and the condition of its Works.

2. To elect a Delegate for the Provincial Chapter, if there are the required conditions

3. To make some planning and discuss the propositions.

411. The Statutes of the Vicariate will prescribe how the Chapter should be constituted: which type of representation will be given to the Houses in the Vicariate Chapter; and whether all religious will participate in the Chapter, provided they fulfill the conditions need to be Delegates.

412. If a Provincial Vicariate has at least ten religious with active voice, from whom a minimum of two enjoy passive voice, then, besides the Vicar, who is a Chapter member by right, another Delegate for the Provincial Chapter must be elected. With regard to other cases, Fr. Provincial, together with the Provincial Vicar, will provide for each case, in accordance with the Directory.

The General Chapter

413. The General Chapter, where the general community expresses itself in the most relevant way, is the supreme governing body of the Order, and the only one that enjoys legislative power. It will be celebrated every six years at a time decided by Fr. General, who must prepare it carefully, and must execute its decrees, either by himself or through committees appointed for this purpose.

414. In the celebration of the General Chapter, the norms established in the Constitutions, the Rules, and the Directory must be observed.

415. The General Chapter will be convened:

1. To examine the state of the Order in the light of the report prepared by the General Congregation, other documents, and the propositions related to this matter.

2. To elect the new Fr. General and his four Assistants.

3. To make some planning and to study the propositions presented by the Chapters of the Provinces, Independent Vice-Provinces, and General Delegations, the Chapter members, and the General Congregation –while preserving the right of any religious to make a proposition according to can. 631, par. 3 and to examine other problems of greater importance.

416. The following persons have a vote in the General Chapter:

1. Fr. General, his Assistants, and the Procurator General.

2. Those who have previously discharged the office of General over six years; this right is only for the Chapter immediately after they have finished their term.

3. All Major Superiors.

4. The General Treasurer and the General Secretary, provided they possess the required conditions for the office of Delegate.

5. The Delegates, legitimately elected, who should not be fewer than the participants by right.

417. When, in addition to the Delegates about whom no. 398 deals, still other Delegates should be elected to equal the number of Chapter members by right and by election, the Demarcations, beginning with those who have the greatest number of religious, will elect other Delegates until the required number is reached.

Prior to the celebration of the Chapter, Fr. General should inform the Demarcations involved of this election that they must hold.

418. If the General Congregation judges it opportune, they may also call other people to attend some sessions of the General Chapter with voice but no vote. These could be religious or lay persons attached to the Order. Occasionally, in special cases or matters, even persons outside of the Order who are expert in different matters may attend some sessions.

419. The prescriptions of the General Chapter become law from the day on which Fr. General promulgates them. The promulgation should be made as soon as possible in the official commentary of the Order. Fr. General has the right to publish the minutes of the General Chapter, and all the prescriptions, if he thinks it is opportune.

420. Fr. General will be elected for six years, and it is not necessary to choose him from among the members of the Chapter.

When Fr. General ends his tenure of six years, two thirds of the votes are needed for a second consecutive term; if in the first three ballots there is no election, for the fourth scrutiny the outgoing General loses the passive voice for the office of General.

He loses the passive voice for a third consecutive election.

421. After the election of Fr. General, four Assistants, not necessarily from among the members of the Chapter, must be elected for a six-year term.

Each Assistant must be elected in a different session.

422. Before the exploratory election (no. 367), the newly elected Fr. General may present some names for the office of General Assistant.

423. The General Assistants, once the six-year term is over, may be re-elected with two-thirds of the votes (no. 371). For a third consecutive term they lose the passive voice.

Appointments

424. 1. According to our laws, the canonical elections, to which the universal laws about elections must be exactly applied, are only those contained in no. 364; however, the designations that follow, although they are not, strictly speaking, juridical elections, must be done by a secret vote and scrutiny:

1. The designation of candidates for Provincial or Vice-Provincial made by the General Congregation, and the nomination for Vice-Provincial to be made by the Provincial Congregation, at Chapter time.

2. At Chapter time and outside of Chapter time, the nominations of Provincial Vicars, Local Superiors, Novice Masters and Master of Juniors, either in the Provinces or in the Vice-Provinces is to be made by the Provincial Congregation at the proposal of Fr. Provincial; in the Dependent Vice-provinces, however, it is required that first the Major Superior and his Council be heard.

3. The nomination by the Provincial Congregation, at the proposal of Fr. Provincial, for the office of Vice-Provincial or Provincial Assistant or Vice-Provincial, outside of Chapter time.

4. Outside of Chapter time, the nominations for Provincial, and Vice-Provincial of an Independent Province, as well as the nomination for General Delegate at Chapter and outside of Chapter time, to be made by the General Congregation at the proposal of Fr. General.

5. Outside of Chapter time, the nomination of the General Assistants to be made by the General Congregation at the proposal of Fr. General.

6. At Chapter and outside of Chapter time, the nominations of Rectors, Novice Masters, and Master of Juniors in the Houses dependant on the General Congregation, to be made by the General Congregation at the proposal of Fr. General.

7. At Chapter and outside of Chapter time, with regard to the above mentioned nominations and designations in the Independent Vice-provinces, the same should be done as in the Provinces.

2. The “nihil obstat” of the General Congregation is required for the appointments dealt with in no. 1.b) and c).

Resignations

425. If the Fr. General should decide to resign his office, he must declare his intention to the Council of Major Superiors, giving the reasons that his prudence suggests. The Council of Major Superiors, discussing deeply this question will offer its consultative opinion about the decision of Fr. General through a secret ballot. Only then will Fr. General present his resignation to the Holy See, together with the result of the Council of Major Superiors’ vote.

426. The resignations of the General Assistants, Major Superiors, officials of the General Curia, Assistants of a General Delegation and of an Independent Vice-Province, Local Superiors of Houses directly under the authority of Fr. General, Novice Masters, and Masters of Juniors, or Juniors in the Houses under the direct authority of Fr. General, or Interdemarcational Houses, properly speaking, must be presented in writing, and may be accepted by the General Congregation.

427. The resignation of Superiors and officials who are appointed with the “nihil obstat” of the General Congregation, as well as the resignation of the Provincial Assistants and the Assistants of the Dependent Vice-Provinces must be presented in writing, and the Provincial Congregation also needs the “nihil obstat” of the General Congregation in order to accept it.

428. In the same way, the resignation of the other officials must be presented in writing and may be accepted by the respective Major Superior who appointed them, after hearing his Council.

Chapter VII

THE ADMINISTRATION OF TEMPORAL GOODS

General Principles

429. Regarding the Administration:

1. Patrimony is the whole of the assets, liabilities, rights and obligations of any kind of which the General Community, or any Demarcational or Local Community has the title or juridical responsibility. They constitute the resources of the Order, and they are used by the Order to attain its goals and aims.

2. By the name of ownership comes all of the rights and duties, as well as the legal faculties, for the management of our patrimony, as given by law.

430. Fundamentals of Administration

1. Because of poverty and social responsibility, the administration of our patrimony should be done in a very careful way, taking into account the proper ecclesiastical and civil laws.

2. Due to special requirements and particularities in the economic field, only a general framework to make the Constitutions a concrete rule is given here. This framework should be developed in the Directory approved by the General Congregation and converted into concrete guidelines and rules in the Economic Statutes drafted in every Demarcation.

3. These Economic Statutes should be understood in accordance with the laws in force in a particular country, as well as with universal Canon Law and our own law. Statutes should be approved by the respective Major Superior after consulting the General Congregation.

431. The subjects of the Administration, according to the law:

1. The Order of the Pious Schools, its Provinces, Vice-Provinces, both independent and dependent, the Provincial Vicariates, the General Delegations, other institutions that could be formed in the future, and all the canonically erected Houses are juridical persons; that is to say, subjects with rights and duties; in other words, they enjoy, as it is said, juridical public personality.

2. Therefore, they are able to acquire, own, administer and transfer worldly goods, and to perform such juridical acts concerning them as may be necessary for good administration, both ordinary and extraordinary, according to the law.

3. The domain over temporal goods is limited either by the universal law, because they are ecclesiastical goods, or by our own laws.

432. Each one of the juridical persons of the Order is answerable about their acts, both canonically and in civil law.

1. If the juridical person contracted any debts and obligations, even with the Superior’s permission, the juridical person has to answer for it.

2. Physical persons are answerable by themselves, unless they acted because of written orders from his Superior, or strictly in the exercise of his duties. In these cases, the respective juridical person of the Order will be responsible.

3. If a physical person contracted any of the above mentioned debts without any permission of the Superiors, going beyond his charge or responsibilities, either as a private person or as a member of any group or association (cfr. no. 248 of the Rules), he himself is responsible, not the Order, neither the Demarcation nor the House or the Work.

433. Persons responsible for Economic Administration:

1. The Superiors (that is Fr. General in the whole Order, Frs. General Delegates, Provincials, Vicar Superiors in their respective demarcation, and Local Superiors in their Communities) are ultimately responsible for the administration of our patrimony, to preserving deeds, and to manage the activities of our current and future Works. In the exercise of their responsibility, they have to appoint economic administrators, taking into account all appropriate advice, and following the rules as prescribed by the law.

2. The expenses and juridical acts, both ordinary and extraordinary, of the economic administration are validly performed and permitted, by the above mentioned Superiors and Treasurers of whatever level and within the scope of their office, provided that they act according to the approved budget and the law in maintaining the financial vigor of the Order..

3. When some physical or juridical person represents the Order, the Demarcations, the Houses or the Works, they must always act according to the law and the directions of the competent Superiors.

4. The Economic Directory and the Statutes of the different Demarcations should determine the powers which Fr General or any Major Superior delegate and to whom; who is the Legal Owner, having representation and responsibility over the patrimony; and who is the Director or the Manager of the Work.

5. When civil law requires that the Order or another entity inside or outside the Order grants some goods to any religious in solemn vows, the religious must immediately make a will and name the Order or that entity of ours from which he has received those goods to be the beneficiary of those goods. The same will be done with regard to pensions, insurances or other financial compensations.

434. Fundamental Economic Principles:

1. The proper economic administration of our goods requires all of our communities and all of our members be made partners in the responsibility regarding our patrimony and in the way expenses are handled. This is truly related with poverty since it could be considered its practical exercise.

2. The Superiors and the Treasurers, being prudent and faithful managers, must take care of the economy, taking into account charity

Management

435. In order to administer the economic patrimony:

1. Major Superiors in every Demarcation, after hearing his Council and following what is written in no. 259, should appoint Treasurers for the Communities, Works and Demarcations. Similarly, Fr General will appoint Treasurers for Communities and Works dependent on him as well as a Treasurer for the whole Order.

2. The General Congregation and the Demarcational Congregations should require the Treasurer to attend their meetings whenever it deals with economic matters. Thus, right decisions could be made taking into consideration his advice and expertise.

436. All Treasurers under the direction and authority of the Superiors, always within the limits of the approved budget, have certain responsibilities in relation to the administration of economic matters.

437. The Major Superiors cannot exercise the office of Treasurer in their respective Demarcation.

438. The General, Provincial, and, as far as possible, Vice-Provincial, Provincial Vicariate and General Delegation Treasurers, in order to better fulfill their office, should have an Economic Secretariat. To establish this Secretariat, the following norms must be kept:

1. In every Demarcation the Major Superior will establish an Economic Secretariat, composed of a minimum of three members. These members will be the Provincial Assistant or Vice-Provincial for the Economy, if there is one –otherwise that position can be given to one of the members of the Demarcation-, the Demarcational Treasurer and one or more members appointed by the respective Major Superior, after hearing the opinion of his Council.

2. For the whole Order there must be an Economic Secretariat also, appointed by Fr. General, after listening to his Council, and presided over by the General Treasurer or a General Assistant, or by a person especially expert in economic questions.

3. It is convenient that these Secretariats should have the help of an external technical consultancy”.

439. The Local Treasurer is the only economic administrator of the Community, as well as of any other economic activity attached, under the direction of the Superior. In small Communities, as previously determined by the Provincial Congregation, the Superior may perform all of the economic administration.

Economic Administration System

440. It could happen that a religious or a lay person, because of the requirements of civil law, should be designated a proxy to accomplish the duties entrusted by Superiors. In that document, prepared by a notary, should be clearly stated the legal framework and the duration of the faculties given. Furthermore, that person will be supervised to make sure they have used the given faculties rightly.

441. Acts of ordinary administration are those that are related to the preservation and administration of our patrimony in connection with satisfying the needs of everyday life and the normal functioning of our institutions, as well as their preservation and maintenance. For their validity, they have to be included in the approved ordinary budget. If they are not, they become extraordinary acts.

Acts of extraordinary administration are those that exceed the ends and ways of the ordinary:

1. As for the ends: the acts that are related to any modification of the patrimony, with no regard to the measure of the alteration, whether major or minor.

2. As for the ways:

1. The acts that, in so far as their ends are concerned, belong to the ordinary administration but have not been included in the ordinary budget.

2. A substantial increase of the approved annual budget, taken as a whole (surpassing the third of the quantity determined by the Holy See for alienations, plus the inflation), without any consideration of the causes that have produced the variation in the affected accounting entries.

3. The acts that, in so far as their ends are concerned, belong to the ordinary administration and have been included in the ordinary budget, however their quantity exceeds the faculty that the person executing them possesses.

442. At the beginning of the fiscal year, each Treasurer, under the guidance of his Superior, must prepare a budget of income and expenditures, including what refers to ordinary economic administration as well as extraordinary economic administration.

443. The above mentioned budgets must be approved:

1. First of all by the proper institution (Local Community, Work, Demarcation).

2. Finally, by the superior institution.

3. The budget of the Order, by the General Congregation.

444. Either when the budget for the extraordinary economic administration is being prepared or in any matter where the patrimonial condition of the juridical person could worsen, the following norms must be kept:

1. The permission of the Holy See is required when it is a matter of:

1. Alienating goods or contracting debts surpassing the amount established by the Holy See.

2. Alienating things given to the Church by vow or objects valuable on account of their artistic or historical value.

3. In these cases, the previous permission of Fr. General, with the consent of his Council, is always required.

2. The consent of the General Congregation is required:

1. To rent, lease, alienate goods, or contract debts surpassing one third (1/3) of the amount established by the Holy See, as stated above.

2. In case of other extraordinary expenses, when they surpass two-thirds (2/3) the amount established by the Holy See.

3. In the case of renting something, the norms decided by the respective Episcopal Conference must be kept, and what is established in the previous paragraph 2.a) is also in force.

4. The Fr. Provincials should give concrete norms, in accordance with no. 445.2 of the Rules, to solve the economic problems in the Dependent Vice-Provinces and the Provincial Vicariates. Fr. General should do the same in relation to the Communities directly dependent on him, Independent Vice-Provinces and General Delegations (no. 445.1).

445. The Superiors need the consent of their respective Council in the cases where the universal law or our laws require it. The principal cases are the following:

1. Father General needs the consent of his Council:

1. When asking the Holy See for permission.

2. To perform extraordinary economic acts related to the patrimony dependent on the General Congregation.

3. To grant permissions as requested by the Major Superiors.

4. To grant permissions as requested by the Superiors of the Houses that depend directly on Fr. General.

5. To accept perpetual obligations.

6. To make investments.

7. To make expenses surpassing the amount that must be established by the same General Congregation.

8. To approve the annual budget for the patrimony directly dependent on the General Congregation.

9. To approve the budgets of the Demarcations.

10. To approve the budgets of the Houses under the immediate jurisdiction of Fr. General.

11. To levy taxes for the necessities of the Order.

2. Father Provincial needs the consent of his Council:

1. To ask for permission from the General Congregation or from the Holy See.

2. For acts of extraordinary economic administration (cf. no. 444).

3. To grant permissions requested by the Vice-Provinces, Provincial Vicariates, and Houses.

4. To approve the budgets of the Province, Communities and Works.

5. For any expenses which surpass the amount that must be established by the Provincial Congregation itself.

6. To accept perpetual obligations for his Demarcation.

7. To make investments

What has been established here applies to other Major Superiors by referring the proper matters to the proper people.

3. The Local Superior needs the consent of the Community:

1. To ask for permissions from the Provincial Congregation, General Congregation, and the Holy See, respectively.

2. For any act of extraordinary economic administration.

3. For any expenses over the amount established by the Provincial Congregation, or exceeding one tenth of those for which the approval of the General Congregation is required.

4. For the annual budget of the House, and, if needed, of the Work, according to the Statutes of the Demarcation.

5. To accept perpetual obligations for the House, except for the right of the Major Superior in this matter.

446. When requesting consent and giving authorization in economic questions, the following norms must be kept for validity:

1. The consent of the Community and of the different Congregations must be manifested through a secret vote.

2. The consent thus obtained must be written in the secretary’s book or in the minutes of the Congregations.

3. Before asking for permission to build, there must always be done a mature study by experts concerning the place, and other important things; this, together with the plans of all the buildings, the budget, and a clear indication of the sources from which the money is coming, and previsions for repaying the debts, must accompany the petition.

4. When the question is about selling or renting our goods, together with the request for permission must go a report in writing of a specialist, stating the value of the properties that are to be sold, rented, or loaned, as well as the price of the rent.

5. If the object to be transferred is divisible, when asking for the permission to transfer it, the parts already transferred must be declared.

6. In any petition for consent or permission to contract debts or obligations, a budget stating the income and expenses of the Demarcation must be presented, along with a declaration of all the debts or obligations that the Order, Demarcation, House or Work has already contracted until the present day.

7. It should never be allowed to contract debts or obligations, unless there are certain reasons showing that the interest of the debts can be paid from the ordinary income, and that the capital can be amortized within the established time.

8. The petitions to Fr. General must be sent through Fr. Provincial, and the petitions to the Holy See must go through Fr. General.

9. The Superiors must always give in writing the permissions for economic matters.

447. In economic matters, Directors of Works should act according to the powers and faculties given to them, as written in the Statutes of the Demarcation.

Objectives of our Economic Administration

448. There should be only one economic administration of the patrimony of the Order, which includes all goods and property belonging to the General Community. With this patrimony, plus the taxes from the Demarcations, we must support:

1. The daily expenses of the General Curia and General Secretariats.

2. The Demarcations in need.

3. The new foundations and the missions.

4. Houses depending on Fr. General that need some help.

5. The Vocational Work.

6. Other initiatives that are for the good of the Order.

449. In order to support the funding of the Order, Demarcations will pay an annual tax, which will be decided by Fr. General with the consent of his Assistants, at the proposal of the General Economic Secretariat, and after having heard the opinion of the Major Superiors.

450. For the same reasons and to achieve the same ends, a similar system must be established for Demarcations, unless a central economy has already been established.

451. The General Congregation, Provincial Congregations and the dependent Demarcations, with the consent of Fr. Provincial, may levy ordinary or extraordinary taxes on their Communities and Works.

452. In order to attend to the financial needs of the Order, Demarcations, Houses and Works, Fr. General with the consent of his Council, or, respectively, the Fr. Provincial with the consent of his Assistants, and keeping what the law demands related to obtaining the required permissions, may validly and lawfully exercise acts of extraordinary economic administration of any kind over the temporal goods of the entire Order or a Demarcation, respectively, thus limiting, with a concrete action, the rights of the Communities. This faculty includes transfers, rents, mortgages, and alienations. In all cases, however, the Community or Communities involved must be informed in advance and their opinion must be heard.

453. Each Demarcation has the duty of further advancing in economic centralization, according to no. 140 of the Constitutions. Therefore, the Provincial Chapters, considering the conditions of their own circumstances, will determine within the limits of their jurisdiction the concrete ways to achieve it.

454. The Local Communities will not accumulate money but, following the norms established by the Major Superiors with the consent of their Councils, should transfer it to the central treasury of their Demarcations.

455. Loans among the juridical persons of the Order will be encouraged, mutually agreeing upon the best beneficial conditions.

456. Concerning the mutual contracting of loans, debts, and obligations among the juridical persons of the Order:

1. Within the limits of the same Province, it may be done without any limitation to the amount, with the consent of the Provincial Congregation, and, after listening to the parties involved, unless economic centralization has been already established.

2. Among other juridical persons of the Order, according to the amount involved, the decision belongs to Fr. General, with the consent of his Assistants, after hearing from the interested parties.

Revision of the Economic Administration

457. In the General Economic Directory of the Order and in the Statutes prepared in each one of Demarcations, the method to be used for auditing financial management and the economic administration of the General, Demarcational, and local communities, as well as the Works attached to them, should be clearly and precisely stated.

458. It is required that the Major Superior, by himself or through another person, performs at least twice a year, a careful inspection of the finances of each House and Work. The audit should be forwarded to the Demarcational Congregation.

459. The treasurer’s report of each Demarcation and of the Order should be inspected and signed by the respective Congregation at least when the budget is presented, as well as in the middle and at the end of the fiscal year.

460. Regarding the Local community:

1. The Superior of the House must take care that the books of the domestic administration and of the Masses are inspected at least every three months and are signed by the respective officials.

2. This inspection could be done by the Community, which can appoint two Censors if it is convenient.

3. The Treasurer will give the Community an account of the economic matters of the Community and, if it is convenient, of the Work at least every three months. Censors, if there are any, as well as the Community members may offer their suggestions for the improvement of the economic administration

461. In Local, Demarcational and General Chapters some kind of financial audit covering the fiscal period between Chapters will be done, in accordance with the Economic Directory of the Order.

462. The Economic Statutes of every Demarcation will contain convenient norms for auditing the economy.

The Economic Administration of Cultural and Artistic Goods

463. The Fr. General in the whole Order, especially in the Works and Communities immediately dependent on him, and all other Major and Local Superiors and Directors in their Demarcation, House or Work, must take care that the cultural patrimony is kept and increased. Principally, the libraries, archives, and objects of great worth because of their artistic or historical value should be considered as the cultural patrimony.

464. Each Major Superior will designate a competent person to whom must be entrusted the care of the library, archives, and the artistic and historic patrimony belonging to the Order, Demarcations and Communities. They will be provided with the necessary financial means and a budget.

465. Each institution should have its own archives in which to keep the proper documents.

466. Besides documents, books and library items, there are other things that are precious because of their artistic or historical value. They should be preserved since they are an important part of our patrimony. Demarcations will have a suitable and safe place to preserve these items. They should be registered in an inventory and preserved according to current rules.

467. When a House or a Work is suppressed or even temporarily abandoned, the Local Superior will make an inventory of all the properties, not excluding the library and the archives. The Major Superior, after inspecting this inventory, will then decide where these goods must be transferred. The same must be done with the objects left by a religious when he dies.

468. If it seems to be opportune to sell or expurgate our cultural goods (library, archives, works of art, etc.) first of all, some experts, named for this purpose by the Major Superior, should be consulted. And then we must proceed following the norms of the universal law and our own laws.

469. In each House there should be an inventory and a catalogue of goods that are deemed valuable because of historic or artistic reasons, and in the Curia of the Demarcation there should be a general catalogue. And when these properties cannot be preserved in their own place, they should be placed in the common depository of the Demarcation.

470. Fr. General will appoint a Historian for the whole Order. Each Provincial will do the same in their Provinces. The other Major Superiors may also designate historians for their own Demarcations.

FOR THE GLORY OF GOD AND THE BENEFIT OF OUR NEIGHBORS

ACRONYMS AND ABREVIATIONS

ACRONYMS AND ABREVIATIONS

AA Apostolicam Actuositatem: The Decree on the Apostolate of the Laity.

AG Ad Gentes: The Decree on the Church’s Missionary Activity.

AI Ad Instituenda: Decree by S. C. of Religious giving faculties to the Religious Institutes.

C1 Constitutions (1986).

C2 Constitutions (1984).

C3 Constitutions (1980).

C4 Constitutions (1957).

CC Calasanz’ Constitutions (1622), Edition 1979.

CF Letter of Pope Francis to all Consecrated people on the occasion of the Year of Consecrated Life, 2014.

CG General Chapter. Always mentioning the year of its celebration.

CD Christus Dominus, The Decree on the Pastoral Office of Bishops in the Church.

CIC1 The Code of Canon Law 1917.

CIC2 The Code of Canon Law 1983.

CT Catechesi Tradendae: on the Catechesis today.

D Directories for the celebration of Chapters..

DD Declarationes and Decrees, Special General Chapter 1967-1969.

DH Dignitatis Humanae: the Declaration on Religious Liberty.

GOP De nostra gubernii Ordinis participatione: On our participation in the government of the Order.

DV Dei Verbum: The Dogmatic Constitution on Divine Revelation.

EN Evangelii Nuntiandi; On the Evangelization of the Modern World.

Ep.Cal. Epistolary of Saint Joseph Calasanz.

ES Ecclesiae Sanctae: On the implementation of some dispositions given by the Second Vatican Council.

ET Evangélica Testificatio: On the renewal of Religious Life.

GE Gravissimum Educationis momentum: Declaration on Christian Education.

GS Gaudium et Spes: The Pastoral Constitution on the Church in the Modern World.

IM Inter Mirifica: Decree on the Means of Social Communication.

LG Lumen Gentium: The Dogmatic Constitution on the Church.

MR Mutuae Relationes: on the Relations between Bishops and Religious in the Church.

NA Nostra Aetate: The Declaration on the Church’s Relations with non-Christian Religions.

OT Optatam Totius: The Decree on Priestly Training.

PC Perfectae Caritatis: The Decree on the Adaptation and Renewal of Religious Life.

PI Normae directivae de institutione in Religiosis Institutis: Directives by S.C. of Religious on Formation in Religious Institutes, 1990.

PO Presbyterorum Ordinis: The Decree on the Life and Ministry of Priests.

PP Populorum Progressio: On the Development of Peoples.

R1 Rules (1986)

R2 Rules (1980)

R3 Rules (1957)

R4 Rules (1977). When another edition is quoted, the year is indicated.

RC Renovationis Causam: On the Renewal of Religious Formation.

RH Redemptor Hominis: Encyclical Letter.

SC Sacrosanctum Concilium: Constitution on the Sacred Liturgy.

SchC Schola catholica: S.C. for Catholic Education, On the Catholic School (1997).

VC Vita Consecrata, 1996

vc Consultative vote.

vd Deliberative vote.

vcol Collegiate vote.

INDEX

INDEX OF SOURCES RULES

Chapter I Our Order and its Rules

1. C1 2; CG 1985

2. C3 8, 82-85

3. CC 345; C3 189

4. C3 11; R3 17; CG 1985

5. C1 119; C2 116-117; C3 108, 109

6. R3 1, 4, 7

7. R3 8-13; CIC2 29, 48, 59, 94

8. CG 2015.

9. C3 108, 109; CG 198.

10. R3 3,10-11,22; CIC2 116.1, 608, 609; CF I.2, II.3; CG 1985,2003,2015, 2002

11. R2 14.16; CG 2003

12. CG 2015

13. ES II 18; DD 57; CG 1985

14. (12) CIC2 596, 618, 619, 622, 631

15. CIC1 501; CIC2 129, 596; “Clericalia Instituta” 1, 4

16. C3 108, 109; R3 12, 14

17. R3 22.1-8; CIC2 129; CF II.2, III.1; CG 1985,1991,2003,2015.

18. R3 22.6; CIC2 596, 608, 620; CG 1985

19. CG 1985

20. R2 271, 368; CG 1985

21. R3 408

22. R3 384, 386

23. CG 2022

24. R3 387; CG 1985

25. R3 388

26. R3 398; CG 1985

27. R3 401; CIC2 127; CG 1985, 1991

28. R3 403, 367, 434; CIC2 105, 127; CG 1985

29. R3 405; CIC2 127; CG 1985, 1991

30. CG 1985

31. CG 1985, 1991

32. CG 1985

33. CG 1985

34. C3 109; CIC2 583, 587.1.2

35. CG 1985

36. R3 589, 590; CIC2 587.4

37. R3 587; CG 1985
Chapter II. Consecrated Life in Community

The Calasanzian practice of the Vows

38. R2 29; CIC2 578, 587; VC 35-37

39. R2 31; VC 38-39

40. Declarationes Constitutionum 15; Ep. Cal. 2110; CIC2 598; VC 20, 21
Chastity

41. PC 12; CIC2 599; VC 88; CG 2003

42. R2 33; PI 13; CG 2003

43. R2 34; CG 2003

44. R2 35; CG 2003

45. R2 36
Poverty

46. PC 13; CIC2 600; VC 89

47. R2 38

48. R2 39

49. R2 40; PI 14

50. C4 151; R3 245

51. R2 42

52. R2 43; CG 2003
Obedience

53. PC 14; CIC2 601; VC 91

54. CIC2 618; PI 15

55. R2 46

56. R2 47

57. R2 48

58. R2 49

59. R2 50
Community of Prayer

60. DD 412; CG 1973; VC 93

61. C2 48; CG 1973; VC 93

62. C3 39-41; CIC2 663.3; VC 93, 94

63. CG 2003

64. Eucharisticum Mysterium (1967) 47; DD 455; C3 30, 44; CIC2 902; VC 95

65. Principles and norms for the Liturgy of the Hours (1970) 24-29; DD 456-459; CIC2 663.3, 1174.1.2; VC 95

66. Ordo Poenitentiae 13; C3 45; CIC2 630.1, 663; VC 95; CG 2003

67. C3 46; CIC2 664; CG 1973

68. CC 66

69. R3 193; C3 47; Catechism of the Catholic Church (1997) 1163-1171

70. Ep. Cal. 127, 755b, 1049, 1459; R3 175, 190, 191; DD 462; CIC2 663.4; VC 95; CG 1997, 2003

71. R3 117, 189; C3 47; CG 1997, 2003

72. R3 187; CG 1985

73. R3 180; C3 48; CIC2 663.5; CG 2003

74. C1 48; C4 77, 288; CG 1973

75. R3 180, 181; C1 42; C4 61, 62, 65; DD 41, 65, 459

76. C3 49; CG 2003

77. C2 48; CIC2 608; CG 1973
Community Life

78. DD 64, 65; CIC2 602; VC 42; CG 1997

79. R3 171; C4 51; CIC1 597; CIC2 667.1; CG 2003

80. R3 162; CIC1 606; CIC2 665.1

81. R3 165, 166, 167; CG 1985, 2003

82. R3 164; C1C2 665.1

83. R3 165, 394

84. CC 174; C4 169; R2 73, 303, 304; CG 1985, 2003

85. CC 168, 171; R3 163, 166

86. C3 112, 158; CG 1973

87. R3 306-309; C1 77; C4 168; CIC1 1386; CIC2 832; CG 2003

88. CG 2022

89. R3 300

90. CG 2022

91. CC 63-65, 78; C4 87; VC 44

92. CC 85; R3 207

93. R3 221; CG 2003
Suffrages for the dead

94. R3 210; CG 2003

95. R3 211

96. R3 211; CG 2003

97. R3 211,218; CG 2003

98. R3 212

99. R3 221; CG 2003
Chapter III Our Ministry

100. GE proœmium, l1, 40; EN 14, 15; PI 14, 15; MR 14; SchC 4, 7

101. DD 26, 46; VC 96; CG 1997, 2003

102. MR 33f; CT 52; DD 763, 790, 796

103. CG 2022

104. GE 8; MR 9d, 53; SchC 8, 9; DD 58, 203, 220, 240, 759, 772

105. GS 11, 53, 56-59, 62; RH 19; EN 18, 19, 27, 36; CT 53; SchC 10-12, 37-48; DD 784, 786; VC 97

106. EN 15, 22-24, 28, 42, 48; CT 5, 24, 48; SchC 4, 35, 47, 54, 55; Religious Dimension of Education in Catholic Schools (1988) 31-41, 66-73; DD 357, 838

107. VC 63; CF I.2, II.2-5, III.1; CG 2015.

108. CG 2022
The Education of our children and young people

109. GS 75; GE 1.3; PP 32; EN 25, 39; SchC 13; DD 483

110. GS 58; CT 11; RH 12; GE 1-3; CT 22, 29, 37, 39, 56, 57; SchC 12, 35; DD 770, 773, 843

111. GS 31, 55-57; AA 30; GS 3; PP 73, 83; CT 29, 38, 39; SchC 36, 57, 58; DD 770, 773

112. SC 19; GE 1, 2; RH 12, 14; EN 44, 63, 79; CT 13, 20, 21, 31 49, 51, 59; SchC 34, 35; DD 837, 841; CG 1997

113. DD 884-890, 758, 770-775; CIC2 795; CG 1979, 1985, 1997
The Calasanzian Educator

114. GS 58; DV 2-4, 9, 13, 15; LG 9; NA 2; GE l, 2; SC 19; AA 15.19; EN 44, 48, 63; RH 12; CT 17, 53, 54; MR 17, 18,23c; DD 856-857; VC 98

115. EN 3, 4, 15; CT 6, 16, 17, 21, 30, 49, 52, 60, 61; MR 9d, 12, 18a, 22, 33, 53; DD 831, 836, 851

116. EN 21, 41, 69, 75; DD 354, 356; CG 2003

117. EN 67-69; DD 356; CG 1997, 2003
Catechesis

118. EN 1, 14; CT 1, 10-15, 18-20; DD 45, 318, 847, 858, 859

119. SC 109; CD 30; PO 6; AA 30; EN 23, 47; CT 18, 22, 33, 37; DD 357, 358, 855, 873; CG 1997

120. AG 17; CT 15, 17, 58; MR 26; DD 833, 839, 849, 850

121. CC 194; DD 834-836, 861, 871, 873, 926, 927; CG 1985

122. OT 2; EN 58, 72; CT 47; DD 845, 940; CG 1997

123. GS 48, 52; AA 1, 12; GE 3, 44; EN 54; CT 16, 36, 68; DD 166-170, 983-991

124. EN 13, 15, 24, 60; CT 16, 24; MR 18b, 20, 36, 39; SchC 72; DD 80, 831, 846, 851, 1096, 1111
The Calasanzian School

125. GS 89; GE 4, 5, 98; CT 69; SchC 3, 8, 9, 15-32, 71, 72, 77, 83, 84, 87; DD 61, 112, 146, 319, 758

126. GE 8; DH 4,5; SchC 9, 21, 53-56, 73, 85; DD 490, 844, 845

127. SchC 72, 73; DD 166, 749, 780, 811, 983, 984

128. SchC 4, 53-55

129. SchC 39-63,65-67, 70

130. EN 44; CT 69; SchC 49-52; DD 848, 852; CG 1973

131. SC 56; DD 869, 870; CG 2003

132. GE 7; SchC 47, 51; DD 844-852

133. GE 8; MR 40; DD 679, 680, 779, 846

134. AA 30; CD 35; IM 3; GE 9; EN 45; SchC 72; DD 188, 789, 808-814; CG 1997, 2022

135. GS 61; CD 12; AA 30; EN 46; DD 773, 842, CG 2022

136. MR 26; CG 1997, 2022

137. DD 992, 997; CG 1979

138. R4 121; CG 2003

139. SchC 78; DD 800, 999, 1004, 1005, 1011; CG 2003

140. DD 1001

141. SchC 86; DD 840, 841

142. DD 824, 825; CG 1979, 2003

143. MR 40-43; CG 1997, 2003
Other activities

144. C4 5-7; SchC 8, 74-76, 89, CG 2022

145. DD 815, 823; CG 1973

146. R3 198-201; C4 78, 79; CG 1985, 1997

147. DD 898, 899; CG 1985, 2022

148. MR 19, 23c; SchC 77; DD 900; CG 1997, 2022

149. DD 905; CG 1991, 2003

150. DD 1095, 1103, 1111; CG 1973, 2022

151. CC 188-191, 289; R4 134
Chapter IV Vocational Pastoral and Formation of the Religious

152. C3 95; DD 476, 486, 487; VC 64-65; CG 2003

153. DD 475, 488-492, 571, 572, 590, 621, 622; PI 1-5; The Piarist’s formation (1991); Piarist Directory for pastoral vocation (1992); Piarist Directory for permanent formation (1994); CG 1991, 2003

154. DD 493, 496 ,498; PI 86-89; CG 1997

155. DD 496, 492, 568-570, 708-711, 508-510; CG 2003

156. R3 41-52; DD 495, 496, 497, 492, 474-696; CG 2003
Formation Centers and the Formators

157. RC 17; DD 599, 601; CG 1973

158. DD 649; CG 2003

159. R3 67, 122; PI 30-32; VC 66, 67; CG 1973, 1979, 1991, 2003

160. DD 703, 712, 714-716; CG 1973, 2003

161. R3 122

162. CG 2022
Aspirancy and Pre-Novitiate

163. PI 42; DD568-572,590-591; R3 42-44; CG 2015.

164. CG 1973

165. R3 42, 137, 140; DD 608, 609

166. R3 49-50; DD 590-595; The Piarist’s formation (1991) 90-114; CG 1973, 1985, 2003

167. R3 52-53; C4 12-16; CIC2 597; PI 43

168. CIC2 645; VC 68

169. R3 39; CIC2 643; CG 1985
Novitiate

170. R3 59, 61; DD 618; CIC2 641, 646

171. R3 56

172. DD 598, 600, 603, 604; CIC2 647.2.3, 648

173. RC 22; DD 605; CIC2 649.1

174. R3 54; CIC2 702

175. DD 509, 511-567; The Piarist’s formation (1991) 115-139

176. DD 596, 597; CIC2 646; VC 68; PI 45; CG 2003

177. R3 73; DD 563-566; PI 46, 47

178. R3 74; DD 616; CIC2 625.1; CG 1985, 2003

179. RC 24; DD 612-615; CIC2 648; CG 1979

180. RC 23; DD 613; PI 52

181. R3 75-82; C4 27; CIC1 563; CG 2003

182. R3 99; CIC2 653.1.2

183. R3 93; PI 55

184. R3 94; C4 29; CIC2 668.1.2

185. R3 100; C4 30; C3 99; DD 506, 507, 620; CG 1973, 2003

186. CIC2 656; CG 1985

187. R3 97; CIC1 571.3

188. R3 99, 107-108; DD 619; CIC2 6, 55

189. RC 10; DD 620; CIC2 249.2; CG 1985

190. R3 103; CG 2003

191. R3 102, 108; DD 1045, 1075; CIC2 656.5

192. R3 91, 110; CG 2003
Juniorate

193. R3 135-136, 142-146; PI 58-62; VC 68; CG 1985, 2003

194. R3 120, 135-161; DD 508-567, 621-644; The Piarist’s formation (1991) 140-218; CG 2003

195. DD 509-510

196. R3 154, 156; DD 634-636, 551-555; PI 102-107; CG 2003

197. R3 158; DD 550, 631, 637, 798

198. R3 251; DD 246-248, 501; CG 1718

199. R3 130; CG 1985

200. R3 108, 109; CIC2 657.1

201. R3 107-109; CG 1973, 2003

202. CIC2 657.1, 689.1

203. CIC2 658; CG 1985, 1991

204. CIC2 657.3; CG 1985, 1991

205. C4 114; CIC2 688.2

206. R3 95, 111; CIC2 689.2.3; CG 1973, 1985

207. RC 38; CIC2 690.1

208. R3 115; RC 9; DD 627; PI 56; CG 1973, 2003

209. R3 117, 118; C4 36; CIC2 668.4.5; CG 1997, 2003

210. R2 194; Essential elements in the Church’s teachings on religious life (1983) III.6; CG 1979

211. R3 103; CIC1 576; CG 2003

212. R3 117, 119; CIC1 585; CG 2003

213. CIC2 1020, 1050.

214. R3 116; CIC2 1019.1, 1036, 1037, 1050.3; CG 2003
Permanent formation

215. R4 194; CIC2 659; The Piarist’s formation (1991) 252-267; Directory on Permanent Formation (1994) 70-93; PI 66-67, 69-70; VC 69-70; CG 1997, 2003

216. R4 195; PI 68; VC 71

217. R4 196

218. R4 197; PI 68; VC 71; CG 1997

219. R4 198; CIC2 660.1; CG 1997

220. R4 199; CIC2 659.2; CG 1985, 1991, 2003

221. CG 2022
Chapter V The Organized Structure of Our Order

The Religious

222. R3 24, 25; CIC2 654; CG 2003

223. R3 62; R4 201

224. C4 306-308; C3 121; DD 1078; CG 2003

225. C 4,186-189; R3 322-327,373; CG 2003,2015

226. R3 24, 26; C3 124, 126; CG 1973, 1985

227. R3 27; R4 205; RC 7; CG 1979

228. R4 206; CIC2 578.3

229. R3 28; R4 207

230. R3 3.1; R4 209; CG 1985, 2003

231. R3 29; R4 208; CG 2003

232. DD 957; R4 210

233. R3 57; R4 212; CG 1973, 1997, 2003, 2022

234. CIC2 677.2; CG 1985, 2003

235. VC 31,37,54-56,96-98; CIC2 298-311; Starting afresh from Christ 31; CG 2015

236. CG 2022

237. R3 58; R4 213; DD 1021-1025

238. R4 214; CIC2 665, 686, 687, 693, 684, 685; CG 1985, 2003

239. R4 215, 216; CIC1 639, 2385, 2386; CG 1985

240. C3 79; R4 217; CG 1985
The Local Community

241. C3 131; R4 218

242. R3 22.10; R4 219; C3 132; C4 175; DD 1052; CG 1973

243. R3 22.10, 314; C4 175; CG 1985

244. R4 220; C3 132; C4 172; CIC2 609, 611, 612; CG 1985

245. R3 289, 313; C3 132; DD 950, 966; CIC2 610; CG 1985

246. CC 183; C3 132, 133; C4 176; DD 969; CIC2. 616.1; CG 1985

247. CG 2003

248. R3 262; R4 223; C3 132; DD 943, 944; CIC2 671; CG 1973, 1985

249. CC 181; R3 319; R4 224; C3 64

250. R3 22.8, 474; R4 225, 226; C4 205, 206, 254; C3 135; CG 11979, 1985, 1991

251. R4 226; C3 135; CIC2 626, 3; CG 1985

252. CG 1985

253. R4 227; C4 250-264; C3 136; CG 2003

254. R3 280; R4 228; CG 1979, 1985, 2003

255. R3 464; R4 229

256. R3 469; R4 230; GOP 119.17; C3 137; CG 1985, 2022

257. R3 402, 475; R4 231; C3 137; CIC2 703; CG 1985, 2003

258. R3 477, 520, 521; R4 232; DD 1050; CG 1985, 2003

259. R3 479-497; R4 233; C3 137; C4 257, 258; CG 2003

260. R3 280; R4 234; C3 137; C4 257, 258

261. R3 485; R4 235; C3 137; C4 257, 258; CG 2003, 2022

262. R3 486; R4 236; C3 137; C4 257, 258; CG 2003, 2022

263. R3 531-541; R1 468-471; C3 137; C4 257, 258; DD 690, 691

264. R3 487, 488; R4 238; C3 137; C4 257, 258.
The Provincial Community

265. CC 282; R4 239; C3 144
1. The Province, in the strict sense

266. R3 22.9, 322; C4 187

267. R3 22.9, 322; C4 187, 188, 245

268. R4 239; DD 1096, 1111

269. R4 133, 239-240, 303-388; DD 1095-1097; CG 1973, 2003

270. DD 1102; CG 1985

271. R4 241; DD1104-1111; CG 1985

272. R4 242; DD 1098-1103, 1111

273. R3 22.2-4; R4 243; DD 1098-1103, 1111; CG 2003

274. R3 253; R4 245; C3 148; C4 202, 203; DD 1119, 1137; GOP 68, 119.6; CG 1991

275. R3 439; R4 246; CG 2003.

276. R3 444-453; R4 247; C3 146-151; C4 236-240; CG 1991

277. R3 440; R4 248; CG 2003,2015.

278. R3 441; R4 250; CG 1985

279. R3 365, 454-455; R4 251; C3 154; C4 207, 235, 245; GOP 69-70; CG 1985, 1991

280. R3 456; R4 244

281. R3 259; R4 253; CG 1985

282. R3 463; R4 254; CG 1985

283. CG 2022
2. Dependent Vice-Provinces and Provincial Vicariates

284. R3 323; C4 189; C3 161
A. Dependent Vice- Provinces

285. R3 323; C4 189; C3 161; CG 1985

286. R3 22.9; C4 189; CG 1985

287. R3 460; R4 256; C4 246; CG 1985

288. R4 246; CG 1985, 2003

289. R4 258, 259, 261; C4 246; GOP 86, 119.8.10; CG 1985, 1991

290. R3 461; R4 260; CG 1985

291. R4 261; GOP 70; CG 1991
B. The Provincial Vicariates

292. C1 191; C2 185; C3 169; CG 1985

293. R3 22.7.9; C4 246; C3 171; GOP 119.13; CG 1985, 1991, 2003

294. CG 1985, 2003

295. CG 1985, 2003

296. C4 246; CG 1985, 1991, 2003

297. CG 1985, 2003

298. CG 1985, 1991
The General Community

299. R4 265; C4 186; C3 173; CG 1985
1. The Order in general

300. DD 50-57, 1096; CG 1985
1° Father General

301. R3 409; R4 268; C4 214-216; CIC2 622, 624.1

302. R3 409-416; R4 269-272; C4 214-16; C3 176; CIC2 592.1.2; CG 1979, 1985, 2003

303. R3 418; R4 270; C4 265; C3 176; CIC2 628.1; CG 1973

304. R3 258; R4 271; C4 265; CG 2003

305. R4 272; C3 176; DD 1038; CG 1985

306. R3 22.1, 411; R4 273; CG 1985, 2003

307. CG 1985

308. R3 22.9,325; R4 291; CIC2 129; CF II.2, III.1; CG 1985,2003,2015.

309. R4 294; CG 1985, 2003
2° General Assistants and the General Congregation

310. R3 423-430; R4 274; C4 230-233; C3 177; GOP 110-113; CG 1979, 1997, 2003

311. R4 275; C1 200; GOP 119.2; CG 1991, 2003

312. R3 401, 404, 433; R4 277; CIC2 128.1; CG 1985

313. R3 427, 428; R4 278

314. R3 428; R4 279; CG 1985

315. R3 432; R4 280; CG 2015.

316. CIC2 699; CG 1985
3° The Officials of the General Curia

317. R4 282; C4 221; C3 178; CG 1985

318. R4 283; CIC1 517

319. R3 426; R4 284

320. R3 419; R4 285

321. R3 500, 502; R4 286; C2 197; C4 224; DD 1157, 1160; CIC2 636.1.2

322. R3 420; R4 287; C4 225; C3 182

323. R4 288; C4 223

324. VC 109-110; R1 466,473; R3 421,422,531-547; R4 289,290; CF I.1; CG 2015

325. CG 2022
4° The Council of Major Superiors

326. R4 296; DD 1093, 1094, 1104, 1105

327. R4 297; DD 953-1107; CG 1973, 2003

328. R4 298; C3 186; DD 1106; CG 2003
5° General and Inter-Demarcational Secretariats

329. R4 299; DD 940, 1096-1103

330. R4 300; DD 1099

331. R4 301; DD 1199; CG 2003

332. R4 303; DD 1102; CG 2003

333. R4 302; DD 1159; CG 2003

334. R4 303; DD 1102; CG 2003
2. Independent Vice-Provinces and General Delegations

A) Independent Vice-Provinces

335. R3 22.5.9, 323; C4 189; C3 161; CG 1985

336. R3 22.9; C4 189; CG 1985

337. R3 22.9, 460; R4 256; C4 246; CG 1985

338. R4 246; CG 1985

339. R4 257; GOP 86, 119.8; CG 1985

340. R3 461; R4 260; CG 1985
B) General Delegations

341. R3 22.9, 325; R4 291; CG 1985

342. R4 294; CG 1985

343. R4 246; CG 1985

344. R3 325; R4 295; CG 1985

345. R4 294, 347, 348; GOP 88; CG 1985, 2003
Inter-Demarcational Association

346. CG 2003

347. CG 2003
Canonical Visitation

348. R2 255.1, 276, 280-282; R3 418, 548-562; C4 265-279; C3 152, 176; CG 1991

349. CG 2003
Chapter VI. The Participation of the Religious in the government of the Order

Voice and vote

350. R4 304; CG 1973, 1979, 1985, 2003

351. R4 305; C4 196, 199, 210; DD 1113b; CG 1973, 1979,

352. R3 330; R4 306; CG 1973, 2003

353. R4 308; C4 199.II; DD 1114a.b; CG 1973, 1979, 1985,

354. R4 308.2.3; DD 1114; CG 1973, 1979, 1985, 2003

355. CG 1985
Chapters in General

356. R4 309; C4 190; C2 123; DD 1115a; CG 1985

357. R4 310; C4 190; C2 123

358. R4 311; D 1973 3e; CG 1973

359. R4 312; DD 1115c, 1128; CG 1985, 2003

360. R4 313; C4 197, 200; DD 1115e; D 1973 6b; CG 1985, 2003

361. R4 314; GOP 35-48; CG 1973, 2003

362. R4 315; C4 192; DD 1117a; CG 1979, 2003

363. R4 316; C4 201; D 1957 35, 79, 82, 102; CG 1973, 2003

364. R4 317; C4 193; DD 1118a, 1119; CG 1973, 2003

365. R4 319; DD 1119; CG 1973, 2003

366. R3 428; R4 320; DD 1117c; CG 2003

367. R4 321; CG 1973

368. R4 315, 319; CG 1985

369. CIC2 119.1, 164, 176; R4 322, 323; CG 1985

370. R4 324; C4 193; DD 1118c; CG 1985

371. R4 325; CG 1973, 1985, 1997, 2003

372. R4 326; C4 193; DD 1118d; CG 1991, 1997, 2003

373. R3 336; CIC2 167.2; CG 1985

374. R3 360; CG 1985

375. R3 337; CIC1 179, 180; CIC2 180-183; CG 1973

376. R3 338, 351; R4 328; D 1973 11

377. R3 334; R4 329; CIC2 167.1; D 1973 11; CG 1973, 1985, 2003

378. CIC2 119.2; CG 1985

379. R3 329; R4 330; C4 191; DD 1116
The Local Chapter

380. R4 331; C4 194; DD 1120; CG 1973, 1979, 2003

381. R3 341; R4 333; D 1973 31b; CG 1979

382. R4 337; D 1957 37; CIC2 631.3; CG 1973

383. R3 339, 343; R4 336; DD 1123a; CG 1973, 2003, 2022

384. DD1122; R3 339; R4 340; CG 1979,1991,2003,2015

385. DD 1122; D1973 27; R4 342; CG 1973,2015

386. R4 342, 343; DD 1122; CG 1973, 2003

387. R4 344; DD 1122

388. DD1122; R4 345; CG 1973,2003,2015

389. R3 348; CG 1991,2015
The Provincial Chapter

390. R3 354; R4 349; C4 198; DD 1128; CG 1991

391. R4 350; C4 159, 193; DD 1129; CG 1973, 1991, 2003

392. R4 351; C4 199; C3 160; DD 1130; CG 1973, 1979, 1991, 2003

393. R4 353; DD 1132a; CG 1973, 1979, 1985, 2003

394. R4 354; DD 1132a

395. R4 355; DD 1132b, CG 2022

396. R4 356; CG 1973, 2003

397. R3 455; R4 358; C4 203; DD 1134; CG 1973, 1991, 2003

398. R3 376; R4 359; C4 213; DD 1135, 1147b
The Vice-Provincial Chapter

399. R4 360; DD 1116d

400. R4 361, 362; C3 167; DD 11383; CG 1973, 1985, 1991, 2003

401. R4 364; CG 1973, 2003

402. R4 365; C4 208; C3 168; DD 1140; CG 1973, 1979, 1985, 2003

403. CG 1979, 2003

404. CG 1985

405. CG 1985

406. CG 1985

407. R4 367; CG 1985, 1991, 2003

408. R4 367; CG 1985, 1991

409. CG 1985
The Vicariate Chapter

410. R1 284; CG 2003

411. R1 284; CG 2003

412. R4 346; DD 1124; CG 2003
The General Chapter

413. R3 14, 371; R4 360; C4 209; DD 1142; D 1973 29; CIC2 631.1

414. DD 1116

415. R4 369; C4 209; C3 187; DD 1142; CG 1973, 2003

416. R4 370; C4 372; C3 188; DD 1143; CG 1973, 1979, 1985

417. CG 1985

418. R4 371; DD 1144; CG 2003

419. R3 379; R4 372; D 1973 42; CG 1973

420. R4 373; C4 211, 212; DD 1145, 1146; CG 1991, 2003

421. R4 374; C4 213; DD 1147a; CG 1973

422. R3 376, 378; R4 375; DD 1147b; CG 1973, 1985, 1991, 2003

423. R3 424; R4 376; DD 1148; Cg 1991, 2003
Appointments

424. R3 328; R4 377, 378; DD 1119, 1154, 1155; CG 1979, 195, 2003
Resignations

425. R4 379; CG 1973

426. R4 380; CG 1973, 1979

427. R4 381; DD 1156; CG 1973

428. R4 382; CG 1973
Chapter VII. The Administration of Temporal goods

General Principles

429. CIC2 1257.1; CG 2003

430. CIC2 635; CG 1979, 2003

431. R3 498; R4 383; C3 115; CIC2 634.1, 1255; CG 2003

432. R3 524; CIC2 639.1-4, 1276; CG 2003

433. R3 504, 505; CIC2 636, 1279, 1281; CG 1991, 2003

434. DD 1157; CG 2003
Management

435. R3 500; R4 385; CIC2 636.1; CG 1985, 2003

436. R3 504, 511; R4 386, 393; CG 2003

437. R3 501; R4 387; CIC2 636; CG 2003

438. R4 388; DD 1158; CIC2 1280; CG 1973, 1985, 2003

439. R3 503; R4 392; CG 2003
Economic Administration System

440. CG 2003

441. R3 509; R4 395, 396, 401; R1 433, 434; CIC2 638; CG 1979, 2003

442. R3 511; R4 398; CIC2 1284; DD 1164; CG 2003

443. R3 511; R4 399, 400; DD 1164; CG 1979, 2003

444. R3 520; R4 406; CIC2 638, 1292-1297; CG 1979, 1985, 2003

445. R3 520, 521; R4 407; CG 1979, 2003

446. R3 521; R4 409; CG 2003

447. CG 2003
Objectives of our Economic Administration

448. R3 513; R4 410; CG 1979, 2003

449. R3 514; R4 411; CG 1979, 2003

450. R3 515; R4 412; CG 2003

451. R3 499; R4 413; CG 2003

452. R3 499; R4 414; C3 67; CG 2003

453. CG 1973, 1979, 2003

454. CG 1979, 2003

455. R3 520; R4 415; CG 2003

456. R3 520; R4 416; CG 2003
Auditing the Administration

457. CIC2 636.2; CG 2003

458. R3 512,528; R4 404,420; CG 2003

459. R3 529; R4 421; CG 2003

460. R3 525, 526, 527; R4 417, 418, 419

461. C4 201; R3 339, 343, 368; R4 316; 336, 347, 352, 360, 366; DD 1123a, 1131, 1116d; CG 1973, 2003

462. CG 2003
Administration of the Cultural and Artistic patrimony

463. R2 263; C3 150; C1 171; CG 1985, 2003

464. R3 542; R2 299; CG 1985, 2003

465. R3 542-547; CG 1985, 2003

466. R3 243, 531-541, 543; CG 1985, 2003

467. R3 534; CG 1985, 2003

468. R3 409.4; R2 422.4; CG 1985, 2003

469. CG 1985, 2003

470. R2 299, 300; CG 1985, 2003
ANALYTICAL INDEX

ABSENCE

- From the Novitiate House:

- We must proceed according to the norms of universal law C 110

- For more than three months, the Novitiate is invalid R 173

- If it is for more than fifteen days, the time must be made up R 173

- From the Religious House:

- For some days can be given by the Local Superior R 80

- Up to one year, the Major Superior R 82

- For cases fixed by Canon Law, for no more than a year R 82

- When somebody goes out of the House, a notice should be left R 80

- From Local Chapter:

- The illegitimately absent cannot be elected as a Delegate R 376.3°

See: Absents

ABSENTS

- Definition:

- Legitimately absent R 238.1° a)

- Illegitimately absent R 238.1° b)

- Are deprived of active and passive voice:

- Those who are absent to solve their doubts about their vocation R 239.1° c)

- Those who are illegitimately absent R 239.1° d)

- They enjoy the merely spiritual privileges R 239.1°

- Those who are legitimately absent for other reasons retain their rights R 239.2°

- When somebody goes out of the House, a notice should be left R 80

See: Absence

ABSOLUTE MAJORITY

- When it is required C 136; R 364, 378, 424.1°; cfr. R 27.3°-4°

- How to compute in chapter elections R 369-372

- When voting propositions R 378

- To ask the Holy See for the suspension, dispensation or interpretation of the Constitutions C 126

ABSTINENCE

See: Fasting and Abstinence. Penance

ACCUMULATION

- We avoid the accumulation of goods C 70

- The Communities will not accumulate goods R 454

ACTS OF PIETY

- In them Christ becomes present among us and our participation in community building C 32

- The custom of common prayer must be faithfully observed C 41

- The Community provides time for them C 50; more importance is given to Morning and Evening Prayer C 50, R 65

- Daily Access to the Table of the Lord and communal celebration of the Eucharist C 46, R 64; the Concelebration is encouraged the R 64

- Examination of conscience C 48, R 67; traditional prayers C 49; especially, the Rosary and the Crown of Twelve Stars R 70; Marian prayer should conclude the community prayer R 70

- Devotion to Mary R 70; to our Holy Founder C 49, R 71; and to the Saints and Blessed of the Calasanzian Family Order R 71; and the Community Patron R 71

- Annual retreats and several days of recollection throughout the year various retreats throughout the year C 50, R 73-74

- Daily meditation for at least half an hour R 62

- Frequent access to the Sacrament of Reconciliation C 47, R 66

- Revision in common of our life and our apostolate community life and apostolate R 67

- Talks or conferences about spiritual matters R 74

ADMINISTRATION

- Can be ordinary and extraordinary C 139; R 433, 441, 442, 444-445

- Acts of ordinary administration R 441 (definition)

- Acts of extraordinary administration R 441 (definition)

- Every juridical person- Community or Demarcation- are capable of purchasing, possessing and managing temporal goods C 139; R 431

- The Superiors as well as the Administrators take care of the expenses and juridical actions of the ordinary or extraordinary administration C 141; about the Administrators R 433, cfr. R 435-439

- According to the norms of law C 141, 209; R 433

- A right and careful administration is related with Poverty C 69; R 430, 434

- Communities and Religious are partners in the responsibility R 434.1°

- There should be only one economic management of the Patrimony of the Order R 448

- Principles R 434

- Denomination R 229

- Fundamentals R 430.1°

- General Framework and Statutes R 430.2°-3°

- Responsible persons R 433

- Notary powers R 440

- And the Chapters R 461

- Limitations and restrictions on domains over temporal goods C 140; R 431.3°, 452

- Tax for the funding of the Order and every Demarcation R 449, 450

- Father General has the right to impose ordinary and extraordinary taxes C 210, R 451; and also the Major Superiors R 451

- Faculty to implement economic centralization R 453, 454

- Loans or credits among the judicial persons of the Order will be encouraged R 455, 456

- Analyzing the administration of the Local Communities:

- General norms R 460-462

- The Major Superior inspects the finances twice a year R 458

1. Ordinary administration

- Acts R 441

- Each Treasurer (in Communities and Demarcations) must prepare an annual budget R 442

- Approval of the budget R 443

- An amount of money must be assigned in the budget for vocations R 156

- An amount of money can be assigned to each religious for personal expenses R 49

2. Extraordinary administration

- Acts R 441

- An annual budget will be prepared, in the same way that as for the ordinary administration R 442

- Norms to be kept in extraordinary administration (budget, business to manage, actions to undertake, etc.) R 444 when it is required: the permission of the Holy See R 444.1º, the consent of the General Congregation R 444.1°- 2, the consent of the Provincial Congregation R 444.4°, the consent of the respective Council R 445

- Norms to be given by the Fr. General and FF. Provincials in their respective Demarcations R 444.4°

- When we must abide to the norms decided by the respective Bishops Conference R 444.3°

- Norms to be kept when requesting consent and giving authorization R 446

See: Juridical Acts. Administrators. Treasurers

ADMINISTRATORS

See: Juridical Acts. Administrators. Treasurers

ADMISSION

- We must consider very carefully those who will be admitted to formation C 9, 10, 109; R 168

- Admission to the Novitiate:

- Age, qualities, required conditions, information to be obtained C 109; R 168

- Impediments for the Novitiate R 169

- Previous spiritual retreats R 171

- Written and signed declaration by the candidate R 174

- The Major Superior is responsible for the admission to the Novitiate C 110; R 276.2° d), cfr. R 170

- Admission to the simple profession:

- Conditions for the validity of the professions R 186

- Previous spiritual retreats R 187

- The Major Superior is responsible for the admission to the simple profession C 113; R 185, 186 c), 276.2° d)

- Handing over the administration, use and usufruct of his property before the profession C 113; R 184 (Deed of Will)

- Admission to the solemn profession:

- The Major Superior is responsible C 117

- Special preparation with a sufficient amount of time C 116; R 208

- Requirements for the validity of the solemn profession R 203

- Previous spiritual retreats R 208

- Aspirants to priesthood must give the testimony prescribed by the Church R 214

- Renunciation to his possessions (and, in his case, Deed of Will) R 209

- The Major Superior is responsible for the admission to the solemn profession, after receiving the required reports C 117; R 203 con 186 c), 276.2° d)

- Admission to the renewal of vows R 201

- Admission to the Holy Orders C 118; R 213, 214

- Previous written petition:

- Before the simple petition R 183

- Before the renewal of the vows and the solemn profession R 200

- In the Inter-Demarcational houses for the renewal of vows according to their own Statute R 201

- Before the novitiate cfr. R 174

See: Novitiate. Profession. Professed

ADVENT

See: Celebrations

AGE

- For novitiate C 109; R 169.1° a)

- For simple profession R 186 a)

- For solemn profession R 203 a)

See: Novices. Profession

ALIEANATION

- Is an act of extraordinary economic administration R 441

- A written report of a specialist must go together with the petition R 446.4°, cfr. R 468

- The Chapters may, following the law, limit the capability to alienate C 140; R 431, 452

See: Administration. Revision. Treasurer

ALTERNATES

1. Alternate Secretary in the Chapters

- election and mission R 362

- a relative majority of votes is enough R 362

2. Alternate to the Provincial and Vice-Provincial Chapters

- election R 365, 384

- They replace the Chapter members only by election R 386.1°

- In the Chapters, an election by canonical ballot is required R 364

- A relative majority of votes is enough R 365.1°

- The list of Alternates must be published within sufficient time R 387

- In a Dependent Vice Province an Alternate for the Provincial Chapter is elected R 400.2° b)

3. Alternate to the General Chapter

- In Provinces and Independent Vice- provinces one Alternate is elected during the Chapter R 391.2° b), 364.2°, cfr. 399 (Independent Vice-Province)

- In Dependent Vice-Provinces R 400

- He replaces the Vice-provincial as well as the Delegate R 401

See: Election. Vocals

APOSTOLATE

- We endure our apostolic Works with love and with a spirit of sacrifice and penance C 20

- It is a sign of consecration, love, solidarity and of the good things of the age to come C 21

- Shows our consecration C 21

- Makes our Community stronger C 32

- Apostolic activity must be programmed and revised C 32, 168, 186, 216; R 124, 141.

- It is dedicated to the praise of God C 40, and to the salvation of everyone C 52

- We use temporary goods in order to carry out our apostolate C 139

- We don’t intend to receive any profit C 91

- It is a participation in the mission of evangelization C 90; R 100

- Catechesis is the fundamental means of our apostolate C 96, 99; R 118-124

- The school and any educative activity are means of our apostolate C 99; R 125, 133, 144-151

- We consider most important for education to be enlightened by faith R 104

- We must accommodate ourselves to the laws, customs and cultures of different peoples C 101

- It is the reason of being of our vocation R 100, 133.

- Our apostolate has to be known by the candidates before the novitiate C 108; R 164

- To follow the example of our Founder, we need training C 121, and continuous renewal R 218; it is the object of ongoing formation C 121

- It is carried out in the Community and requires norms and operating bodies C 122, 214; R 150, 268, 269.2°

- Must be fostered by the Superiors C 129 162 b), 177, 214

- Conformed to Christian love and observance C 162 b)

- The communitarian character of our activities is evident in meetings, Councils and Chapters C 134

- It is the most fruitful harvest we have been called to work in C 6, 39

See: Institute. Education

APPEAL

- In case of obedience, there is the right to appeal C 155

APPOINTMENTS

- A suitable consultation is to precede C 130 (for Superiors); R 259 (for major and minor Officials); R 251 (for

- Rector and President); R 256 (for Vice-rector); R 257 (for Consultors)

- Need confirmation for those who are elected C 130

- Appointments are made for a fixed period of time C 131

- Some appointments must be done by a secret vote and scrutiny R 424.1º and need the “nihil obstat” of the General Congregation R 424.2º:

- Rector C 161; R 250.1º-2º, 251

- President R 250 .4º, 251

- Vice-rector C 163; R 256

- Consultors of the Rector R 257, cfr C 163

- Officials of the Community C 163; R 259

- Officials of the Work C 163; R 259, cfr. R 254

- Provincial, outside Chapter time R 274, 424.1º d)

- Provincial Vicar (permanent) R 278

- Vicariate Superior C 199; R 293

- Provincial Assistant, outside Chapter time R 279.2º, cfr. R 424.1º c)

- Provincial Officials R 282, 464, 470; C 184 (Provincial Secretary), C 182 (Provincial Treasurer), C 194 (Vice-provincial Treasurer)

- Vice-provincial and Assistants (in dependent Vice-province) R 289

- Vice-provincial and Assistants (in independent Vice-province) R 399 con R 274, 279.2º and 424.1º d) c), cfr. C 191

- Consultors of the Vicariate Superior R 297

- General Vicar R 306, cfr. C 208

- General Vicar (successor) C 208

- Vicar of Fr. General R 307

- General Delegate and Assistants R 345

- General Assistant outside Chapter time C 206; R 311

- General Procurator C 207; R 317

- General Treasurer C 209; R 321

- General Secretary C 211; R 322

- General Postulator R 323

- Other General Officials R 324, 464, 470

- Members of the Secretariats R 269, 329

- Masters of Novices and Juniors C 161; R 159

- Treasurers C 166 (Local), C 182 (Provincial), C 194 (Vice-provincial), C 209 (General)

See: Resignation

ARCHIVES

- Are part of our cultural Patrimony R 463

- General, Demarcational and Local Archivist must be designated R 464

- When a House or Work is suppressed or abandoned, the Major Superior will decide where the Archive must be transferred R 467

- Procedure to follow when it seems opportune to sell something R 468

- The letters and manuscripts of the deceased must be kept in an Archive R 93

- In the Archives we will keep:

- The declaration made by the novice before the novitiate R 174 (by analogy)

- The declaration made by the novice about his vocation and his honest intention R 183

- The documents of the profession R 190, 211

- The testimony prescribed by Church Law before receiving the Holy Orders R 214 (by analogy)

- And, also the documents handing over his goods or his Deed of Will R 184, 209

- Archivists must take care of the Archives R 464

- Each institution should have its own Archive R 465

See: Archivist, Objects with artistic or historical value

ARCHIVIST

1. General

- Is appointed by the Fr. General R 324, 464

2. Demarcational Archivist

- Each Demarcation must appoint an Archivist R 464

- Is designated by the Major Superior R 464

3.Local Archivist

- Each Community must have an Archivist R 464

- Is designated by the Major Superior R 464

See: Cultural Patrimony. Archives. Library. Librarian

ASPIRANCY

- Definition R 163

- Some communities must be prepared to receive young people R 164

- They must exist in the Vice-Provinces C 193

- Studies to be completed during the Aspirancy before the Novitiate R 165

- The last year, or a good part of it, can be designated as a Pre-novitiate formation R 167

- The director must be an experienced religious, priest R 163

See: Formation Houses, Pre-Novitiate

ASSIGNATION

- Each religious must be assigned to a House C 150; R 227

- About novices R 227

- Assignment is done by formal order or through “letter of obedience” R 229

- It enters into force from the date of “obedience” R 229

- Nature of a “guest” religious R 231

- Nature of an “Associate” R 233

ASSISTANT (to the Master of Novices)

- Passive voice for this position R 353.3°

ASSISTANTS

1. In general

- They are part of the Demarcational Council R 17.12°; 17.13°

- Their vote can be consultative, deliberative and collegial R 27.1°

- They cannot refuse to sign the decision of the majority R 28.2°

- They must keep the matter secret according to its seriousness R 28.2°

2. Assistants to the Fr. General Delegate

- Number R 344

- Passive voice for this position R 353.4° (by analogy)

- Appointment R 345

- They form the Council, and together with the Fr. Delegate, the constitute the Congregation R 17.13°, 344

- Rectors should preferably not be appointed R 20

- Their resignation must be presented in writing to the Fr. General R 426

3. Vice-provincial Assistants

- they must be appointed according to the norms of our law C 191

- Appointment:

- In an independent Vice-Province R 339

- In a dependent Vice-province: during chapter time R 289, 404-409; outside of chapter time R 289

- For their appointment outside the chapter time, Fr. General’s “nihil obstat” is required R 289 con 404

- A canonical election is required R 364.4° (in an independent Vice-province and in the case also of dependent one)

- Number: They must be two R 290, 400.2 a); they may be four with the permission of the Fr. General R 290, 340

- Passive voice for this position R 353.4°

- Their names must be proposed to the Provincial Congregation by the Vice-provincial Chapter, in a dependent Vice-Province R 400.2° a)

- They form the Council and together with the Fr. Vice-provincial they constitute the Vice-Provincial Congregation R 17.13°, 290, 340; a minimum one of them must be a priest R 290, 340

- They are members of the Vice-Provincial Chapter C 196; R 402.1; cfr. R 392.1° a)

- Better they not be Rectors R 20

- They help the Vice-provincial with their advice and their vote C 191

- Their resignation must be presented in writing to the Fr. General R 426 (independent Vice-province) or the Fr. Provincial R 427 (dependent Vice-Province)

4. Provincial Assistants

- Number:

- They must be four in formed Provinces R 279.1°

- Two, in non-formed Provinces; they may be four with the permission of the Fr. General R 279

- Appointment:

- During chapter time, they are elected by the Provincial Chapter for four years C 181; R 279.2°, 395

- Each one will be designated to the related offices R 395

- An exploratory scrutiny should be held R 367; refusal to passive voice 367.2°

- The elected Fr. Provincial may propose some names R 396

- They will be confirmed during the Chapter R 395

- When a qualified majority is required R 397

- Outside of chapter time they are appointed by the Provincial Congregation R 279.2°

- Passive voice for this position R 353.4°; at least one of them must be a priest R 279.2°

- As far as possible they will be free from other duties so that they can devote their full activity to perform their office R 279.3°

- A canonical election is required R 364.3°

- They are members of the Council and together with the Fr. Provincial, they constitute the Provincial Congregation C 181; R 17.13°, 273

- Responsibility for governing C 181; R 279.1°; one of them may be appointed by the Provincial Treasurer C 182

- They are member of the Provincial Chapter C 188 a); R 392.1° a)

- Better they not be Rectors R 20

- Their resignation must be presented in writing to the Fr. Provincial R 427

5. General Assistants

- Appointment:

- During the chapter time, they are elected by the General Chapter for six years, for each Circumscriptions C 206; R 310

- Outside of Chapter time, they are appointed from a consultative list C 206; R 311

- A canonical election is required R 364.6°; each one must be elected in a different session R 421

- They must be four R 310; they form the Council, and together with the Fr. General, they constitute the General Congregation R 17.12°

- Passive voice for this position R 353.5°

- Mission:

- They have consultative, deliberative and collegiate vote C 206; R 27.1°, 316

- When deciding about the expulsion of a professed religious, the decision should be made in a strictly collegial way R 316, cfr. CIC 699

- They assist the Supreme Moderator with their work and advice C 206

- They visit their own Circumscriptions and the whole Order C 206; R 310

- They cannot refuse to sign the decision of the majority R 28.2

- They must keep the matter secret R 28.2°

- One of them may be appointed General Vicar C 208 (Vicar Successor), R 306 (permanent Vicar)

- One of them may be appointed Secretary of the Order C 211

- An Assistant may preside the Economic Secretariat for the whole Order R 438.2°

- When they can attend to Local Chapters and Community meetings R 352

- They are members of the General Chapter C 217; R 416.1°

- Loss of passive voice for the position of Provincial R 355

- Resignation R 426

See: Voting. Vote (consultative, deliberative)

ASSOCIATED

- Who are they R 233

- The Major Superior admits them R 233

- A temporary contract, valid even in the civil forum, must be signed R 233

- Their assignment to the Community with voice in the meetings R 233

- Voice in the Local and in the Demarcational Chapters R 350.2°-3°

ATTIRE

See: Habit. Poverty

AUTHORITY

- Purposes C 129, 84

- It is a ministry or service oriented to the good of the religious C 84; R 14

- It must be exercised according to the spirit of the Gospel C 129, 204; cfr. C 84; R 54

- Those who exercise it must be priests C 129, 130; R 15, 18

- In our Order Authority means ecclesial power of jurisdiction for both the internal and external forum R 15, 18; C 130

- The Superior General has ordinary jurisdiction in the whole Order, Demarcations, Houses and religious C 202, 204; R 301

- The General Chapter is the supreme internal authority C 216; R, 16; the legislative power R 16; can dictate internal law R 16, 5; the other bodies. as well as the Superiors, within the limits of their jurisdiction can give norms R 16

- The Chapters and Superior can delegate their authority R 26; the General Chapter, even the legislative power C 128

- It is extended in case of resignation or at the end of the time in office R 22

See: Superiors

AUTHORIZATION

See: Permission

BAPTISM

- We are called through Baptism to perfect charity C 16

- We encourage each other to live the demands of our Baptism C 26

- We must inform the priest of the church where we were Baptized of having received the sacred Orders R 212

BISHOPS

- Bishops are interpreters of the will of Christ C 79

- The diocesan bishop grants the permission to establish a new House or Work R 244

- Must be consulted before the suppression of a House and informed before abandoning it R 246

- The Ordinary must be consulted before a secular cleric be admitted to the Novitiate R 169.2 b)

- Regarding the exclaustrated R 238 c)

- Regarding those who are admitted in a dioceses on an “experimental” basis R 238 d)

- To extend a Work his permission is required R 248

- Appoints as pastor in our parish the religious that has been presented to him as candidate R 259

BOARDING HOMES

- Service for society and the family R 145

- Should adjust to the needs of a modern and sound pedagogy R 145

- We must look for greater efficiency than numbers R 145

BOOK OF PRAYERS LIBRO DE PRECES

- Helps to schedule our daily prayers C 50

BOOK OF THE SECRETARY OF THE LOCAL COMMUNITY

- Must record:

- The decisions taken in the Community meetings R 261

- Anything that has an official character R 261

- Record of the official documents received and issued R 261

- The consent given for economic matters R 446.2°

- There is no obstacle to unify Chronicles with Secretary Book in the “Book of the Community” R 262

BOOKS OF ADMINISTRATION

See: Administration

BUDGET

- Ordinary R 442

- Extraordinary R 442

- Norms to prepare the extraordinary budget R 444-446

- Must be prepared every year R 442

- Permissions required R 445.1º h), i), j), 445.2º d), 445.3º d)

- All Demarcations must budget an amount for Vocational Pastoral R 156

- An amount of money for personal expenses may be established R 49

- Requirements for its validity R 446

- Approval R 443

See: Administration. Revision. Treasurer

CALASANZ

- He totally dedicated himself to the Christian education under the inspiration of the Holy Spirit C 1

- He founded the Order, moved by the Holy Spirit C 90

- He was an inspired interpreter of the signs of his time C 2

- He founded the clerical Institute C 2; and created a new school C 2

- To give stability to his mission, he proposed to his companions the practice of the evangelical counsels and the fourth vow C 3

- He had a clear vision of the nature and goals of his Institute C 3, 4-10 (Preamble of the Constitutions)

- Following his example, we care for the integral formation of children C 12

- His charism defines the way we follow Christ C 17

- We practice and promote the devotion to Calasanz C 49; R 71

- He wanted us to be Poor of the Mother of God C 64, cfr. C 7, 2

- He learned through poverty all the virtues C 64

- Following his example, we acknowledge the Roman Pontiff and the Bishops C 79

- He is our model in the practice of the catechesis C 96

- Example of ongoing formation C 121

- Fidelity to his charism C 218

- We follow the lifestyle he made his own R 38; we practice his virtues and the virtues he recommended R 39, 43, cfr. R 117

- Following his example, we consider the witness of our life as the main means of evangelization R 116

- Faithful to the spirit of Calasanz, we will direct our efforts towards the continual reform of the society through the work in our schools C 5, 74; R 133

- The novices should study the life of our Founder and the History of the Order R 177

- The motto of our Order was formulated by Calasanz in different ways R 3

- We must follow his lifestyle and imitate his virtues R 38, 39, 116, 117, cfr. R 177

See: Education. Institute. Calasanzian School

CANDIDACY(ES)

- Sometimes a relative majority is enough R 365

- For the position of Provincial C 175; R 380.2° d), 388

- For the position of Vice-Provincial in an independent Vice-Province R 380.2° e), 388

- For the position of Vice-Provincial in a dependent Vice-Province R 380.2° f), 388

- For the position of General Delegate in a General Delegation R 380.2° g)

- Steps in the candidacies of Provincials and Vice-Provincials and for General Delegate R 388.1°-4°; cfr. R 385

- They must be sent by the General Congregation to the Provincial Chapter R 393

- The must be prepared by the Provincial Congregation for the appointment of Vice-Provincial R 407, 408

CANDIDATES

- We have to consider very carefully those who will be admitted C 9, 109; R 168

- Periods or stages of formation C 105; R 153

- All will live with us for a sufficient period before the Novitiate (Pre-novitiate) C 108; R 166, 167

- They should live in an authentic brotherhood with their formators C 106

- Some Communities must be prepared to receive young men who could have our vocation R 164

- They are admitted by the Major Superior C 110, 113, 117 (cfr. Admission)

- Choice of clerical or lay state C 118, 143

- Declaration to be signed at the beginning of the Novitiate R 174

- Cession of possessions to be done before the simple vows C 113; R 184

- Before the solemn profession, they will express their willingness to live with us for the rest of their life C 116, renunciation to their possessions R 209, and testimony prescribed by Church law R 214, CIC 1036

See: Aspirancy. Pre-novitiate Novice. Juniors

CANTINE SERVICE

See: Boarding Homes

CATALOGUE

- The Provincial Catalogue should be Published every four years R 276.5° f)

- There should be one in each House with the goods that are deemed valuable; and a general catalogue in the Curia of the Demarcation R 469

CATECHESIS

- Is the fundamental means in the evangelization and in the education of faith C 96; R 118

- Fruits of catechesis C 96

- Goals to achieve in the catechesis of our students R 119

- Catechesis must be carried out in liturgical celebrations R121

- Initiation of our students in the practice of prayer R 121

- Also with the Calasanzian exercise of the «continuous prayer» R 121

- We must organize groups and movements of youth R 122; they are sources of vocations R 122

- Catechetical formation of the parents of our students R 123; cfr. R 120

- We must perform and revise the planning of the catechesis R 124

- Community manifestations of our faith R 130

- Catechesis of children, youth and adults in our parishes R 148

See: Education. Institute. Calasanzian School

CELEBRATIONS

- We will celebrate with special care the liturgical feasts in our churches where there is a great number of faithful R 69

- We will celebrate in a special way, in our churches, the Paschal Tridum R 69

- Penitential celebrations during Advent and Lent R 66

- They are a complement to the catechesis R 121

See: Acts of piety. Catechesis

CENSORS

- Local, who are two, may be appointed by the Community if it is convenient R 460.2°

See: Administration. Revision. Treasurers

CESSATION

See: Superiors (in general). Officials. Authority. Removal. Transfer.

CESSION (of goods)

- Cession of administration, use and usufruct of goods before the first profession C 113; R 184

- If it is necessary, the novice will make also a will R 184

- To change these norms the permission of the Major Superior is required R 184

CHANGES

- Procedure to introduce changes in the Constitutions C 126; R 35

- To do the same in the Rules R 36

See: Law

CHAPEL OF THE COMMUNITY

- Each Community must have a chapel C 50; R 77

- Dignified and easily accessible C 50; R 77

- The Blessed Sacrament is reserved in it C 50; R 77

- Common and personal prayers can be done there R 77

CHAPTERS

1. In General

- Their preparation and celebration requires the cooperation of all C 134

- Different kinds of Chapters C 135; R 356

- Convocation C 135; R 357, 399

- Consultation in order to determine the days for the celebration of the Provincial Chapter R 358

- Order in the celebration of the Chapters R 359

- The Chapter Directory must be faithfully observed R 379

- Who must preside each Chapter R 360

- Parts composing every Chapter R 361

- Election and mission of the Secretary and his Assistant R 362; a relative majority is enough R 362

- Commissions R 363

- Renunciation to active and passive voice R 376

- The faculty to vote by proxy is excluded R 377

- Occasions when canonical ballot is required R 364

- Relative majority R 362, 365, 368

- Absolute majority R 369 ss.

- Number of scrutinizes R 370-372

- Qualified majority C 136; R 371, 397, 420, 423; how to determine it R 374

- The Community will maintain unity with the other Houses through the Chapters C 169

- They may delegate some faculties R 26; and the General Chapter, even its legislative power C 128

2.Local Chapter

- Administrative Chapter and elective Chapter R 383

- What to do when some Communities cannot celebrate an elective Chapter R 383, 384, 385

- During the three months preceding the Demarcational Chapter, it is forbidden to change the juridical status of the Houses or the persons R 381

- Parts that compose it, order and matters to be discussed C 168; R 361, 380.

- Convocation C 135, 180; R 357, 399; the same as in the General Houses C 213

- Members of the Chapter C 168; R 351.1°, 350.2° (with voice without vote), 383 (filial Community) (373 (elector sick in the House)

- Secretary and Assistant R 362

- Propositions for the Demarcation Chapter R 382; voting of the propositions R 378

- Relative majority votes R 362, 365, 368

- Absolute majority R 369-372, 378

- Qualified majority R 374 (cfr. R 371, 397, 420, 423)

- Election of delegates and Alternates for the Demarcational Chapter according to the system of a single list R 384

3. Vicariate Chapter

- Convocation C 135, 180; R 357

- Celebration of the Vicariate Chapter C 200; R 410, 411

- Election of the Delegate for the Demarcational Chapter R 412

- Commissions R 363

4. Chapter of the General Delegation

- Convocation C 213, cfr. C 135; R 357

- According to the Statutes R 345

5. Vice-Provincial Chapter ( a dependent Vice-Province)

- Convocation C 135, 180; R 357

- Celebration C 195

- Members C 196; R 402; participation with voice without vote R 350.3°

- Number of Delegates C 188

- Election of Delegates cfr. Local Chapter

- Secretary and Assistant R 362

- Parts in a Chapter and goals C 195; R 361, 400

- Election of Delegates and Alternate for the Provincial Chapter R 400.2 b)

- Election of Delegates and Alternate for the General Chapter R 400.2° c)

- Who does the Alternate replace R 401

- Voting:

- Relative majority R 362, 365, 368

- Absolute majority R 369-372, 378

- Qualified majority R 371, 374, 397, 420, 423

- Delegate sick in the House R 373

- Voting of propositions R 378

- Faculty to change the constitution of the next Chapter R 403

- Commissions R 363

- Designation of Vice-Provincial and Assistants when they are elected R 408, cfr. R 405, 406

- Exploratory scrutiny R 367.1°

- Renunciation to the passive voice R 367.2°, 407.2°-3°

6. Vice-Provincial Chapter (in an independent Vice-province)

- This Chapter is comparable in everything to the Provincial Chapter R 399; cfr. R 390-398, with due reserve

7. Provincial Chapter

- In it appears a sense of responsibility C 185

- Time for its celebration C 186; R 358, 359, 390

- During the three months preceding the Provincial Chapter, it is forbidden to change the judicial status of the Houses or the persons R 381

- Convocation C 135; R 357

- The Fr. Provincial convokes it authorized by the Fr. General C 180

- Parts of a Chapter and goals C 186; R 361, 391

- Members of the Chapter C 188, R 392.1°; who has passive voice R 392.3°; participation with voice without vote R 350.3°

- Number of Delegates C 188

- Election of Delegates cfr. Local Chapter

- The faculty to vote by proxy is excluded R 377

- Secretary and Assistant R 362

- Commissions R 363

- A detailed account of the administration must be given to the Chapter C 183

- Candidacies for the position of Provincial R 393

- Exploratory scrutiny R 367.1°

- Renunciation to the passive voice R 367.2°, 393.2°-3°

- Voting:

- Relative majority R 362, 365, 368

- Absolute majority R 369-372, 378

- Qualified majority R 371, 374, 397, 420, 423

- Voting of propositions and documents R 378, that may become Chapter Decrees C 187, cfr. R 7.6°

- Election of the Provincial Superior C 186 b); R 393, 394

- Of the Provincial Assistants C 186 b); R 395; the elected Provincial can propose some names for this R 396

- When a qualified majority is required R 397

- Election of Delegates and Alternate for the General Chapter R 398, 417

- Faculty to limit the right of possessing and administering C 140; R 431

- Faculty to change the composition of the next Chapter R 392.2°

- Faculty to change the system of the designation of the Vice-Provincial and his Assistants R 409

8. General Chapter

- Attitudes of the religious in its celebration C 218

- In it the General Community expresses itself in the most relevant way R 413

- It is the only one to have legislative power C 126, 124, 127; R 16, 413

- It is the supreme authority in the Order C 216; R 16, 413

- It is celebrated every six years on the dates decided by the Fr. General C 216; R 413; and it must be prepared carefully R 413

- The norms established in the Constitutions, the Rules and the Directory must be observed R 414

- Convocation C 135; R 357

- Parts in a Chapter and goals C 216; R 361, 415

- A detailed account of the administration must be given to the Chapter C 209

- Members of the Chapter C 217 R 416

- Number of Delegates C 217

- What to do if more Delegates must be elected to complete the number R 417

- Expert persons can attend some sessions R 418

- Voting:

- Relative majority R 362, 365, 368

- Absolute majority R 369-372, 378

- Qualified majority R 371, 374, 397, 420, 423

- The faculty to vote by proxy is excluded R 377

- Exploratory scrutiny R 367.1°

- Renunciation to the passive voice R 367.2°

- Election of the F. General, who may not be a member of the Chapter C 202, 203, 216; R 420

- The elected Superior General may propose some names for the position of General Assistant R 422.4°

- Election of the General Assistant, who may not be a member of the Chapter C 216 b), R 421; in a different session for each one of them R 421; and they must be appointed for a specific Circumscription each of them R 310

- Voting of propositions and documents R 378

- The Chapter has the faculty of limiting the rights of possessing and administrating C 140; R 431

- Promulgation of the decrees R 419

CHARISM

- The founding charism is intimately connected to the school C 2; R 125

- According to the founding charism, we spend our whole life at the service of our brothers, and care for integral formation of children C 12

- The charism of our Founder defines the way we follow Christ C 17

- It consists in evangelizing children and youth, especially the abandoned C 17

- New ways of poverty in accordance with our charism and our times C 75

- The Local Community expresses the nature of the religious vocation through its proper charism and appropriate means C 157

- The Order constitutes one single body in which the charism is better maintained, promoted, developed and adapted C 201

- The Fr. General must safeguard and foster everywhere fidelity to the Calasanzian charism R 302 b)

- In the General Chapter, we must manifest a complete fidelity to the Gospel and to the charism of our Founder C 218

See: Calasanz. Education. Educator. Institute. Calasanzian School

CHARITABLE

- Our institute is a charitable institution without intending to receive any profit C 91

CHASTITY

- We live faithfully in chastity C 16

- Entails the obligation of a perfect continence in celibacy C 55, R 41

- Forbids or invalidates marriage R 41

- It is a gift to follow Christ, imitate Mary, and love all people C 53

- Professing it our life becomes more like Christ’s life, we receive a new fatherhood, we become witnesses of the Kingdom C 54, 55

- The vow produces abundant fruits C 55, 54, 56, 61

- It is a gift that can be discovered, acquired and kept with daily determination C 57

- Supernatural means C 57, 58; human means C 58, 59, 60; R 42, 43, 44, 45

- What does Chastity demand from us C 61

- Critical sense regarding shows and mass media R 45

- We avoid all that is harmful or dangerous for chastity R 45

- We adapt our behavior to the norms of life R 45

- With our behavior in words and deeds we belie the doctrines that offend chastity R 45

- Living only for God, we participate already in the Resurrection while we wait for the coming of Christ C 62

See: Religious vows

CHILDREN (and youth)

- They are the object of our ministry C 1; R 2

- Through education we want to free them from the bondage of sin and ignorance C 2

- They are the object of our fourth vow: «to take special care of the education of children» C 3, 119

- We shall enrich them with every virtue C 7

- The mission of our Institute is to teach children basic knowledge C 8

- We care for the integral formation of children C 12

- We foster in them the devotion to our Holy Founder C 49

- We evangelize them through integral education C 90

- The integral education of children and youth, especially the poor, is the main goal of our Institute C 1, 2, 90; R 2

- We should take special care of the poor and needy R 102

- In their education we must instill in them the greatest respect for all values and for the dignity of the human person R 113

- We will initiate children and youth in the spirit and practice of prayer R 121

- We must organize groups and movements of children and youth according to their faith development R 122, cfr. R 146

- Professional and vocational orientation help the youth to know themselves R 136

- In our parishes, we will create children and youth centers R 148

See: Education. Educator. Institute. Ministry. School. Catechesis

CHRIST THE LORD

- (Paul V) Vicar of Christ C 4

- Quotations from Christ C 7, 19, 103

- Inspired by his love, we spend our life in the service of our brothers C 12

- Becoming obedient, He made himself the Way, the Truth and the Life C 14

- He formed a group of followers C 15

- He sent the promised Spirit C 15

- We leave everything for Christ C 16

- Our charism defines our way of following Christ C 17

- As his disciples, we wish to know nothing but Christ C 18

- When we endure everything, we complete what is lacking in Christ’s passion C 20

- Our life is hidden in Christ C 21

- By our way of life, we cooperate in the building of the Body of Christ C 22

- So that we may follow Christ, we renew our vows C 24

- The Virgin Mary lights the way to follow Christ C 23

- In the community, we imitate the way of life of Christ with his disciples C 25

- In the Eucharist, we actualize the death and resurrection of Christ C 27

- In community acts Christ becomes present C 32

- The Spirit of Christ is always present in us C 30

- By our community way of life, we will attract others to the harvest of the Lord C 39

- Taught us the need of praying C 40

- We endeavor to know and to imitate Jesus crucified C 41

- We shall draw an intimate knowledge of Christ from assiduous familiarity with Sacred Scripture C 42

- When we accept everything with faith we join the actions of Christ C 48

- We imitate Mary in her participation in the mystery of Christ C 49

- By following Christ with un undivided love, we embrace all people C 53

- Through our profession our life of love becomes more like Christ’s love C 54

- Through consecrated Chastity we receive, in Christ, a wider fatherhood C54

- Chastity is a new motive to share our life with our brothers in Christ’s life C 56

- Chastity demands from us constant concern to know Christ C 61

- Through our service, we participate in the resurrection of Christ and we wait for his coming C 62

- We willingly share his poverty C 63

- The Lord Jesus chose for himself Mary his Mother from among the poor C 64

- We oblige ourselves to live the Mystery of Christ who was poor C 65

- We continue the obedience of Christ in our obedience C 76

- The Roman Pontiff and the Bishops are interpreters of the will of Christ C 79

- Our Order is a gift for the edification of the Body of Christ C 90

- We trust the Lord who never ceases to call C 103

CHURCH

- Accepted the Order (Institute) C 2

- Calasanz wanted to give stability to its mission within the Church C 3

- Religious Institutes pursue as their ultimate goal perfection within the Church C 4

- The Pious Schools feels sent by the Church C 11

- We follow the laws of the Church C 13

- For the sake of the Church we complete in our flesh which is lacking in Christ’s passion C 20

- We offer an image of Christ, present in the Church C 22

- The Community imitates the way of life of the early Church C 25

- Living deeply our true communion with the Church C 37

- We dedicate our life in the Church to the praise of God C 40

- We celebrate the mystery of Christ, in the Church C 49; cfr. R 69

- We commend to the Father the needs of the Church C 51

- Chastity is a gift from our Father to us in the Church C 53

- Regarding our attire, we follow the norms of the local Church C 67

- We contribute with our goods to the needs of the Church C 73

- The Piarist way of life, approved by the Church C 76

- We practice obedience for the service of the Church C 79

- We participate in the mission of evangelization of the Church C 90

- We cooperate with others Institutes of the Church and Society C 98

- We address the needs of the local Church C 100

- We grow daily in love to the Church C 107

- The Order has norms and organs like the Church C 122

- The structural elements have their origin from the very life of the Church C 123

- The universal law comes directly from the Church C 124

- Our law comes from the Church, or from the General Chapter, with the approval of the Church C 124

- We cannot change laws coming from the Church C 125

- Major Superiors may accept the choice for Priesthood, considering the good of the Church C 143

- By simple profession the juniors assume the rights and obligations defined by the laws of the Church C 146

- The Local Community is of service to the Church C 157

- The Vice-provincial collaborates with local churches C 192

- The Superior General encourages unity with the universal Church C 204

- Effort to discern the will of the Father regarding the service to the Church C 218

- We must acquire the Calasanzian virtue of fidelity to the Church R 39

CHURCHES (not parishes)

- How to practice our ministry in them R 146

CIRCUMSCRIPTION

See: Assistants (General)

CLERICAL

- Our Order is clerical and of pontifical right C 2

- Calasanz founded a clerical Institute C 2

- Order of the Poor Clerics Regular of the Mother of God of the Pious Schools C 2; R 1

CLERICS

- Cleric are those who have already received the order of Deaconate or Priesthood C 143

CLOSE

See: Suppression

COEDUCATION

- Our schools are open to children and youth without any discrimination of sexes R 142

- We especially provide an adequate and harmonious education R 142

COMMENTARY (official)

- Promulgation of the prescriptions of the General Chapter in the Official Commentary of the Order R 419, cfr. C 126

COMMISSIONS

See: Chapters

COMMON FUND

- Any good will be given to the common fund C 69; R 46

- The Common Fund of the Order is supported by the taxes imposed to the Demarcations R 449

- A Common Fund must be created in every Demarcation, unless a central economy has already been established R 450

See: Temporal Goods. Administration

COMMUNICATION (of goods)

- Goals of the Common Fund of the Order R 448, 449

- Economic centralization R 450-454

- Loans among the juridical persons of the Order will be encouraged R 455, 456

- With regards to the Houses and Provinces in need, the needs of the Church, the poor, the guests C 73, 65, cfr. C 72; R 46; with regards to the families of the religious R 50

See: Loans. Administration

COMMUNICATION (Team of)

- Order R 325

- Province R 283

COMMUNITY LIFE

- When somebody goes out of the house he must leave a notice of it R 80

- We will always care for the good name of our Communities and our brothers R 85

- We foster meetings among the communities R 86

See: Community. Virtues

CONCELEBRATION

See: Eucharist

CONFESSSION

See: Penance

CONFIRMATION (of the Superiors)

- Elected Superiors need confirmation C 130

- After the election, the President of the Chapter makes the proclamation through a decree R 368, 369

- Regarding the Provincials R 394

- Regarding the Provincial Assistants R 395

- Regarding the Vice-Provincials and Vice-Provincial Assistants R 408.6°

- A consultation precedes the appointment of the Superiors C 130

CONGREGATION

- Several kinds of Congregations R 17.12°, 17.13°

- Definition of each one of them R 17.12°, 17.13°

1. Vicariate Congregation

- definition C 199; R 17.13°

- Is formed by the Vicariate Provincial and two Consultors R 17.13°, 297

- Meetings to be held R 297

- Voting in the meetings R 27-29; especially R 27, 33

See: Provincial Congregation

2. Congregation of a Delegation

- Definition R 17.13°, cfr. R 344

- Is formed by a General Delegate and two Assistants R 17.13°, 344

- Meetings to be held R 344

- Voting in the meetings of the Congregation R 27-29; especially R 27, 33

See: Provincial Congregation

3. Vice-Provincial Congregation

- Definition and constitution R 17.13°, cfr. C 191

- Is formed by a Vice-Provincial and two Assistants, (or four in some cases) that help the Vice-Provincial C 191; R 290, 340

- Meetings to be held R 290, 340

- Voting in the meetings of the Congregation R 27-29; especially R 27, 33

See: Provincial Congregation

4. Provincial Congregation

- Definition R 17.13°

- Is constituted in the Provincial Chapter C 186 b); R 391.2° a)

- It is formed by a Provincial and four Assistants (two or four in non-formed Provinces) C 181; R 279

- Meetings to be held by the Provincial Congregation R 280

- Voting in the meetings R 27-29; especially R 27, 33

- What to do when someone is absent in the Provincial Congregation R 31, 32

- It is the government body R 268

- Cases in which the attendance of the full Congregation is required R 281

- When the Provincial Treasurer must report C 182; he presents a detailed account of his administration to the Congregation C 183

- Its vote is required:

- In case of incardination-excardination C 152

- In changes or modifications that affect the Province C 171

- To establish or to suppress Houses or Works R 244, 245, 246

- To establish Provincial Vicariates C 198

- To appoint the General Assistant outside Chapter time C 206; R 311

- To establish Vice-Provinces C 190

- Approves the programs of the Communities R 62

- Prepares the Declaration of ideals R 129

- Approves the Educational Project R 129

- Draws up the Directory of the Works R 143

- Establishes formation Houses and other structures for formation R 155 a)

- Composes the Directory for vocations R 155 c)

- Appoints the Masters of Novices and of Juniors R 159, 424.1° b)

- At the beginning of its quadrennial term must plan the Permanent Formation R 220

- Its consent is required to admit candidates to the Novitiate C 110 and to the profession C 113; R 185

- Prepares the Project to create and the reasons to suppress a House R 245, 246

- Appoints Rectors and Presidents R 250, 424.1° b)

- Appoints or presents candidates for the election of Vice-Provincial in a dependent Vice-Province and also his Assistants R 289, 407, 408, 424.1° a)

- Appoints the Provincial Vicars R 293; cfr. C 199

- Its voting is required for the appointment of the Major Officials R 259

- Belongs to the Council of the Province R 271; that if necessary, has the right to constitute this Council R 289.1°

- Together with the General Congregation prepares the program of the General Visitation R 303

- Is consulted to choose the dates for the celebration of the Provincial Chapter R 358

- Will scrutinize the ballots for the election of the Delegates and Alternates to the Provincial Chapter R 384.4°

- The same with the candidates for Provincial and Vice-Provincial in a dependent Vice-Province R 388.2°

- In extra-chapter times appoints Provincial and Vice-Provincial Assistants R 29.2°, 289; cfr. R 424.1° c)

- In extra-chapter times also appoints the Vice-provincial Superior in a dependent Vice-Province R 289, 424.1° a)

- Can accept resignations R 427, 428

- Determines in which small community the Superior can be treasurer R 439

- Approves the budgets R 443

- Its consent is required in acts of extraordinary administration R 444.4°

- May levy ordinary and extraordinary taxes R 451; And allows to impose them R 451

- May restrain the rights of the Houses in economic matters R 452

- May allow loans among juridical persons in its own Demarcation R 456.1°

- Implements more concrete norms concerning administration and revision R 457

5. General Congregation

- Definition R 17.12°

- Is constituted in the General Chapter C 216 b); R 415.2°

- Is formed by a Superior General and four General Assistants C 206; R 17.12°, 310

- It is a government body R 300

- Meetings to be held re R 313

- Secretary of the Congregation R 314

- Voting in the meetings or sessions R 27-29, especially R 33, 27.5° (the Major Superior or his Vicar have the right to vote)

- What to do if someone is absent in the General Congregation R 30, 32

- Cases in which the attendance of the full Congregation is required R 315

- In some cases the collegiate vote is required R 316; cfr. R 27.4°

- Approves the translations of the Constitutions and the Rules R 6

- May dictate different kinds of norms, such as General Decrees, Directories, Statutes, Declarations, Chapter Decrees R 7.1°, 2°, 3°, 4°, 6°

- May give declarations and interpretations about the nature of our Institute and our proper law R 7.4°

- Approves and promulgates Directories R 7.2°

- May apply to the Holy See in matters regarding the Constitutions C 126

- May resolve doubts and give practical interpretation about the Constitutions C 126

- May perform some legislative acts with a delegate power C 128

- The norms restraining the right to possess given by Provincial Chapters need its approval C 140

- Gives permission to appoint Rectors for a time shorter than four years R 17.9°; and gives the consent to remove or transfer Superiors or Officials, in case of need R 24

- Its consent is required:

- In case of incardination-excardination C 152

- To open or close Houses or Works C 159; R 244, 246

- To create Provinces or to modify them in any way C 171

- To create Demarcations C 212, 190, 198

- In the candidacies for Provincial C 175; R 274, 393, 394

- To appoint Visitors C 205

- To appoint a General Assistant outside chapter-time C 206; R 311

- In chapter time prepares the candidacies for the position of Provincial and, outside chapter time, appoints Provincials R 274, 393

- Appoints a General Delegate and his Assistants R 345

- Gives the “nihil obstat” to appoint:

- Masters of Novices and Juniors R 159

- Rectors R 250

- Provincial Assistants outside chapter time R 279.2°

- Vice-Provincial in a dependent Vice-Province in chapter time (appoint or elect) and, outside chapter time (appoint) R 289, cfr. 404-409

- Vice-Provincial Assistants in a dependent Vice-Province outside chapter time R 289, cfr. 404-409

- Provincial Vicar R 293

- Cfr. R 424.2°

- To accept resignations R 427

- Approves the Directories for vocations R 155 c)

- Together with the Provincial Congregation it prepares the program for the General Visitations R 303

- Must designate a Delegate to replace another one R 386.2°

- Determines the norms for the Council of Major Superiors R 327

- To constitute a General Economic Secretariat its opinion is heard R 438.2°

- Cases in which the General Treasurer must be called C 209

- Approves of the budgets of the Demarcations and of the whole Order R 443

- And also the budgets of the Houses or Works directly under the Superior General R 443

- Its permission is required in many acts of extraordinary administration R 444.1°-2° 445.1°

- Can limit the rights of Demarcations and Houses in economic matters R 452

See: General Assistants. Superior General. Consultative, deliberative vote

CONSCIENCE

- Examination of our conscience C 48; R 67

- Procedure in case of objection of conscience C 88; R 240

CONSECRATION

- Constitutions and Rules, image of our consecrated life C 13

- Is our way to follow Christ C 16

- Must be manifested in our apostolate C 21

- By the witness of our consecration we invite everyone to the riches of the Kingdom C 22

- Consecration produces many fruits C 93

- By the fact of consecrated life we acquire new rights and duties C 144

- The professed in solemn vows must live their consecration C 148

See: Religious Vows

CONSTITUTIONS

- They are necessary C 6

- Cornerstone of our Order R 5

- Latin is the authentic text R 6; translations to common languages need approval R 6

- They contain the essential elements and the fundamental norms R 5

- They are the image of our consecrated life C 13

- They help us walk along the path of our vocation for the glory of God and the benefit of our neighbor C 13

- In them is set down our way of life C 76

- The orders given by the Superiors must be according to the Constitutions C 76

- The profession formula must follow our Constitutions C 119

- Any interpretation or change in them belongs to the Holy See C 126; R 35

- Procedure to make any changes C 125-126

- Faculties of the General Chapter and the General Congregation regarding the Constitutions C 126

- Dispensation from disciplinary norms R 37

- Observance and obligation C 125

- Superiors will promote everything according to the Constitutions C 129

- Religious acquire rights and duties according to the Constitutions C 144

- Novices must arrange their lives according to the norms of the Constitutions C 145

- Our life will conform to the observance of the Constitutions C 162

See: Law. Rules.

CONSUETAS BIOGRAPHICAL ARTICLE

See: Suffrages

CONSULTATION

- Must be done before the appointment of Superiors C 130, 161

- Regarding the Local Superior C 161; regarding the Local Superior and the President R 251

- Regarding all the major and minor Officials R 259 (in the Local Community and in the Work)

- No one should be given any assignment without first consulting with him R 232

CONSULTORS

- Consultative or deliberative vote R 27-29; 33

1. Consultors of the Rector

- they are two son dos C 165; R 257

- They help the Rector in the exercise of his office C 163, 165

- They are appointed following the norms of our proper law R 257, 259

- Voting R 257

2. Consultors of the Vicariate Superior

- They are two C 199; R 297

- They compose the Vicariate Council R 17.13°

- Appointment, term and mission R 297

- Together with the Vicariate Superior they constitute the Congregation R 17.13°, 297

See: Voting. Vote (consultative, deliberative)

CONVOCATION

See: Chapters. Congregation

COOPERATORS

- God makes us cooperator of the Truth C 6; R 114

- We are cooperators of Divine Truth C 19

See: Educators. Education

COORDINATOR OF VOCATIONAL PASTORAL

See: Vocational Pastoral

COUNCIL

See: Voting. Congregation. Bodies. Meetings. Vote

COUNCIL OF MAJOR SUPERIORS

- Constitutions C 214, 215; R 327

- Definition and composition R 326

- It is a government body R 300

- Its mission in case of the Fr. General resignation R 425

- How often must be convoked and matters to be dealt with R 327 (every three years and when a considerable number of Major Superiors request it)

- Regional assemblies R 328 (at least once a year)

See: Bodies

COUNCIL OF THE PROVINCE (of a Demarcation)

- May be created C 181; R 271; helps the Fr. Provincial (the Major Superior) C 181

- Is a government body R 268

- In it the Provincial Community exercises its responsibility C 181, 185

- Composition R 271

- Has a consultative character R 271

- Goals C 185; these meetings are to be diligently promoted C 185

- The Provincial Congregation belongs to it and the Fr. Provincial is its president R 271

- Somebody may be appointed moderator R 271

- The same for the other Demarcations R 271.2°, cfr. C 189

See: Bodies

COUNCILS (bodies, meeting, Chapters)

See: Meetings. Bodies. Chapters. Congregation.

COUNCILS (of Family)

See: Meetings

CO-WORKERS

- Must be treated with humanity, fairness and mercy R 139

- Fair salary R 140

- Try to educate their children in our school free of charge R 140

CRIMES

- Regarding crimes, the norms of universal law must be observed C 154, cfr. C 88; R 240

CULTURE

- We must take a reasonable amount of time to renew our spiritual culture C 35

- Our educational activity work must be suited to the cultures of different peoples C101; R 114

- When circumstances forbid catechetical instruction, we must give a religious culture R 132

- It must be in line with the education of faith R 132

- We will keep the due reverence to the different cultures, in education R 142

CURIA

- Diversity, composition and definition R 17.12°-13°

- It is a government body in its own Demarcation R 268, 300

- Provincial Curia R 273; Officials C 182, 184; R 282

- General R 17.12°, cfr. R 300, 448 a)

- Officials in the General Curia C 207, 209, 211; R 317-324

See: Bodies

CURRICULUM

See: Studies. Juniors

DEBTS

- When a permission is needed and from whom R 432, 444-445

- Norms to request and to give permission R 446

- For the validity of the permission all the contracted debts must be presented R 446.6°

- It should never be allowed to contract unless there are reasons showing they may be repaid R 446.7º

- Who is responsible for the contracted debts R 432

See: Administration

DECEASED

- Notification of the deceased religious R 92

- Examination of the room R 93; special cases R 93.2°-3°

- Letters and manuscripts of the deceased religious may be sent to the Archives R 93

- Suffrages R 94-98

- A brief biographical article (consueta) must be written and published R 99

DECLARATION OF IDEALS

- Every Demarcation will have its own regarding our Works R 128

- It must gather the basic ideas in matters of education R 128

- The School community must have it before its eyes R 129

- Must be drawn by each Congregation in its Demarcation R 128

- Needs the approval of the Superior General R 128

See: Educative Project. Directory of Works

DECLARATIONS (rules, norms, decrees)

- Those coming from the General Chapter have binding force of an internal law C 127

- Specifically R 7.4°, cfr. R 7.1°-11°

- Declaration at the beginning of the novitiate R 174

- The religious has to make one before solemn profession C 116

- The candidate to the Holy Orders has to make one before the solemn profession R 214

See: Law

DECREE

- General R 7.1°

- Executory R 7.5°

- Chapter decrees R 7.6°; enforcement C 187

- Singular R 7.8°

- Juridical force R 16

- Those coming from the General Chapter have the binding force of an internal law C 127

- The General Congregation can be delegated to dictate General Decrees C 128

- The propositions approved in the Provincial Chapter may become Chapter Decrees C 187

- The rights in economic matters can be limited by General Decrees C 140

- A written official decree is required to open, close or abandon a House or Work C 159; R 244, 246, 10.1°

- A decree of expulsion must be given R 316, CIC 699; also in other cases of dismissal or dispense of vows cfr. R 205

See: Law. Norms

DEED OF WILL

- What to do R 184, 209

See: Profession. Novices. Juniors

DELEGATE

- Delegate of the Fr. General R 17.7°, 308, 309 (different from the General Delegate)

- Delegate of Fr. Provincial R 17.7°

- Delegate for Vocational Pastoral for the whole Order R 156

See: General Delegate

DELEGATES

1. To the Provincial Chapter

- Passive voice for the office of Delegate R 353.1º

- A canonical voting is required R 364.1-2º

- In the election of Delegates for every Community an absolute majority is required R 364.1º

- A relative majority is enough when the election is according to the single list system R 365.2º

- In Provincial and Vice-provincial Chapters, the number of elected Delegates is the same as the number of members of the Chapter by right C 188

- Elective system R 384

- What to do when the Local Chapter can not be celebrated or when some religious live outside the Demarcation R 385.1º-2º

- Renunciation to voice in the Chapters R 376.1º- 2º

- Norms to replace the Delegates R 386; cfr. R 401

- The list of Delegates must be published within a sufficient time R 387

- The dependent Vice-province will send two Delegates R 400.2º b)

- Election of one Delegate in the Provincial Vicariate R 412

2. To the General Chapter

- Passive voice for this office R 353.5º

- The elected Delegates cannot be less than the members by right C 217; R 416, 417

- Are elected in the Provincial, Vice-provincials and of the General Delegations Chapters R 391.2º b)

- The Alternate of the Vice-province replaces also Fr. Vice-provincial R 401

- How many are elected in every Province R 398

- What to do when more Delegates are to be elected to complete the required number R 417

- Resignation to the election for the Chapter R 376.2º

3. To the Vicariate Chapter

- cfr. R 411

See: Alternates

DELEGATION (of power)

- The ordinary executive power can be delegated CIC 137.1

- The General Chapter, even the legislative power C 128

- Delegation is usually done or may be done in many cases:

- To preside the Rite of Initiation into Religious Life R 170

- To receive the profession C 117; R 186 e), 204

- To appoint Visitors R 17.11°

- To do canonical visitation to the Province C 179; R 276.1° a); R 348 (regarding all Major Superiors)

- To represent Houses, Demarcations and Order R 255, 275, 288, 296, 301, 338, 343

- The Chapters and Superiors can delegate their ordinary executive authority R 26

DEMARCATION

- Is part of the structure of the Order, and is compose of physical persons, Houses and Works; They are: Provincial Vicariates, General Delegations, Vice-provinces, Provinces cfr. C 137; R 225

- All Demarcations are juridical persons C 139; R 431 cfr. Every Demarcation

- They are capable of acquiring and administering C 139; R 431

- Every Major Superior in his own Demarcation can perform juridical acts C 141; R 433

- Every religious enjoys rights and duties in his own Demarcation C 144, 149 151; R 230

- The Major Superior is the Ordinary in his own Demarcation C 174; CIC 134.1°; R 18

- The Superior General may establish Demarcations immediately dependent on him C 212, 213

- Common bodies within several Demarcations R 346, 347

See: Inter-demarcationality

DEPARTURE

- Is one of the three legitimate ways to abandon the Order C 153

- Effects of the departure and the dismissal C 153

- Through it a religious is separated from the Order C 153

- The religious legitimately departed from the Order, according to the law is free from his vows and obligations and loses the corresponding rights C 153

- The prescription of universal law must be observed C 154

See: Dismissal

DEPATURE

See: Expulsion. Admission

DEPRIVATION

- Of active and passive voice R 239, 376.3°; cfr. R 355, 371

See: Separation. Exclaustrated. Experiment. Transfer

DESIGNATION

See: Elections. Appointment

DEVOTION

- To the blessed Virgin Mary

- To her and traditional prayers C 49, R 70

- We celebrate her main feasts R 70

- Holy Rosary and Crown of the Twelve Stars R 70

- A Marian prayer should conclude all other Community prayers R 70

- To our Holy Founder

- We must cultivate and promote it C 49; R 71

- To the Saints and Blessed of our Order and the Calasanzian Family R 71

- To the Patron of the Community R 71

See: Acts of piety. Prayer

DIACONATE

- Our candidates must discern, in due time, if they are called for the clerical or lay state C 118

- After solemn profession they must prepare themselves for the Holy Orders C 118; R 214

- The one who receives it becomes a cleric C 143

See: Declaration. Priesthood

DIALOGUE

- Favorable conditions C 29

- Everyone’s peace and well being may be increased C 179 (in the visitation)

- In case of objection of conscience C 88; R 240

DIMISSORIAL (letters)

- The Major Superior in his own Demarcation or the Major Superior under whose immediate jurisdiction is the intre-demarcational Juniorate, gives the letters of dismissal R 212

DIOCESE

- The solemnly professed, according to the disposition of the law, ceases to belong to his former diocese R 212

DIPLOMAS (academic)

- Before the Novitiate R 165

- See to it that our religious achieve them R 197, 219

See: Curriculum. Studies

DIRECTORIES

- Definition R 7.2°; juridical force R 16

- Directories for Formation R 153, 155 e), 166, 175, 194, 215

- Directories for Chapters C 200; R 379, 414

DIRECTOR OF THE WORK

- Is appointed by the competent Superior C 163

- Is appointed or proposed by the Major Superior R 254, 259

- Under the Local and the Major Superior R 254

- Rights and duties R 151, 254

- Responsibility before the civil law R 255, cfr. R 143

- Directory of Works R 143

See: Officials

DISMISSAL

- For it the religious is separated from the Order C 153

- By law itself freed from their obligations and lose their rights C 153

- The prescriptions of universal law must be observed C 154

- The Major Superior can:

- Dismiss the novice R 182

- Exclude the professed of simple vows to renew or be solemnly professed R 202

- The Supreme Moderator can dismiss:

- The simply professed R 205; CIC 696.2

- Solemnly professed R 316; CIC 697-701

- Cases of physical or psychological R 206

- What to do with cases of mental disorders R 206

DISPENSATION

- It belongs to the Holy See to dispense from the Constitutions C 126; R 35

- The Superiors can dispense from the disciplinary norms of the Constitutions and the Rules R 37

- The Supreme Moderator can dispense from simple vows R 205

See: Dismissal

DOCUMENTS

- Foundational from Paul V and Clemens XII R 2

- Declaration by the candidate at the beginning of the novitiate R 174, and before the solemn profession R 183, C 116

- Of simple profession R 190

- Of solemn profession R 211

- Declaration, according to the norms of the Church, before the solemn profession for Holy Orders, R 214, CIC 1036

- Handing over his possessions R 184

- Renunciation to material goods R 209

- Deed of Will R 184, 209

- At the end of a term, all documents related to the office must be handed over to the successor R 21

See: Novices. Juniors. Profession. Professed

DOUBTS

See: Law

ECONOMIC CENTRALIZATION

- Imposition of ordinary and extraordinary taxes R 451

- A common Fund must be created in every Demarcation for the same reasons and to achieve the same end of the General Common Fund R 449, 450

- Every Demarcation has the right to create its Common Fund, levy taxes, and implement the economic centralization R 450, 451, 453

- Communities should transfer their funds to the central treasury R 454

- Norms must be given by the Provincial Chapter and by the Secretariat of Economy R 453, 457

See: Administration

ECONOMIC CONCENTRATION

See: Economic centralization

ECONOMY

See: Administration

EDUCATION

- And fourth vow: C 3, 90 ; R 40, 101

- The education of children, especially the poor, constitutes the Calasanzian ministry C 1; R 102,117, 148

- The Order carries out its educational apostolate without intending to receive any profit C 91

- With Christian, universal, popular education we want to free children and youth from the bondage of sin and ignorance C 2

- We participate in the mission of evangelization through the integral education of children and youth, especially the poor C 90; R 100, 110

- Spirit that should animate our schools, and goals of education C 97

- We try to make our educational work better suited to the cultures of different peoples C 101; R 114

- Our educational mission has as its aim the integral perfection of man C 92

- Goals and essence of the education we impart C 92, 96, 97; R 105, 109, 110, 111, 113; the new man that we want to form R 109-113, 122, 136

- Means C 96, 93, 94, 95, 97, 99; R 118 (catechesis), 122 (groups and associations), 125 (school), 144-151 (other educative activities)

- Is a task of the family, of the society, of the educative community, and requires the cooperation of all C 98; R 126, 127, 129

- Non-formal or parallel education R 134

- Of students in Christian faith R 104, 118, 122; cfr. C 96, 97

- Education appreciating all kind of values R 113

- Education for leisure time R 135

- Professional and vocational orientation R 136

- Personal responsibility of the religious R 101, 104, 138

- We must revise periodically our educative activities R 141

- Catechesis is the fundamental means C 96; R 118-124, 130, 148

- Popular school with different levels C 2, 99, 97; R 125-143

- Activities related to education C 99; R 144-151

See: Institute. Calasanzian School. Catechesis

EDUCATIONAL COMMUNITY

- Educational community:

- Our Order associates it in its mission R 127

- Is composed by the students’ parents, the teachers, the employees and the students R 126, 127

- Its mission is to educate C 98

- We shall promote its collaboration C 98

- School community:

- Is the environment in which our school puts into practice the educative mission C 97

- It must be animated by the Evangelical spirit of freedom and love C 97

- Will create a concrete educational Project R 129

- We try to develop the talents of our students C 97

- Will offer an image of the world, life and man illuminated by faith C 97

- Christian community of our institutions R 124; performs and revises the planning of the catechesis and all pastoral work R 124

See: Education. Calasanzian School

EDUCATIVE PROJECT

- Is created by the School Community R 129

- Is approved by the Demarcational Congregation R 129

- Must be approved by the teachers, parents of the students and students R 129

- The Declaration of Ideals must be present in its elaboration R 129

See: Declaration of Ideals, Directory for Works, Teachers

EDUCATOR

- Is cooperator with truth C 6, 19; R 114

- He makes himself cooperator of Divine Truth (by following Christ) C 19

- He considers as pertaining to his vocation everything related to education R 101

- He strives to live his faith deeply R 104

- He strives to enrich the different cultures with the apostolic activity R 114

- He transmits pure and complete the evangelical message R 115; in a vital way R 115, and with the witness of his life R 116

- He tries to achieve with special love the virtues and way of life of the Founder R 117

- The reason to teach is the renewal of society R 133; by means of a creative school R 133; and adopting the most up-to-date methods and means R 133, 218

- Enjoys proper freedom and personal responsibility R 138

- He demands of himself a periodical evaluation R 141

- He generously gives his time to the children and youth and leads them to apostolic activities R 135

- Has the duty to in a state of permanent formation R 216

See: Education

ELECTIONS

See: Chapters. Meetings

ELECTION SYSTEM

See: Elections. Vocals. Assistants. Chapters

EMPLOYEES

See: Officials. Lay Teachers. Teachers

ENTERTAINMENT

- According to our identity as consecrated persons C 60; R 45

ERUDITION

See: Education

ESTABLISHMENT

- Of a House or a Work, previous written permission by the Fr. General and the diocesan bishop are required R 244, cfr. 281.1º d)

- Of a Community R 10.1º, 241-243

- Other circumstances R 245

- An official written decree from the Supreme Moderator is required C 159; R 10.1º, 244

- Religious House is the House canonically erected C 158; cfr. R 10.1º

- Canonical establishment is the origin of the juridical personality C 139; R 244, 284, 300, 431

- When the juridical personality is lost R 244

- The establishment of Demarcations belongs to the Superior General:

- Provincial Vicariate C 198

- Vice-province C 190, 212

- General Delegation C 212; R 341

- Province and its changes C 171

- Our Order was erected in the year 1617 and has juridical personality R 300

EUCHARIST

- We shall become a sign of unity in the Eucharist C 27

- Is the center of our religious community C 28

- We come to it every day C 46

- We persevere in the World of God and in the Breaking of the Bread C 46

- The communal celebration of the Eucharist is a particular sign of fraternity C 46; R 64

- From the Eucharist flows the sense of communion C 46

- Each House is to have a chapel where the Blessed Sacrament is reserved C 50

- The Eucharist is a sign union with Christ R 64

- The Eucharist is the apex of the sacraments R 106

- Our religious consecration will be renewed in association with the Eucharist C 24

- Concelebration R 64; is a particular sign of a community built in brotherhood C 46; sometimes there should be a homily R 64

See: Liturgy. Liturgy of the Hours

EVANGELICAL COUNSELS

- Calasanz proposed to his companions the practice of the evangelical counsels and the fourth vow C 3

- Through this practice novices must grow accustomed to the renunciation of all things that do not belong to the Kingdom of God C 112

- The evangelical counsel of chastity entails the obligation of celibacy C 55

See: Religious Vows

EVANGELIZATION

- Definition R 105

- The charism of our Founder consists in evangelizing children, especially the abandoned C 17

- We dedicate our life to the evangelization of children and the poor C 18

- The ministry of evangelization belongs to the whole Church C 90

- We participate in this mission through the integral education of children and youth, especially the poor C 90

- Our office of evangelization demands from us a double fidelity R 115

- The witness of our life is the primordial means R 116

- Christian message should be explicitly proclaimed R 130

- What to do when evangelization is forbidden R 132

See: Catechesis. Education. Institute. Calasanzian School

EVENING PRAYER

- Among our daily prayers C 50; R 65

See: Acts of piety. Liturgy. Liturgy of the Hours

EXAMINATION OF CONSCIENCE

See: Acts of piety. Conscience

EXCARDINATION

- Requirements and procedure to follow C 152

- Nobody can be excardinated against his will R 226

See: Incardination. Assignation

EXCLAUSTRATED

- Definition R 238.1° c)

- Is deprived of active and passive voice R 239 a)

- Enjoys the spiritual privileges R 239

See: Separation

EXPENSES

See: Administration

EXPERIMENT (admitted ad experimentum)

- Definition R 238.1° d)

- They have found a Bishop who will receive them R 238.1° d)

- During the experimental period their obligations and rights are suspended R 238.1° d)

- Is deprived of active and passive voice R 239.1° b)

See: Separation

EXPERTS

- If necessary they will be used before admitting the candidates to the Novitiate C 109

- They will be called to the General Chapter R 418

- In the Secretariat of Economy R 438

EXPLORATORY SCRUTINY

See: Chapters

EXTENSION

- Of the authority of the Superiors and Officials R 22

- Of the time of Novitiate R 182

- Of the vows: the candidate must ask for it in writing R 200

- Of the six-year of simple profession C 115

FAITH

See: Education. Catechesis. Profession of faith

FAMILY (of the religious )

- Independence, with regards to it in matters of poverty R 50

- We should neither use their goods nor procure goods for them R 50

- If they need help, we should inform the Major Superior R 50

FAMILY (Piarist, religious)

- The Piarist family recognizes itself as the work of God and C 1

- In the Piarist family we spend our life at the service of our brothers C 12

- The Piarist family is manifested in a more concrete way in the Local Community C 36

- With grateful hearts we receive our candidates in the Piarist family C 104

- The Local Community is the first and fundamental one in the Piarist family C 157

- We make community when we take an active part in community C 32

- We shall reserve some places to foster privacy in the religious family C 35

- It is the task of everyone to promote the good of the religious family C 82

- There should be frequent consultations and House meetings C 167

- We pray for other religious congregations related to us C 51

- We shall foster cooperation with other religious families C 178

See: Religious Community

FASTING AND ABSTINCENCE

- Without being an obstacle to asking more, we follow the laws of the Church and the practice and customs of each place R 44

FATHER (God)

- Intimate knowledge of God and his will (following the example of the Virgin Mary) C 42

- Our heavenly Father will reward us and raise us to the perfection of solid virtues C 43

- In faith we accept everything as coming from the hands of our heavenly Father C 48

- We commend to our heavenly Father the needs of all C 51

- We worship the Father in spirit and truth C 52

- Our heavenly Father gives us in the Church the gift of chastity C 53

- Frequent intimacy with God C 57, 58

- We give witness of poverty by trusting God alone C 63

- We offer the sacrifice of our will to the service of God and our brothers C 76

- We endeavor to learn the will of the Father to put it faithfully into practice C 77

- Obedience is helpful to acquire the inner freedom which is proper to the children of God C 83

- In the case of a conflict of obedience, both parties must try to discern the will of God C 88

- Following the example of the Virgin Mary we carry out the plan of the Father C 89

- For the glory of God and the benefit of our neighbors C 116

- “I vow to Almighty God, the Father...” C 119

- In the General Chapter the religious must manifest in a very special way their determination to seek the will of our heavenly Father C 218

FEASTS – FESTIVITIES

See: Acts of piety. Devotion

FILIAL

See: Filial Community

FILIAL COMMUNITY

- Definition R 10.4°

- When a canonical House must be declared Filial R 243

- The religious of a Filial Community are members of the Chapter of main House R 383

See: House

FOLLOWING

- We follow Christ in a community of consecrated life C 16

- We follow Christ as the only thing necessary C 16

- Is the supreme norm of our life C 17

- Is defined in the charism of our Founder C 17; R 39

- Our own way to follow Christ C 18

- Christ calls us to the simplicity of the little ones C 19

- We make ourselves children with the children and poor with the poor C 19

- We endure discomfort in our daily life and do penance, sharing in Christ’s sufferings C 20

- Effects of this lifestyle C 22

- We renew our vows in order to follow Christ more favorably C 24

- The Virgin Mary lights our way for us to follow Christ C 23

FOOD

See: Poverty

FORMATION

1. Initial of the candidates

- Must be diligently carried out C 10

- Goals C 105; R 175

- Attitude in the Master C 107

- Aspects in the formation C 114; R 193, 195, 196, 197

- In three stages: Aspirancy (pre-novitiate), Novitiate, Juniorate C 105; R 153

- Curriculum of studies R 196, 197, 219

- Experience before the Novitiate C 108

- For the novices, in the Novitiate House C 110; R 157, 158, 172

- Apostolic activities for Novices C 111

- Formation plan for Novices C 112; R 175, 176, 177

- For Juniors, in formation house or in a well-structured center of learning C 114; R 157, 158, 193, 196

- Formation is a right of religious of simple vows C 146 and the religious of solemn vows C 148

- Juniors should remember that professing the vow to teach, they contracted the duty of learning R 198

2. Permanent Formation

- When and how it must be done C 120

- Planning C 120; R 220

- Importance and method R 215, 216, 218

- Responsibility of the Superiors and the Community C 120; R 217, 219

- Personal responsibility C 120, 121; R 216, 217

- According to our vocation and ministry C 120; R 215

- A professional preparation is required C 95; R 218, 219

- Religious shall have enough time for ongoing formation C 120

- After finishing the prescribed course of studies C 120; R 215-220

See: Formation houses. Aspirancy. Pre-novitiate. Novitiate. Juniorate

FORMATION HOUSES

- They are: Aspirancy, Pre-novitiate, Novitiate and Juniorate C 105; R 153

- Every Demarcation should have Aspirancy and Pre-novitiate R 163, 166, 167; cfr. C 193

- The Novitiate must be a canonical House designated for this purpose by the Fr. General C 110; R 157, 172

- The Supreme Moderator has the right to establish, transfer or suppress the Novitiate and the Juniorate R 157; and he can allow the establishment of several novitiates in the same Demarcation R 157

- They may be Inter-Demarcational R 157, 158

- Inter-Demarcational Houses of Novitiate and Juniorate follow the Statute R 158

- They must exist in the Vice-Provinces C 193

- In them all are responsible for our candidates and should live an authentic brotherhood C 106

- Formation must be completed in houses designated for this purpose C 114; R 157

FORMATORS

See: Masters. Educators

FORMULA OF THE PROFESSION

- The text C 119

- Should appear in all its integrity R 210

- Some personal provision may be added to the formula, with due prudence R 210

FOUNDER

See: Calasanz

FOURTH VOW

- Calasanz added the fourth vow to the three evangelical counsels C 3

- Our mission is shaped in the fourth vow C 90

- In virtue of it we dedicate ourselves to education R 101

- We must live the four vows in a community R 78

See: Institute. Education. Calasanzian Schools. Cathechesis. Vow

FRATERNITY

- Definition, thrust and belonging R 235

- relation with the Piarist Christian Community R 107

- Charismatic integration R 235 3º

FRATERNITY

See: Letter of Fraternity

GENERAL

See: Superiors

GENERALATE

See: Superiors (9. Superior General)

GENERAL DELEGATE

- Definition R 17.6°

- Presides the General Delegation (Demarcation) and is appointed by the Superior Genera C 213; R 345; is a Major Superior C 213; R 342; is a member of the General Chapter R 342; is directly under the authority of the Superior General C 213; R 341

- Rights and duties C 213; R 342

- He represents his Demarcation R 343; and has two Assistants R 344; regarding the Chapters and appointment R 345, 424.1° d)

- Canonical visitation R 348

See: General Delegation. Voting. Superiors. Vote (deliberative, consultative)

GENERAL DELEGATION

- May be established by the Superior General C 212; R 341

- Is part of the structure of the Order C 137; R 225

- Is composed by Houses and Works directly under the Superior General R 341

- requirements for its creation R 341

- Is presided by the General Delegate R 17.6°; 342

- Is a juridical person C 139; R 341, 431; and has administrative power C 139; R 431

- Is capable of acquiring, possessing and administrating C 139, 141; R 431, 433

- Is governed according to its own Statutes R 342, 345

- Has government bodies: Secretariats R 269.2°; Council of the Demarcation R 271.2°; Secretariat of Economy R 438.1°

- Regarding the Chapters and appointments C 213; R 345

GENERAL HOUSES

- The Superior General may establish them C 212

- They are a part of the structure of the Order C 212

- Duties of the Superior General in them C 213; R 302 n), 424.1° f) g)

GENERAL POSTULATOR

- Appointment and mission R 323

GENERAL PROCURATOR

- Appointment C 207; R 317

- The General Procurator processes matters of the whole Order with the Holy See C 207; R 318

- He can be chosen as Vicar Successor C 208

- Is a member of the General Chapter C 217; R 416

- He can be removed from his office R 317

- He may substitute some absent, when a quorum is required in the General Congregation R 30

- He must be called when the General Congregation deals with an important matter to be presented to the Holy See R 319

- Must keep a Register R 320

- During his office, losses the passive voice for the position of Provincial R 355

- Voice in the first Provincial Chapter after the end of his term R 392

GOALS

- Of the popular school C 2 (and the Piarist Institute)

- Calasanz had the inspiration and proposed to his companions the goal and nature of his Institute C 3, 4-10; cfr. R 2

- Of any Institute in the Church C 4

- Of education C 92, 96, 97

- For which the Local Community is established C 157

- For which the Provinces are constituted C 170

- Of the Houses and Demarcations immediately dependent on the Fr. General C 212

- For which the Chapters are convoked C 168, 186, 195, 216; R 361, 380, 391, 400, 410, 415

- Of the formation of the candidates C 105

- Why the candidates live with us before the novitiate C 108

- Of the Formation Houses for Juniors C 114

- Of ongoing formation C 121

- Of temporal goods C 71, 139

- Of the imposed taxes C 210

- Of the Patrimony of the Order (Common Fund) R 448

See: Education. Formation. Institute. Calasanzian School

GOODS (temporal)

- Are necessary to carry out the practice of religious life and the apostolate C 139

- Whatever the religious acquires, belongs to the House, the Province or the Order C 69; R 46

- We avoid the accumulation of goods C 70; R 454

- We do not use the temporal goods of our family for our own benefit, nor give goods to our relatives R 50

- We use sparingly the goods of the Community R 51

- Norms regarding means of transportation and expensive appliances R 51

- They must be at the exercise of our ministry, our Works and the poor C 71, 72; R 46

- We will use them for the further development of our activities C 71

- Purpose of the goods C 71, 72; and norms regarding the use by others of our Houses and Works C 73; R 52

- The accurate management of our goods is related to poverty C 72; and requires co-responsibility R 433

- We shall require an accounting of our management C 72

- All Communities and Demarcations are able to acquire, own and administer goods C 139; R 431

- This right can be limited C 140; R 431, 452

- Superiors and Administrators are able to perform juridical acts C 141; R 433

- Before professing temporary vows, we must give up our possessions, use and usufruct of our goods C 113; R 184

- Before the solemn profession we must give up our possessions (Deed of Will) R 209

- Loss of the capacity to acquire, possess and administer C 69; R 46, 209

- Acts against the solemn vows of poverty are null R 46

See: Administration. Juridical Acts. Treasures

GOSPEL

- Fidelity to it C 218

- Administration of the goods according to the spirit of the Gospel C 72

- Authority must be exercised according to the spirit of the Gospel C 129

GUEST

- definition R 231

- rights and duties in the Community in which he lives R 231

- regarding economic aspects R 231

HABIT

- Description of the Piarist habit C 67

- Regarding its use, we must follow the norms of the Church and Major Superiors in each region C 67

HISTORIAN

- Provincial: appointment and mission R 282, 470, cfr. R 464

- General: appointment and mission R 324, 470

- May be designated in each Demarcation R 470

See: Archivist. Librarian

HISTORY OF THE ORDER

- In the formation of the Novices R 177

- To publish works about the History of the Order the permission of the Superior General is required R 87

HOLY SCRIPTURE

- Brings us to the knowledge of God and his will C 42

- The intimacy with God is nourished by its reading C 58

- The Word of God calls us to communal life C 27

- We preserve in the Word of God and the Breaking of the Bread C 46

See: Prayer. Acts of piety. Liturgy. Word of God

HOLY SEE

- Regarding interpretation, changes, etc. in Constitutions C 125, 126; R 35

- The formula of the profession of faith must be approved by it C 132

- The General Procurator processes matters with the H. See C 207; R 318

- The General Procurator must be called whenever the General Congregations deals with a matter of some importance that should be presented to the Holy See, and he must be listened to R 319

- In the practice of our civil duties we will follow the instructions of the H. See R 84

- We have to consult it to admit a bishop to the Novitiate R 169.2º a)

- Gives or imposes the indult of exclaustration R 238.1º c)

- Gives the indult to transfer to the diocesan clergy R 238.1º d)

- We will promote the knowledge and execution of the decrees of the H. See R 302 i)

- The Fr. General has to send a report about the Order R 302 n)

- In case of resignation, the Fr. General presents it to the H. See R 425

- When is its permission required in economic matters R 444, cfr. R 445-446

HOLY SPIRIT

- Under his inspiration, Calasanz dedicated himself totally to the Christian education C 1

- Raised up our Order C 90

- Leads to the perfection of charity C 4

- Was sent so that the Apostles became witnesses C 15

- Strengthened by him, we invite everyone to the Kingdom C 22

- The Spirit of Christ gives our love a certain joyful simplicity C 30

- Under his inspiration we make acts of virtues C 43

- Moved by the Holy Spirit we shall practice poverty in new ways C 75

- His prompting brings us to know the Will of the Father C 77

- Wishing to live for God alone, we experience the power of the Holy Spirit C 62

HOSPITALITY

- We practice it when we welcome our brothers and guests C 73; R 231

See: Virtues

HOUSE (religious )

- Definition R 10.1°; Formed R 10.2°; Station or House in the broad sense R 10.3°; Filial Community R 10.4°

- The house must be canonically erected C 158; an official written decree from the Supreme Moderator is always required C 159; R 10.1°, 244

- Requirements to open a House C 159; R 242, 244, 245; or to close or abandon it C 159; R 244, 246, 247

- They are juridical persons and are capable of acquiring and administering C 139; R 431

- The Superior and the Administrator may perform juridical and administrative actions C 141; R 433

- It must have a sufficient number of Religious (at least four; six for a formed House) C 158; R 10.1°-2°, 242

- Only Fr. General may grant a dispensation from this number of four R 243

- If the number of Religious in any house becomes less than three, it must be declared a Filial House R 243

- Every religious must be assigned to a House C 150; R 227

- No more Houses should be opened than those the Order is effectively able to provide with the necessary religious C 158

- It must have the bodies, offices and Officers according to the needs: Superior, Vice-Rector, Consultors, major and minor Officials, C 163 R 259; cfr. R 250, 254, 256, 257, 260, 261, 262, 263, 264; the Treasurer is the only administrator C 166; R 435, 436

- Responsibility of the Community C 160: R 258, 445.3°

HOUSING

- Must be clean and in accordance with poverty R 249; cfr. 47

- Must be separate from the working place R 249

See: Poverty

IMPEDIMENTS

- For admission to the novitiate R 169

INCARDINATION

- Every religious must be incardinated into a Province or independent Vice-Province C 150; R 226

- Is not lost when a religious is sent to another Demarcation by virtue of obedience R 230

- Procedure of excardination-incardination C 152

See: Excardination

INCORPORATION INTO THE ORDER

- By simple profession the religious is incorporated into the Order C.146; R 222

- Duties R 39

INFORMATION

- Before the novitiate C 109; before the simple profession R 185

- Before the solemn profession C 117

- About the candidates R 168

- About the Novices R 181

- About the Juniors R 199, 201

- In the case of an inter-demarcational Novitiate R 181, or an inter-demarcational Juniorate R 201

- From Fr. Provincial to Fr. General about the Province R 276.5º e)

- From Fr. General to the Holy See about the Order R 302 n)

INSCRIPTION IN ANOTHER DEMARCATION

- Definition C 146, R 230

INSTITUTE (or MINISTRY)

- Its religious and apostolic nature C 1, 2, 3

- Christian education of children, especially the poor C 1, 7

- Confirmed by Paul V C 4

- Calasanz established clearly its nature and goals C 3, 4-10

- In its diligent exercise lies the reform of the society C 5, 74; R 133; and a happy life for children lies on their diligent education in piety and learning C 5; in learning and piety C 1

- A most fruitful harvest C 6

- Such an important matter C 9

- Basic teaching and methods C 8

- Our goal is the Christian education of children, especially the poor, in learning and piety C 1; popular, universal, to free children C 2; enrich children with every virtue C 7; to evangelize the children and the poor C 18; everything related to human rights, unjust conditions, justice and peace C 74; mission of evangelizing and integral education of children and youth, especially the poor C 90; education in faith C 96; particular attention to the education of children C 119

- Whom must be accepted to his Institute, or rejected form it C 10

- Temporary goods must be used for the exercise of our ministry C 71

- Is a charitable institution, without intending to receive any profit C 91

- Requires pedagogical qualities and personality C 93

- Our preparation must be continually updated C 95

- Simple, effective methods C 95

- We address the needs of the Church by means of our ministry C 100

- Love to our ministry must be fostered C 107

- Apostolic activities must be in line with our ministry C 111

- Ongoing formation must be in agreement with our ministry C 120

- The structural elements are destined for the service of the person within the scope of our ministry C 123

- The person and his vocation are developed within the scope of our ministry C 123

- The Local Superior must have the qualities required for our ministry C 161

- Is a valid reason to create a Province C 170

- The Fr. Provincial must report about it C 178

- Helps to promote the Christian, social and hum and development of the citizens C 192

- Requires virtues, means and preparation C 9, 10, 93, 96, 99

- Goals of the Institute:

- Christian education C 1, 3

- Popular education C 2, 12

- To free from the bondage of sin and ignorance C 2

- To reform the society C 5, 74; R 133

- To teach on learning and Christian doctrine C 8

- To reform the society, promoting human rights, social justice and peace C 74

- Ultimate aim and means is education C 92

- Attitudes, qualities and virtues C 93; R 117

- The fundamental means are catechesis C 96 and school C 2, 99

See: Education. Catechesis. School. Educator

INTER-DEMARCATIONALITY

- Inter-Demarcational Formation Houses R 158, 159

- Inter-Demarcational Juniorates will follow their Statutes R 158

- Admission to the profession R 185

- Examples of the profession R 190

- Admission to the renewal of vows R 201

- Itinerary of formation in the Provinces R 276.2º b)

- Secretariats R 331, 333, 334

- Common bodies created by Demarcations R 346, 347

INTERPRETATION

See: Law

INTERRUPTION

See: Novitiate. Activities (apostolic). Absence

INVENTORY

See: Administration. Archives

JUNIORATE

- Definition C 114; R 193

- The Fr. General has the right to establish, transfer or suppress the Juniorate R 157

- Can be Demarcational or Inter-Demarcational R 157, 158

- To establish it, a formal decree by the Fr. General is required R 157

- The Inter-Demarcational Juniorates will follow their Statutes R 158

- Levels and aspects in the formation C 114; R 195, 196, 197

- This formation must continue the one begun in Novitiate R 195; priestly formation sacerdotal R 196; intellectual R 197

- Must take place in a Formation House C 114; R 157, 194

- Provincials (Major Superiors) must follow the good work in the Juniorates C 176

- The Juniorate offers the Juniors the opportunity to work for the good of the Order R 198

- Information to the Major Superiors R 199

- Preparation for the solemn profession R 208; for priesthood R 213, 214

See: Formation Houses. Juniors. Formation. Studies. Profession, Inter-Demarcationality

JUNIORS

- Must follow and complete their formation in a Formation House or in a well-structured Center of studies C 114; R 196

- Must complete their religious, Calasanzian and priestly formation, and acquire an adequate preparation C 114; R 196

- They must study in a university R 197

- They cannot study at the same time civil and theological studies R 196

- Should feel responsible for creating a community R 198

- Must ask the Major Superior in writing for the renewal of vows and admission to solemn profession R 200

- May leave the Order R 202; may be dismissed R 205; and may be excluded from the renewal of vows or from making solemn profession R 202

- Before the solemn profession:

- Should dedicate at least during one month to special preparation R 208

- Should have a spiritual retreat R 208 and must give the testimony prescribed by the Church R 214, cfr. CIC 1036

- Must renounce all his present possession and, if necessary, must do a Deed of Will R 209

- Must express in writing his willingness to live with us for the rest of his life C 116

See: Formation Houses. Studies. Formation

JURIDICAL ACTS

- Related to the administration of goods, both ordinary and extraordinary C 139, R 433

- Acts of ordinary and extraordinary administration R 441

- The Superiors can carry out these juridical acts C 141, R 433

- And the Treasurers, under the responsibility of the Superiors C 141, R 433, 435-440

See: Administration. Administrators

JURISDICTION

See: Authority. Power

KINGDOM

- Our Savior called his disciples to proclaim the Kingdom of God C 15

- Christ calls us to the simplicity of the little ones C 19

- With our consecrated lifestyle, we invite everybody to follow the way of the riches of the Kingdom C 22

- By our community life we become, in some way, ministers of hope of the Kingdom to come C 25

- Chastity for the sake if the Kingdom of Heaven is a gift from the Father received in the church C 53

- The evangelical counsel of chastity for the sake if the Kingdom of Heaven is a sign of the future C 55

- Through our consecration we become more faithful witnesses of the supereminence and riches of the Kingdom of Heaven C 54

- Following the poverty of Christ, we seek the Kingdom of God above any other good C 63

- Leaving everything for the sake of the Kingdom we oblige ourselves to live the mystery of Christ who was poor C 65

- We live our religious obedience as a Mystery of the cross and resurrection for the service of the Kingdom C 89

- Our educational mission has as its aim that our students be builders of the Kingdom of God C 92

- The novices must grow accustomed to the renunciation of all things which do not belong to the Kingdom of God C 112

LAW

- Universal and proper law C 124; R 5

- Goal or aim of both C 124

- Sources of our Law R 9

- Force of the Law given by the Church C 124

- The Constitutions and the Rules are our fundamental laws R 5

- Other norms: General Decrees, Directories, Statutes, Declarations, Executory Decrees, Chapter Decrees, Instructions, Singular Decree, Singular Precept, Rescript, Ordinances R 7.1°-11°

- Juridical force of our law C 125, 126; R 16, 34-37 (norms given by the General Chapters and by Superiors)

- Interpretation and changes in the Constitutions C 126

- Faculties of the General Chapter and the General Congregation C 126

- Interpretations and changes in the Rules R 36

- Dispensation R 37

LAWS

- Constitutions and Rules are the fundamental laws R 5

- Internal, those that appear in the Rules C 127; R 5

- Other norms R 7.1º-1lº

- The General Chapter alone has the right to promulgate laws R 16

- Judicial force of our law R 16

- Interpretation and changes R 35, 36

- Dispensation R 37

- Liturgical laws and rites R 68

- We accept the law as a means of expressing love C 13

- We follow principles that safeguard the rights of the human person, as well as the laws of the Church and our Constitutions and Rules C 13; cfr. C 125-127

- We observe the universal law of work C 66

See: Law. Rights and duties. Constitutions. Rules

LAY

- Participate of the Order’s life C 36

- Exercise our ministry C 94

- Lay associations must be fervently promoted R 234

See: Lay Professors. Employees. Voice

LAY TEACHERS

- We will consider them as brothers and cooperators R 139

- We should choose them preferably from among our alumni R 139

- Are members of the Educative Community R 127

- They must know and accept the Educational Project R 129

- We should pay them a just and equitable salary R 140

- We should educate their children in our schools free of charge R 140

See: Educator

LEASING

See: Renting

LEGAL OWNER

- Appointment R 254.2°

- Is responsible before the civil law R 255

LETTERS OF OBEDIENCE

See: Obedience

LENT

See: Celebrations

LETTER OF FRATENITY

- Granting R 237

- List of those who have received the Letter of Fraternity R 237

- Suffrages for those who have received them R 97

LIBRARIES

- They are part of our cultural patrimony R 463

- When a house or a Work is suppressed or abandoned, the Local Superior will make an inventory and the Major Superior will decide where the Library must be transferred R 467

- Procedures when it seems appropriate to sell or expurgate something R 468

See: Archives. Archivist. Librarian

LIBRERIAN

1. Local

- Is appointed by the Local Superior R 259, cfr. R 464

- Mission and norms c R 263, cfr. R 465 (with due proportion)

2. Provincial (in a Demarcation)

- is appointed by the respective Major Superior R 464

- norms R 467 (suppression), 468 (alienation), 469 (inventory and catalogue)

- Mission R 263

3. General

- is appointed by the Fr. General R 464

- Mission R 87, 464, 468,

See: Archives. Archivist. Library. Cultural Patrimony

LIFE (religious, spiritual, community etc.)

See: Following of Christ. Community. Prayer. Chastity. Poverty. Obedience. Formation. Rights and duties

LITURGICAL CALENDAR

- Must be published every year R 72

LITURGY

- Our religious should know and follow the laws and rites of the Church R 68

- Celebration of the Eucharist C 46; R 64

- Celebration of the Mystery of Christ during the year and the paschal Triduum R 69

- Celebration of Christ’s Nativity R 69

- Feasts of the B.V.Mary. R 70; our Holy Founder and Saints and Blessed of the Order and the Calasanzian Family R.71; the Patron of the Community R 71

- In the Liturgy are achieved our sanctification and the glory of God C 45

- Our whole life becomes a Liturgy C 48

- We are called to a continual conversion and renovation C 47

- Catechesis leads to the Sacred Liturgy C 96

- Novices must participate in liturgical celebrations C 112

- Liturgy keeps and prolongs the communion with God and men C 46

- Liturgical Calendar of the Order R 72

See: Acts of piety. Liturgy of the Hours

LITURGY OF THE HOURS

- Priests and deacons are obliged to recite it C 46; R 65

- Morning and Evening Prayer must be scheduled by the Community C 50; R 65

- Participation of students and faithful R 65

- In the Paschal Tridum the customs of the Demarcation should be followed R 69

See: Liturgy

LOANS

- Will be favored among juridical persons of the same Demarcation and in the Order R 455, 456

- Who is responsible for the contracted debts R 432

- Norms to contract them R 444-446

See: Administration

LUXURY

- We will absolutely avoid it C 70

MANAGEMENT (of goods)

See: Administration. Administrators. Treasurer

MARY

- Protectress of the Pious Schools C 11

- Mother and Educator C 11

- Perfect model to follow Christ C 23

- Help in our educative activities C 23

- Model of chastity C 53

- Model of poverty C 64

- Model of obedience C 89

- Her presence in the early Church C 25

- Kept and pondered in her heart the divine words C 42

- Spiritual intimacy with Mary to become worthy of the gift of chastity R 42

- We venerate her with filial love C 49; R 70

- Our filial devotion to her and her protection will increase our strength C 58

- In the formula of our profession C 119

- The Virgin Mary, Mother of God, is the main Patroness of the Order R 4

- The name of the Virgin Mary is the Title of the Order R 4

- “Mary Mother of God” is Order’s shield R 4

MASTERS (of the candidates)

- In every Demarcation there will be religious prepared for this ministry R 160

- Assistants to the Master may be appointed R 161

- Masters and other religious should live an authentic brotherhood with the candidates C 106

1. Master of Novices

- Is appointed following the same procedure used with the Local Superior C 161; R 250.1º a) b)

- Appointment in the Inter-Demarcational Formation Houses R 159, 424.1º b)

- Appointment in the Inter-Demarcational Houses R 159

- Appointment in the General Houses R 424.1º g)

- Inter-Demarcational Juniorates follow their Statutes R 158

- Is appointed for four years R 159; he can be re-appointed R 159

- Passive voice for this post R 353.2º

- Qualities and mission C 107; especial preparation R 354.2º

- Is the first responsible for the formation of the Novices C 112; with the cooperation of the Community C 112; R 159

- In every Demarcation there will be religious prepared for this ministry R 160

- They may have an Assistant R 161

- Three times a year, he must send a report to the Major Superior about each Novice R 181

- In Inter-Demarcational houses this information will be sent according to the Statutes R 181

- Is member of the Provincial Chapter R 392.1º f)

- Is member of the Vice-Provincial Chapter R 402.5º

- Resignation in General or Inter-Demarcational houses R 426

- Resignation in Demarcational houses R 427

2. Master of Juniors

- Is appointed following the same procedure used with the Local Superior C 121; R 250.1º a) b)

- Is appointed for four years; he can be re-appointed R 159

- Inter-Demarcational houses follow their Statutes R 159

- In the General Houses R 424.1º f)

- In the Demarcational Houses R 159, 424.1º b)

- Passive voice for this position R 353.2º

- Qualities and mission C 107

- In every Demarcation there will be religious prepared for this ministry R 160

- Their preparation must be permanently improved and adapted R 160

- A special preparation is required R 354.2º

- They may have an Assistant R 161

- Once a year, he must send a report to the Major Superior R 199

- Is member of the Provincial or Vice-Provincial Chapter R 392.1º g), 402.5º

- Resignation in General or Inter-Demarcational houses R 426

- Resignation in Demarcational houses R 427

See: Formation Houses. Formation

MASS

- For the intentions of the Fr. General R 260

- On Sundays and week days with our students R 131

- The Eucharistic sacrifice of the Mass, sign of unity C 27; and of union in Christ R 64

See: Liturgy. Eucharist

MATURITY

- To become worthy of the gift of chastity R 42

- The Christian message and the life of prayer (among Young persons) prepares an atmosphere in which vocations can reach maturity R 122

- Sufficient maturity to begin religious life R 166, 168

- Our consecrated life demands that we pursue the maturation of our vocation n R 215

- In Formation Houses all must foster the grow of the vocation with prayer and work C 106

- With utmost care we must see to it that our students achieve psychological maturity R 110

MEANS

- We must expect then from God in order to make us able cooperators with Truth C 6

- Calasanz wanted the work of education to be accomplished through the ministry of the Word and the Sacraments C 3

- The Constitutions, a means to reach perfection C 6, 13

- We leave everything as a means to follow Christ C 16

- The vows are means to be more united with Christ C 16

- Our community life is a means to attract vocations C 39, 104

- Living the candidates with us is a means for them to know our ministry and for us to know them C 108; cfr. R 164

- Temporary goods and equipment are means C 71, 139

- Means for education:

- Catechesis, fundamental means C 96

- Pedagogical personality and other qualities C 93-94

- Professional preparation C 95

- Simple and efficient methods C 95

- Schools, other activities for youth, parishes C 99

- Permanent formation C 120, 121

- To make community C 32-33

- To discern the will of God C 77-79, 129

- To cultivate chastity C 57-61

- To live the spirit of poverty C 66, 69-73

- For the education of faith C 96

- Meetings, Councils, Chapters are means to express responsibility, unity, etc. cfr. C 169, 185, 218, 78, 32

See: Education. Formation. Ministry (Institute). Calasanzian School

MEANS OF SOCIAL COMMUNICATION (mass media)

- We must use them according to our identity of consecrated persons C 60; R 45

MEANS OF TRANSPORTATION

- Acquisition and use R 51

- Belongs only to the Community R 51

- Permission from the Major Superior R 51

See: Poverty

MEETINGS (Councils and Chapters)

- Our Savior formed a group of followers C 15

- The community is built up with community meetings C 32

- In them we promote the internal harmony of minds and initiatives C 78

- Matters to be dealt with, and aims C 167

- In them the common activity and shared responsibility of our religious become more evident (in meetings, Councils and, above all, in Chapters) C 134

- There should be frequent consultations and House meetings C 167

- The Community will maintain unity with other Houses especially through the councils, special gatherings and Chapters of its own Demarcation C 169

- Local Superiors help Fr. Provincial, especially when they meet in the Council of Local Superiors C 181; R 271

- The Provincial Community exercises its responsibility towards the common good of the Province especially in Assemblies, Councils and the Chapters of the Province C 185

- Meetings of the Congregations R 290, 340 (Vice-Provincial), R 297 (Vicariate), R 344 (of the General Delegation), R 280 (Provincial) and R 313 (General)

- The Local Community requires a group of people R 225

- Regional assemblies of Major Superiors are recommended R 328

- FF. Provincials must attend the meetings of Major Superiors R 276.5º c)

MEMBERS

- The religious working outside are also members of their own community C 102

- Of the Local Chapter C 168; R 351.1º

- Of the Provincial Chapter C 188; R 392.1º

- Of the Vice-Provincial Chapter C 196; R 402

- Of the General Delegation Chapter R 345

- Of the General Chapter C 217; R 416

- Of the Vicariate Chapter R 411; cfr. C 200

- Of Congregations, Councils and Curiae R 15.12º-13º

- Of Secretariats R 269, 329, 438

- Of the Council of the Demarcation R 271

- Of the Council of Major Superiors R 326

METHOD

- An easy one must be used C 8

- Simple, effective and up-dated C 95

- The best and continually renewed R 133

See: Education. Formation. Calasanzian School

MINISTRY

See: Institute. Education

MISSION

- The structures of the Order originate from its own mission C 123

- Universal law and our own law are at the service of the mission C 124

- The religious acquire rights and duties to exercise their mission C 144

- The professed in solemn vows must share and support the mission C 148

- Calasanz proposed the evangelical counsels and the fourth vow C 3 to consolidate his mission in the Church C 11

See: Institute

MISSIONS

- Some religious should be sent to the missions R 149

- In them we pay special attention to the education of youth C 99

MONEY

See: Administration

MONITIONS

See: Dismissal

MORINING PRAYER

- Community prayer C 50; R 65

See: Liturgy of the Hours

MORTGAGE

See: Temporal goods. Administration. Right of Ownership

MORTIFICATION

- As regards fasting and abstinence we can adapt ourselves to the laws of the Church and the practices of customs of each place R 44

- We shall strive to fulfill the divine law of penance R 44

- Regarding many aspects of daily life R 47

MOTTO

- Our Founder formulated it in different ways the motto of our Order R 3

- Other formulations also accepted by tradition R 3

MYSTERY OF CHIRST

See: Liturgy. Christ Lord

NAME

- Official of the Order R 1; cfr. C 2

- Other names that can be used R 1

- A religious name should be taken at the time of profession R 223

- The name of the Blessed Virgin Mary is the Title of the Order R 4

“NIHIL OBSTAT”

- Of the General Congregation is required:

- To remove and transfer Superiors and Officials R 24

- To appoint:

- Masters of Novices and Juniors R 159

- Rectors in Provinces and Vice-provinces R 250

- Provincial Assistants outside of Chapter time R 279.2º

- Vice-provincials Assistants (independent) outside of Chapter time R 399, cfr. R 279.2º

- Vice-provincials (dependent) outside of Chapter time and, if that is the case, in Chapter time R 289 and R 404-408

- Vice-provincial Assistants (dependent) outside of Chapter time R 289 and R 404, 407-408

- Vicariate Superiors R 293

- To accept resignations R 427

- To elect or appoint Provincials or Assistants those who are in a General Delegation R 230.3º

- cfr. For all cases R 424.2º

See: Appointments

NORMS

- Following Christ is the supreme norm of our life C 17

- Our life and work requires norms and operating government bodies C 122

- Origin of the norms C 124, 127; R 16

- Have the same juridical force as the source from which they come C 127, R 16

- The binding and juridical force depends on the nature and matter of the norms C 125, 126, 127; R 16

- Norms are designated with different names C 127; R 5, 7.1°-11°

- Chapters and Superiors must demand observance of the norms R 14

- Chapters and Superiors have the power to dictate norms R 16

See: Law

NOTARY

- The Provincial Secretary is the Notary C 184

- The General Secretary is the Notary C 211

- Faculties given as a proxy R 440

NOVICES

- Age and qualities C 109

- Responsibility of the Superiors in the admission to the Novitiate C 109; R 168

- We must do a very careful selection C 10

- Declaration at the beginning of the Novitiate R 174

- Novices are not religious, in strict sense C 142; cfr. R 222

- Must arrange their lives according to the norms of the Constitutions C 145

- Rights and privileges C 145; R 192, 227

- Very diligent formation C 10

- Some periods to exercise apostolate may be included C 111

- They may dedicate some time to study R 178

- Everything must contribute to their formation R 178, 180

- In case of death, they enjoy the same suffrages as the profess of solemn vows R 192

- They may leave the Order and they may be dismissed R 182

- Petition in writing before the profession R 183

- Must hand over their goods, and make a Deed of Will before the profession R 184

- To change that after, he needs the permission R 184

- The Major Superior Mayor admits to the profession R 185

- Requirements for the validity of the profession R 186

- Profession outside of the Novitiate and anticipation of the profession R 189

- The profession must be received by the Major Superior or his delegate R 191

- The documents of simple profession must be made in duplicate, one for the Archives of the House and the other for the Provincial Archives R 190

- Procedure in case of being received again R 207

See: Formation Houses. Novitiate

NOVITIATE

- It is up to the Superior General to establish, transfer or suppress the Novitiate House R 157

- Several Novitiates in the same Demarcation R 157

- They can be provincial and Inter-Demarcational houses R 157, 158

- It must be done in a canonical house designed for that by the Superior General C 110; R 172

- In special cases it may be done in another canonical House of the Order R 172

- During a period of a year, that is, twelve months C 110; R 172

- Time dedicated to practice apostolate is not included in the required twelve months R 179

- Absence that invalidates Novitiate R 173

- Absence that must be made up R 173

- The group of novices can live in another canonical house R 172

- Responsibility of the Superiors in the admission to the Novitiate C 109; R 168

- Impediments for Novitiate R 169

- Retreat before R 171; declaration before the Novitiate 174

- The Major Superior admits to the Novitiate C 110, cfr. R 170

- Starts with the Rite of Initiation into Religious Life R 170

- Is the same for everybody C 110; all will receive the same formation R 175

- Goals and program of formation C 112; R 176, 177

- Some periods to exercise apostolate may be included C 111

- Everything must contribute to formation R 178, 180

- Visitation to the Novitiate R 181

See: Formation Houses. Novices. Masters

NUMBER

- Of religious to form and establish a House R 10.1°-2°, 242, 243

- Of Delegates for the Provincial and Vice-Provincial Chapter C 188

- Of Delegates for the General Chapter C 217; R 416.5°

OBEDIENCE

- Must be assumed generously in faith, freedom and love C 76, 83, 81; R 53

- Our obedience continues the obedience of Christ C 76

- We entrust ourselves in faith to serve, according to the Constitutions C 76

- What the vow demands from us C 76

- Signs to discern the will of God the Father C 77

- To promote internal harmony united by bonds of love C 78

- We submit ourselves to the authorities following the example of our Founder C 79

- Style of obedience R 53; to obey promptly and willingly C 81, 89

- Attitude on the side of the Superiors R 54, 55, 56

- Psychological and spiritual effects of obedience C 83

- Obedience for the good of the Community C 82; in difficult matters C 87; when there is a conflict of conscience C 88; R 240

- When a decision has been legally made, it must be accepted R 57

- Every one is bound to obey his Superiors C 155

- Religious can be transferred from a house to another R 58

- Also, from a Demarcation to another R 230

- When a religious is obliged to obey by virtue of the vow R 59

See: Religious Vows

OBEDIENCE (letters of obedience)

- Through them a religious is assigned to a House or incardinated to a Demarcation R 229

- The religious does not lose the incardination in his own Demarcation R 230

- Only the Fr. General can give an obedience for another Province, Independent Vice-province, General Delegation or General House R 230

OBJECTS OF ARTISTIC OR HISTORICAL VALUE

- Must be preserved R 466

- The Demarcations will have a suitable and safe place to secure them R 466

- In the Demarcational Curia there should be a general catalogue of goods that are deemed valuable R 469

- When they should be placed in the common depository of the Demarcation R 469

See: Archives

OFFICE

See: Officials. Work (action)

OFFICIALS

- Are major, appointed by the Major Superior; and minor, appointed by the Local Superior or by the Director of the Work R 19, 259

- In the Local Community: in general C 163; Consultors C 165, R 257; Treasurer C 166, R 45, 435,; general listing R 259; Vice-rector R 256; In charge of the Masses R 260; Secretary R 261 Chronicler R 262; Librarian R 263; Sacristan R 264; Archivist R 464; Legal Responsible, that is, Representative of the Owner R 254.2º

- In the Work: Director R 254, 259; Representative of the Owner R 254.2º; regarding other Officials R 259

- In the Vice-province (y, by analogy, in the Vicariate and in the General Delegation): Treasurer C 194; R 435, cfr. Province, similarly; Archivist and Historian R 464, 470

- In the Province and in the independent Vice-province: Treasurer C 182, R 435; Secretary C 184; Vicar R 278; Treasurer, Secretary, Historian R 282; Archivist R 280

- In the General Community: General Procurator C 207, R 317: General Treasurer C 209, R 321; General Secretary C 211, R 322; General Postulator R 323; General Archivist and Historian of the Order R 324, 464, 470; General Vicar (successor) C 208; General Vicar R 306; Vicars of the Fr. General R 307

- They can be removed and transferred R 24

- When their term is over, they must transfer everything to their successors R 21

- They remain in their office until their successors takes possession R 22

- Resignation R 426, 427, 428

ORDER (precedence)

- Determined among persons according to the date of first profession C 147; R 224

- Among Houses and Demarcations depending on the date of establishment R 225

- Right of the Superiors during their tenure R 224

ORDER OF THE PIOUS SCHOOLS

- Definition C 201; R 225, 299; Nature and goals C 3, 4-10

- Official name C 2; R 1

- Motto R 3

- Is a clerical Institute of pontifical right C 2

- Inspired by the Holy Spirit for the edification of the Body of Christ C 90

- Approved by Paul V as a Congregation C 4; R 300

- Tested through the centuries C 11

- Under the protection of the Blessed Virgin Mary C 11; the Name of the Virgin Mary is its Title R 4

- Feels sent by the Church C 11

- Participates in the evangelizing mission of the whole Church through education C 90; the reason for its existence derives from its office of evangelization R 100

- Constitutes one body in the Church C 201 (cfr. Charism); consists of different levels of communities C 137, 138, 201, 212, 213; R 225 and others; there are also Circumscriptions C 206; R 310

- Has Constitutions C 6

- Follows universal and particular law, Constitutions, Rules and norms C 124, 125, 126, 127; R 5, 6, 7, 9, 16

- Has Superiors invested with authority C 129, 130; R 15, 17.1º-13º, 18, 16; is presided by the Superior General C 202, 204; R 301, who represents the Order R 301

- Has structures similar to the ones of the Church C 123, and organs of government, Offices and Officials C 214; the General Chapter R 16; and, besides, the General Congregation and Curia, the Council of Major Superiors and the General Secretariats R 300, cfr. R 17.12º; finally, the Provinces and other Demarcations and Houses C 135; R 299, 356

- Is a juridical person and is able to acquire and administer C 139; R 300, 431; has administrative structures R 435-439

- We make our profession in it C 119

- Who are religious or members of the Order C 142

- Responsibility in the Order C 133, 134; responsibility that appears more clearly in meetings, Councils and Chapters C 134

ORDERS (sacred)

- The candidates must duly prepare themselves for the Holy Orders after the solemn C 118

- Requirements to receive Sacred Orders R 213, 214

- Letters of Dismissal R 212

- The pastor of the church of baptism must be informed about the reception of the Holy Orders R 212

- What to do in case of serious doubt R 213

- Declaration to be signed by the candidates R 214, cfr. CIC 1036

ORDINARY

- The Superior Provincial (and any Major Superior) is Ordinary in his Demarcation C 174; cfr. CIC 134.1°; R 18

See: Bishops

ORGANISMS (BODIES, ORGANS)

- Common for Demarcations:

- The Fr. General can establish them R 346

- Some Demarcational Congregations can establish them also R 347

- The Community must be equipped with offices and structures C 160

- The Superior General may establish adequate secretariats or offices C 214

- Our religious life requires norms and bodies C 122

- Councils: R 17.12º-13º

- Of the Rector C 165; R 257

- Of the Vicariate Superior C 199; R 297

- Of the General Delegate R 344

- Of the Vice-provincial C 191; R 290, 340

- Of the Provincial C 181; R 273, 279

- Of the General C 206; R 310

- Chapters C 135; R 356; the General Chapter is the supreme organ in the Order and has the supreme internal and legislative authority C 216; R 16

- Council of the Province (Demarcation) R 268, 271

- Secretariats R 269, 329-332, 438; have executive authority R 270, 332

- Council of Major Superiors R 326-328

- Curiae R 17.12º-l3º, 268, 300

Congregations: See: Congregation

- Can give norms C 127; R 16

See: Officials

OWNERSHIP (legal)

- Definition R 429 b)

- Subject of rights R 431

- Safeguards R 433

- A single management for the goods of the patrimony of the Order R 448

- And work R 11

- Appointment of legal Representative R 254.2°

PARALLEL SCHOOL

See: School (Calasanzian)

PARISH

- Acceptance of parishes R 147

- Requirements to accept or abandon them R 147, 244, 245, 246, 247 (a pari)

- In them we will pay special attention, with a Calasanzian spirit, to the education of children and youth C 99; R 148

See: House (religious). Work. Parish Priest

PARISH PRIEST

- The one of the baptism must be informed about the solemn profession and the Holy Orders R 212

- The Major Superior presents the religious to be appointed as parish priest el Superior Mayor R 259

PASTORAL

- Adequate pastoral training for the Juniors C 114; R 196, 197

- We cooperate in our Works with the pastoral program of the diocese C 100; R 124

- Pastoral care for vocations C 39, 103, 104; R 152-156, cfr. R 122

- Pastoral attention to the formation of the parents of our students R 123

- The Superiors must take care of religious: Rector R 253; Provincial R 276.1° (a pari, Vice-Provincial, General Delegate, Vicariate Superior ); the Superior General R 302, 305

- Pastoral care of students R 118, 119, 121, 130

- Pastoral care of alumni R 137

- Pastoral care of lay people R 234

PASTORAL CARE

See: Pastoral. Religious. Sick. Vocational Pastoral

PATRIMONY

- Definition R 429

- Is composed of temporary goods R 429-462 and cultural and artistic goods R 463-470; cfr. C 177

- We see to it that the patrimony both cultural and especially spiritual, is conserved and increased C 177; R 463, 464, 466

- Conservation and management (ordinary administration) R 441

- Changes (extraordinary administration) R 441

- Regarding the patrimony of the Order, there should be only one administration R 448

- The Archives must be in a permanent place R 465

- Delegated powers must appear in the Economic Directory and in the Statutes R 433.4º

- Shared responsibility R 434

- Permission to alienate or to rent R 444

- Consent is required R 445

- Norms for validity R 446

- Limited domain R 431, 452; cfr. C 140

See: Archives. Archivist. Libraries. Librarian. Historian. Administration

PEDAGOGY

- Calasanzian and catechesis R 119

- Boarding schools R 145

- Secretariat of Pedagogy R 150

PENANCE

- We shall strive to fulfill the divine law of penance R 44

- Through penance we are called to ongoing conversion and renewal C 47

- We frequently approach the Sacrament of Reconciliation C 47; R 66

- The Superiors shall encourage the frequent reception of this sacrament R 66

- We do penance when we endure everything with love C 20

See: Mortification

PERMISSION

- Procedure to grant permission to religious R 83

- To extend the Works of the Community R 248

- To publish Works and writings C 80; R 87

- For long trips R 81

- To accept positions or jobs outside R 248

- For a religious to give his name to groups or associations R 248

- Permission and consent for economic matters R 51, 444-446,

See: Administration. Editions. Religious.

PERSONALITY (juridical)

- All Houses, Demarcation and the Order are juridical persons C 139; R 431

- It is acquired in the moment of their canonical establishment C 139; R 244, 284, 300, 431

- When it is lost R 244

See: Establishment. Representation. Juridical Acts. Administration

PERSONAL PROJECT

- Planning R 63

PIARIST CHRISTIAN COMMUNITY

- Configuration R 107

PIARIST PRESENCE

- Definition and establishment R 12

- Relationship with the Piarist Christian Community R 107

PLANNING

- Let it be done and revised for catechesis R 124

- In the training of catechists R 120

- In the dedication to the poor R 102

- The Christian community of the School must perform and periodically revise the planning of the catechesis and all pastoral Works R 124

- At the beginning of their term, the Demarcational Congregation plans the Permanent Formation R 220, cfr. C 120

- When planning community life, the Superior will keep in mind the needs of the Work C 85

- One of the goals of the Chapters is to plan Community life C 168

- Local Chapter R 380.3º

- Chapters R 361.3º

- Schools R 133

- General Visitation R 303

POLITICS

- Behavior on this matter R 52, 84

- The practice of civil rights R 84

- We accept the orientations of the Church R 84

- We should not become members of any political party R 84; cfr. R 248

POSSESSION

See: Administration. Right to possess

POSTULATION

- Is admitted only in extraordinary cases and according to the law R 375

POVERTY

- Following the example of Christ C 63; R 46

- We give witness to the Kingdom C 63, 65

- Being poor, we totally dedicate ourselves to the service of all people C 63

- Example of the Virgin Mary and of our Founder C 64

- We are truly Poor of the Mother of God C 64

- Holy poverty, learning of humility and other virtues C 64

- We live the mystery of Christ who was poor C 65

- Is a sign and a prerequisite of our love for Christ and all people C 65

- Freely and resolutely undertaken C 65

- Demands spirit of poverty C 66; R 46, 48, 51

- Content of the vow of poverty C 68

- Effects of the solemn vow of poverty C 69; R 46, 209

- Demands of religious poverty in material things C 69

- We put all in common C 69; R 46

- Be manifested in our Houses and in our Works C 70

- We also give collective testimony of our poverty C 70; R 46, 48, 51

- We love it as a strong foundation of the Order and we keep it in all its purity C 75

- We shall practice poverty in new ways, more in accordance with our charism and our times C 75

- Demands an accurate and prudent management of our goods C 72; R 430

- The testimony of our poverty strengthens our educational and apostolic activities C 93

- Effects of the vow of poverty:

- The professed of solemn vows loses his capacity to acquire and possess C 69; R 46, 209

- The acts against the vow of poverty are by their own nature null R 46, 209

- By the solemn profession of poverty we reject the personal right to property R 46; cfr. C 68

- Everything that the religious acquires, belongs to the House, the Demarcation or the Order C 69; R 46

- Lifestyle in our communities R 47

- Submitted to frequent revision R 47

- Each Demarcation establishes its own norms for personal expenses R 49

- Personal responsibility regarding the use of the assigned amount R 49

- Poverty when buying and using means of transportation R 51

- The same regarding expensive appliances R 51; Permission from the Major Superior R 51

- If our family is in need, we should inform the Major Superior R 50

- We allow a greater use of our Houses and Works for the benefit of the society, and specially the poor C 73; R 52

See: Religious Vows

POWER

- Legislative belongs only to the General Chapter C 124; R 16

- The General Chapter may delegate this legislative power C 128

- All Superiors have ordinary power for both external and internal forum C 130; R 15

- Ordinary power may be delegated according to the law R 26

- Superiors must exercise it according to the spirit of the Gospel C 129

- Superiors and their Vicars exercise it according to the norms of the law, Constitutions and Rules R 15

- Governing bodies and Superiors can give norms C 127; R 16

- The Superior General has ordinary jurisdiction over the whole Order C 202, 204; R 301

- At the end of his term, the authority of the Superior or Official is extended until his successor takes possession of the office R 22

See: Authority. Forum

PRAYER

- Religious must be given time for prayer C 35; R 62, 63

- Our Savior taught us the necessity of praying by work and example C 40; R 60

- Helps us to ordain everything to the praise of God C 40

- We should not give up our customary communal prayer, and we must endeavor to know, to imitate and to bring to mind Christ often C 41

- To know the will of God and the mystery of Christ through the Sacred Scripture, just as the Virgin Mary C 42

- In solitude C 43

- Nourished by silence C 44; R 75

- Alert to hear more clearly the voice of God C 44

- Prepares for liturgical celebrations C 45

- We celebrate devotedly the Mystery of Christ C 49; R 69

- The Community determines the rhythm of prayer C 50; R 60, 61

- We pray for many needs C 51; R 76

- Is a mean to cultivate chastity C 58, 59

- We must pray in case of a conflict of obedience C 88

- The maturity of the vocation is nourished with prayer and work C 106

- Novices must be instructed in the practice and in the doctrine of prayer C 112

- Initiate the students in the spirit and practice of prayer R 121

- Adapt the Calasanzian practice of the continuous prayer R 121

See: Acts of piety. Liturgy. Liturgy of the Hours

PRE-NOVITIATE

- First stage in the initial formation C 105, 108; R 153

- Goals, place and duration C 108; R 167; where there is an Aspirancy well organized, the last year or a good part of it can be designated a Pre-novitiate R 167

- Must exist in every Demarcation R 166

- All candidates will have a sufficient period of time for Pre-novitiate C 108

- Under the direction of un experienced religious R 163, 167

- Searching the qualities of the candidates C 109; R 168

- Studies before the Novitiate R 165

- Age for Novitiate C 109; R 169.1º a)

- Impediments for Novitiate R 169

See: Formation Houses

PREPARATION

See: Formation

PRESIDENT

See: Superiors

PRESIDENT OF THE CHAPTER

- Who can serve this office R 360

- Proclaims the elected R 368, 369

- Confirms the elected R 394, 395

PRIESTHOOD

- In our Order the way to priesthood is open to all C 143

- The candidates must discern, at the apporpriate time, between clerical or lay state C 118

- After the solemn profession the candidates must duly prepare themselves for the Orders C 118; cfr. R 213, 214

- The candidates, before the solemn profession will present the declaration prescribed by the rules of the Church R 214; CIC 1036

See: Priests

PRIESTS

- In our Order, Superiors must be priests C 129, 161; R 15, 17 (each definition) 18

- His Vicars R 15, 278, 306

- Visitors R 17.11°

- In every one of the Councils R 17.12°-13°, one at least of the Assistants and the Consultors must be a priest R 278.1°, 290, 297, 306.1°, 340

- Calasanz wanted the teachers to be preferably priests C 3

See: Priesthood

PRIVILEGES

- Of novices and professed R 192

- Of those living outside the Community R 239.1°- 2°

See: Rights and Duties

PROCURATOR (in Chapters)

- It is not admitted R 377

PROFESSED

1. Professed of simple vows

- Is a member of the Order C 142; R 222

- Is incardinated in a Province or independent Vice-Province C 146, 150; R 226

- Has rights and obligations C 146, 155; R 222

- Has voice in his Demarcation according to the norms of our law C 149

- Must be assigned to a House C 150

- Can be transferred to another House or Demarcation and there he enjoys the rights and is bound by the obligations of the new situation C 151

- Before his solemn profession must declare his intention to persevere C 116

- With the help of the Superiors must discern between the clerical and the lay state C 118

- Enjoys the same privileges and suffrages as the professed of solemn vows R 192

- Intervention in the community meetings and in the Local Chapter R 350.1º-2º

- Intervention in the Demarcational Chapter R.350.3º

2. Professed of solemn vows

- Is a member of the Order C 142

- Loses the capacity to acquire and possess C 69; R 209.3º

- He ceases to belong to his former diocese R 212

- Has active and passive voice R 228

- Rights and obligations C 148, 155

- Has voice in his Demarcation according to the norms of our law C 149

- Is incardinated in a Province or independent Vice-province and assigned to a House C 150

- Can be transferred to another House or Demarcation and there he enjoys the rights and is bound by the obligations of the new situation C 151; R 230.1º

- Has to prepare himself to receive the Holy Orders C 118; R 213, 214

See: Profession. Admission. Dismissal. Documents

PROFESSION OF FAITH

- All superiors are to make it at the beginning of their term C 132

PROFIT

- We absolutely avoid immoderate profit C 70

- Our institute carries out its educational apostolate without intending to receive any profit C 91

PROGRAM

- Of the Community R 60, 61, 67, 75, 258, 276.3º b), 380.1º

- Approval C 32; R 61

- Help in our daily prayers C 50; R 65

- Planning Summer vacations R 80

- Of studies R 155 c), 165, 196

- Order and way of the candidates R 159

- Of Pre-novitiate R 166

- Of permanent formation R 276.1º c)

- Of the General Visitation R 303

PROPERTY

- Through solemn profession we lose the right to poverty C 69; R 46, 209.3°

- Means of transportation R 51

- Expensive appliances R 51

- The Houses, Demarcations and the Order have the capacity to possess C 139; R 431

See: Right to possess. Administration. Permission

PROPOSALS (PROPOSITIONS)

- They are studied in the Chapters R 361.3º

- To decide about taxes for the Common Fund R.449

- Those coming from the Demarcational Secretariats must be carefully considered and put into practice R 269, 270

- Those coming from the Demarcational Secretariats have a consultative character R 269

- For the appointment of Superiors or Officials, are made by the Major Superior or by the Fr. General R 424

- For Provincial R 393, cfr. R 384.2º d), 388, 389.1º

- For Vice-Provincial R 384.2º d), 388, 407, 408.1º

- For Assistants in a dependent Vice-province R 408.4º

- For General Assistant, outside of Chapter time R 311

PROPOSITIONS IN THE CHAPTERS

- Voting procedures R 378

- Studied in the Chapters R 361.3°, 380.3°, 391.3°, 400.3°, 415.3°

- Must be presented in the Local Chapter R 382

- Propositions approved in the Provincial Chapter (or in independent Vice-Province Chapter) may become Chapter Decrees C 187

PROTECTION

- Minors protection R 103

PROVINCE

- Definition R 265; constitutive elements and reason for its establishment C 170

- To erect, join, assign new boundaries and suppress them belongs to Fr. General C 171

- Local Communities are grouped into Provinces C 36, 137; R 225

- Main rights and obligations C 172, 173

- Can be formed and non-formed R 266, 267

- Are a part of the structure of the Order C 137, 201; R 299

- Have a juridical personality C 139; R 431

- Have the capability to possess and administer C 139; R 431

- Can perform juridical acts of ordinary and extraordinary administration C 139; R 431

- Religious are incardinated in a Province or independent Vice-province C 146, 150; R 226

- The religious may be sent from a Province to another C 151; R 230

- The religious may be excardinated from a Province, and incardinated to another C 152

See: Provincial Community. Establishment. Organisms. Officials

PROVINCIAL

See: Superiors

PROVINCIAL VICARIATE

- It is part of the structure of the Order C 137; R 225

- May be established C 197; R 292

- Conditions to establish it R 292

- Its establishment belongs to the Fr. General C 198

- Has juridical personality C 139; R 284, 431

- Has the capacity to acquire, possess and administer goods C 139; R 431

- The Vicariate Superior heads the Vicariate C 199; R 17.8°, 293

See: Vicariate Community

PUBBLICATIONS

See: Editions

PUBLICATIONS

- Procedures to publish writings or work of religious R 87

- Required permission, according to themes addressed C 80; R 87

- Two copies must be always sent to the Fr. General R 87

QUALIFIED MAJORITY

- In elections:

- When it is required C 136; R 371

- How to compute R 374

- In the election of Provincial and Assistants R 397

- In the election of Vice-provincial and Assistants in an independent Vice-Province R 399, cfr. R 397

- In the election of Superior General R 420

- In the election of General Assistants R 423

- Losing the passive voice R 371

- To ask the Holy See for changes in the Constitutions C 126

QUALITIES

See: Virtues

READMISSION

- The prescriptions of universal law must be observed C 154

- Those who left after Novitiate or after profession R 207

RECREATION

- There should be a recreation room in our Houses for these fraternal meetings R 89

RECTOR

See: Superiors

REGULATIONS

- Definition R 7.11°

- Juridical power R 16

See: Law. Norms

RELATIVE MAJORITY

- How to compute it R 368

- When it is sufficient R 362, 365

RELIGIOUS COMMUNITY

1. In general

- We follow Christ in the community C 16

- Foundation of the community C 25

- Following the example of Christ and the early Church C 25

- Is part of the whole human family and the human group in which we live C 38

- In communion with the universal and local Church and with other Congregations C 37

- Special importance of the vows (communitarian aspect) C 26

- The Eucharist is the center C 28

- We accept and help all religious C 28, 29; even those who have died C 28

- Demands from us the qualities necessary to live together C 29, and virtues C 29, 30

- Means to strengthen the community C 31, 32,33, 35

- Circumstances and personal attitudes that help the community C 31,35

- Is built by the Word of God and the Breaking of the Bread C 46

- The concelebration of the Eucharist is its distinctive sign C 46; R 64

- Each community schedules its daily prayers C 50; R 65

- Communal prayer C 41; daily examination of conscience in common R 67

- In a joyful community, we grow more securely in chastity C 59

- The Superior is the sign of unity in the community C 84

- We offer our personal gifts so that they may be evaluated and used for the common good of the community C 81, 85

- The Superior organizes community life C 85

- Education in faith is the fundamental means of the apostolate within the community in which we live C 96

- Our communities embrace those who work outside our Works C 102

- Candidates may become aware of their vocation in our community C 39, 105; R 163

- The community will come to know better the candidates if they live with us C 108

- The community must help in the ongoing formation C 120; R 217

- In the community the person matures, virtues are strengthened, and our apostolic action is carried out C 122

- Superiors regulate the external life of the community C 129

- Communities are part of the structure of the Order C 137; R 225

- In all communities, matters of great importance should addressed together C 165

- Will maintain unity with other communities especially through the councils, special gatherings and Chapters of its own Demarcation C 169

- Means to contribute to encourage community relationships R 78

- Community life requires structures R 78, 225

- The community helps the Superior to discern God’s Will R 55

- Religious must feel bound by community decisions R 57

- They are Local Communities, Vicariates, General Delegations, Vice-Provinces, Provinces and the whole Order C 137; R 225

2. Local Community or Religious House

- Is the first and fundamental nucleus C 157; R 225

- Each person is the center in it R 241

- Is a part of the structure of the Demarcation and of the Order C 137, 138; R 225

- It must discern, together with the Superior, about new apostolic works to accept R 248

- Cases in which the religious needs a special permission from the Major Superior (to accept positions or offices, to give its name to an enterprise, etc.) R 248

- Living quarters of the religious community R 249

- Conform to Christian love and faithful observance C 162

3. Community of the General Delegation or General Delegation

- What is it C 212; R 341

- It is formed by the Local Communities of the Delegation R 225

- Is a juridical person C 139; R 341, 431, and is a subject of administration C 139; R 431

- Is a part of the structure of the Order C 137, R 225

- Reasons to be established C 212; R 341

- Is presided by the General Delegate, who is a Major Superior C 213; R 342

- About Chapters and appointments R 345

4. Vicariate Community or Provincial Vicariate

- Is formed by the Local Communities of the Demarcation R 225, 292

- Is a part of the structure of the Order C 137, R 225

- Is a juridical person and is a subject of administration C 139; R 284,431

- Reasons to be established C 197

- Is established by the Fr. General C 198

- Is presided by a Vicariate Superior, who is a Major Superior C 199

- Follows proper law and its own Statutes R 294, 295, 298

- A Vicariate Chapter may be celebrated R 410, 411, 412

- The Vicariate Superior represents the Demarcation R 296

- Has bodies and offices C.199; R.297, cfr. 269, 271

- Cfr. Vice-Province (n. 5)

5 Vice-provincial Community or Vice-Province (dependent and independent)

- Is formed by the Local Communities of the Demarcation R 225, 285, 335

- Is a part of the structure of the Order C 137; R 225

- Is a juridical person and is a subject of administration C 139, R 284, 335, 431

- There may be dependent Vice-Provinces C 189; R 284 and independent C 189; R 335

- Is established by the Fr. General C 190, 212

- Everything said about Provinces applies to Vice-Provinces, provided adequate adjustments C 189

- Goals to reach C 192

- They have a Vice-Provincial Treasurer C 194; R 435, 438; and the same bodies that the Provinces C 189

- Is presided by Fr. Vice-Provincial, who is a Major Superior C 191; R 17.5°, 287, 337; and represents the Vice-Province R 288, 338

- Has its own formation Houses C 193

- Because of the decrease of Houses or religious, it may be declared Provincial Vicariate R 286, 336

- Chapters and appointments R 289, 339

- Has the same bodies and offices that the Province R 269.2°, 271.2° (Secretariats, Council of the Demarcation), 17.13° (Council, Congregation, Curia)

6. Provincial Community or Province

- Definition C 170; R 225, 265

- May be composed of Houses, Works, Provincial Vicariates and dependent Vice-Provinces C 170; R 265

- Is a part of the structure of the Order C 137; R 225, 265

- Reasons to be established C 170

- Is established by the Fr. General C 171; they may be formed and non-formed R 266, 267

- The Fr. General may modify the Provinces C 171; R 267

- Is presided by the Provincial Superior C 170; R 17.3°, 265; he represents it R 275

- Has many bodies and offices R 268, 269-270 (Secretariats); R 271 Secretariats); (Council of the Province) R 17.13, 273 (Council, Congregation, Curia); (R 282 (Treasurer, Secretary, Historian); other organs may be created R 272

- Rights and duties of the Province C 172

- Collective responsibility of all religious C 173

- Responsibility is practiced especially in assemblies, Councils and Chapters C 185; such meetings are to be diligently promoted by the Province C 185

- We have to see to it that, both cultural and spiritual, patrimony of the Province is preserved and increased C 177; R 463

7. General Community: cfr. Order of the Pious Schools

See: House, Order of the Pious Schools

RELIGIOUS IDENTITY

- Never must be hidden C 67

RELIGIOUS IN CHARGE OF MASSES

- Appointment and assignments R 260

See: Officials

RELIGIOUS (Piarist)

- Calasanz proponed his companions the practice of the three evangelical counsels, to which he added the fourth specific vow C 3

- Is cooperator with the truth C 6, 19; R 114

- Profess to be an authentic Poor of the Mother of God C 2, 7, 64

- Accepts the law as means of expressing love C 13

- Follows principles which safeguard the rights of the human person, as well as the laws of the Church, and our Constitutions and Rules C 13

- Is called to the perfection of charity C 4, 16

- Through the first profession he becomes member of the Order C 142, R 222; Novices are not members of the Order C 142

- Has the rights and obligations both by universal law and our own statutes, that is, he is a person in the Order R 222

- The rights and obligations come from his condition of Christian and from his religious consecration C 144

- The rights and obligations are determined in the Constitutions and Rules R 222

- Is submitted to our laws R 14, 15

- Is a member of the Local Community R 10.1º, 225, 243 and the center of it R 241

- Must be incardinated into a Province and assigned to a House R 226, 227

- Is also a member of the Demarcational Community and of the General Community R 58

- Everything is at his service C 122, 123, 124; R 241

- Must adapt his life to the evangelical Calasanzian lifestyle R 38, 117

- He takes a religious name and keeps and renews his Piarist identity R 215, 223

- Is the first subject of the pastoral care of the Superiors R 253, 276.1º, 302-305

- Shares the responsibility R 13

- In the practice of his ministry he enjoys proper freedom, total obedience and personal responsibility R 138

- The vitality and renewal of the Order depends on his good and continual formation R 153; he must study at university R 197, 219; or, at least, must acquire some technical expertise R 197, 219; he is under the obligation of his own permanent formation R 216, 217

- Concerned about educating our students to enjoy their leisure time, he shares his free time with children and youth R 135

- Participation in Community meetings R 227

- Active and passive voice R 228

- Never shall hide his religious identity C 67

- He may be in a special situation R 238, 240; lose his rights R 239; leave the Order C 153, 154

See: Professed. Educator

RELIGIOUS PROFESSION

- Profession formula C 119; should appear in all its integrity and undivided, even in the case the candidate makes some personal provisions R 210

- Through our profession we give our whole life to the service of our brothers C 12

- Through our profession our life of love becomes more like Christ’s love C 54

1. Simple Profession

- Petition and declaration of vocation and honest intention before the simple profession R 183

- Admission to the simple profession C 113; R 185

- Cession of goods, use and revenue, before making the simple profession C 113; R 184 (Deed of Will)

- Conditions for the validity of the profession R 186

- Spiritual retreat before the profession R 187

- Admission to the profession R 185 e), 190; and also, the renewal R 191

- It is made for one year and it is renewed every year C 115; R 188

- May be done outside the Novitiate House R 189

- Can be anticipated no more than fifteen days R 189

- Duration of the simple profession C 115

- Copies of the profession and stored in the Archives R 190

- Who can extend or reduce the time of profession C 115

- Petition for the renewal of vows and for admission to the solemn profession, and admission of the simple profession and the renewal of vows R 191, 200, 201

- Dispensation from simple vows R 205

- Once the time of simple profession is finished, the religious has to make his solemn profession, or leave the Order C 116; R 202

- The Major Superior may exclude the candidate from the renewal of vows as well as from the solemn profession R 202, 205

2. Solemn Profession

- Preparation C 116; R 208

- Spiritual retreat before the solemn profession R 208

- Declarations before the solemn profession C 116; R 214; CIC 1036

- Petition, admission and reception of the solemn profession R 200; C 117; R 203 and R 186 e)

- May be anticipated, but not more than three months R 204

- Requirements for its validity R 203

- What to do in the case of physical, psychical illness or insanity R 206

- Renunciation to material goods before the solemn profession R 209.1º-2º (Will)

- Copies of the profession and stored in the Archives R 211

- Notify to the Parish Priest of baptism the solemn profession R 212

- With it we lose the capacity to acquire and possess any goods C 69; R 209.3º

- He ceases to belong to his former diocese R 212

See: Professed. Admission. Dismissal. Age

REMOVAL

- Superiors and Officials may be removed from their office or transferred R 24

- That cannot be done in the last three months before the Local Chapters R 25

RENEWAL (of Vows)

- Annual renewal, petition, admission and who receives it R 188, 191, 200, 201

- The documents must be kept in the prescribed Archives R 190

- Sickness excludes renewal R 206

- Daily renewal for devotion, more solemnly twice a year C 24

See: Admission. Dismissal. Profession

RENTING (Leasing)

- Conditions for renting or leasing goods R 444.2°-3°, 446.4°

- When requesting for permission, a written report of a specialist must be included R 446.4°

- Abide to the norms decided by the respective Bishops Conference R 444.3°

See: Administration

REPORT

- Every Superior to the Chapter R 361, 380, 391, 400, 415

- Inform of the Canonical Visitation to the Superiors R 348

- The General Treasurer to the General Congregation and to the General Chapter C 209; regarding other treasurers, cfr. C 183 (Provincial Treasurer)

- The Superior General to the Holy See R 302 n)

- The Fr. Provincial to Fr. General about the Province R 276.5º f) (the same other Major Superiors)

See: Information. Administration

REPRESENTATION

- The Fr. General represents the Order C 202; R 301

- The rest of Major Superiors, each one his own Demarcation:

- Fr. Provincial C 174; R 275

- Fr. Vice-Provincial in an independent Vice-Province C 191; R 338

- Fr. Vice-Provincial in a dependent Vice-Province C 191; R 288

- Fr. General Delegate R 343

- Fr. Vicar Provincial R 296

- The Local Superior C 164

- The Legal Owner (Rector) of the Work and the Director of the Work R 255

- This representation may be delegated: cfr. The mentioned numbers

See: Personality

RESIDENCE

- Of the religious Community R 249

- The residence of the Fr. Provincial must be fixed, and to change it the permission of the Fr. General is required, R 277

RESIGNATION

1. To the position or office

- Before or after the election R 367.2º

- Of the Superior General: procedure to follow R 425

- Of Major Superiors and Assistants R 426

- Of Superiors and Officials appointed by Fr. General R 426

- Of Superiors and Officials appointed with the “nihil obstat” of the General Congregation R 427

- Of other Officials R 428

- The resignation must be presented always in writing R 425-428

- The one who resigns must remain in his office until his resignation is admitted R 22

2. To active and passive voice

- Procedure for the candidates proposed by the General Congregation R 393 or by the Provincial Congregation R 407, 408

- In general R 376

- In the Chapters, after the exploratory scrutiny R 367.2º

3. Of goods after solemn profession

- Must be done, and as far as possible, valid in civil forum R 209.1º-2º

REVISION

- Of our life of poverty R 47

- Of the expenses of the religious R 49

- Of the Community Program R 61

- Of our life and apostolate R 61, 67, 74

- Of our educative activities R 141

See: Revision of the Administration. Censors. Administration

REVISION (of the administration)

- In the Local Community:

- Must be done every three months: Administration and Masses R 460.1º

- Will be done by the Community R 460.2º

- The Treasurer will give the Community an account of the economic matters every three months R 460.3º

- In general:

- We follow the General Economic Directory of the Order and the Demarcational Economic Statutes R 457, 461, 462

- Must be done at least twice a year by the Major Superior R 458

See: Administration

RIGHTS AND DUTIES (or obligations)

- We follow principles which safeguard the right of the human person C 13; and we promote them C 74, 73; R 52

- The Church proclaims the rights of the human person and the community C 74

- By the vow of poverty we give up the right to use and dispose of temporal goods C 68

- Religious of solemn vows lose their capacity to acquire, possess and administer any goods C 69; R 46, 209

- The character and maturity of the candidates must be attested, with due regard to the rights of the person C 109

- Our religious acquire rights and duties by virtue of their condition of Christians and consecrated C 144; R 222

- Rights of the novice C 145; of the professed of simple vows C 146; of the professed of solemn vows C 148;

- To participate in the community meetings R 227; to vote R 228, cfr. R 350, 351

- Of the novices to suffrages and privileges R 192

- The order of precedence among religious C 147; R 224

- To active and passive voice C 149; R 228

- To incardination and excardination C 152, 150; R 226

- In case of being sent to another House or Demarcation (inscription) C 151; R 230.1º-2º

- To obey the Superiors C 155

- Right to appeal C 155

- The religious dismissed or departed C 153

- Special situations (absents, etc.) R 239.1º (loss of rights)

- Legitimately absents R 239.2º

- Superiors and Treasurers have the right to perform juridical acts of administration C 141, 166, 182, 183, 194, 209; R 433, 435, 439

- Of the Local Superior C 162-167; R 253

- Of the Superior Provincial C 174, 176-184, 185, 187, 188, 190; R 276

- Of the Vice-Provincial C 191-194; cfr. R 287, 288

- Of the Superior General to create Houses and Demarcations and to change the boundaries of Demarcations C 171, 190, 198, 212, 213; R 243-246; other rights and duties C 202, 204-215, 135 (convoking Chapters); R 302-307

- Of the Assistants and Consultors C 163, 165, 181, 191, 199, 206; R 257, 279-281 (cfr. Voting and Vote), 290, 297, 310, 316 (cfr. Voting and Vote), 340, 344

- Of the Vicariate Superior C 199; R 293-294, 296

- Of the Provincial Vicar R 278 (personal)

- Of the General Vicar R 306; C 208 (Successor)

- Of the Vicar of the F. General R 307

- Juridical persons are subjects of rights and obligations C 139; R 432

- Juridical persons have also the right to acquire, possess and administer C 139; R 431

- Rights of the Province (and, by analogy, of the Demarcation) C 172

- The order among Demarcations and Houses R 225

RIGHT TO POSSESS

- All Houses and Demarcations have this right C 139, 141; R 431,433

- This right can be limited C 140; R 431, 452

- The personal right is lost when making solemn vow of poverty C 69; R 46, 209

See: Administration

ROMAN PONTIFF

- We obey him by reason of our vow of obedience C 79

- Is the chief interpreter of the will of Christ C 79

- We must acquire the Calasanzian virtue of fidelity to the Sovereign Pontiff R 39

- When he dies, every Community will celebrate a mass for his soul R 97

See: Holy See

RULES

- Definition (complement the Constitutions) R 5

- Juridical power: they are internal laws C 127; R 5, 16

- We follow our Rules (laws and Constitutions) C 13

- The Latin text is the authentic text R 6

- Translations need the approval of the General Congregation R 6

- Changes and suspension R 36

- Authentic interpretation R 36

- Dispensation R 37

See: Constitutions. Law. Norms

SACRAMENTS

- Nourish the intimacy with God C 58

- The educational work is accomplished through the ministry of the Word and Sacraments C 3

- The Blessed Sacrament will be reserved in the chapel of the Community C 50; R 77

- The concelebration of the Eucharist is encouraged C 46; R 64

- We come to the Table of the Lord every day C 46

- We persevere in the Word of God and in the Breaking of the Bread C 46

- We approach frequently the Sacrament of Reconciliation C 47; R 66

- The Sacrament of Reconciliation we are called to conversion and permanent renewal, and we return to the state of peace with God the Father, the Church and the brothers C 47

- The Superior should take care that the sick receive the sacraments R 91; the sick themselves should ask for them R 91

SACRISTAN

- Appointment and mission R 259, 264

SALARY

- We will pay a just and fair salary to our employees R 140

SALE

See: Alienation

SCHOOL (Calasanzian)

- Calasanz founded a new school, first example of integral, popular and Christian education C 2; R 125; is a means to evangelize R 125

- It is intimately connected with the founding charism C 2; R 125

- Tries to free children and youth from the bondage of sin and ignorance C 2

- Essence, qualities and organization R 125-143

- Goals it tries to achieve C 97

- From the beginning it was open to everyone C 97, 99

- Is a fundamental means for our ministry C 99; R 125

- Is the foundation of public education C 99

- Is animated by the Evangelical spirit of freedom and love C 97

- Offers an image of the world, life and man illuminated by faith C 97

- Develops the talents of the students C 97

- Where our school activity is not forbidden, we shall not abandon it R 125

- Must become a true educational community R 126

- Is creative and leads to the continuous renewal of the society R 133; cfr. C 5, 74

- Adopts the most up-to-date methods and means R 133

- Open to life, offers a more qualified service to the local needs R 134

- Has a Declaration of Ideals R 128, and an Educational Project R 129

- The Christian message is proclaimed and helps to make it accepted and deepened R 130

- Rounds out formal education with parallel school and mass-media R 134

- Provides education for leisure time R 135; professional and vocational orientation R 136; pastoral care to our alumni R 137; lay teachers R 139; other co-operators in our schools R 139; accepts coeducation R 142 and a Directory 143

- May become a socio-cultural center R 134

See: Education. Institute. Ministry. Catechesis

SCRUTINIES

See: Chapters. Absolute majority. Qualified majority

SECRECY

- Regarding matters addressed in Chapters R 362

- All are bound to secrecy, especially regarding matters of greatest importance R 362

- Scrutinizers are especially bound, even after ending their office R 362

- Assistants and Consultors are bound, in matters studied in their own Congregation R 28.2°

- Scrutinizers in the election of Delegates and Alternates for the Demarcational Chapter and in the election of candidates for Provincial and Vice-provincial are bound to secrecy R 384.4°

SECRETARIAT

1. In general

- They can be General R 300, 329; Provincial and from other kind of Demarcations R 268, 269, 438

- President R 269, 438.2º, cfr. R 310

- Kind of activities they can perform (pedagogical, pastoral, economical, juridical, etc.) R 150, 269, 329, 438

- They work under the direction of their own Major Superior R 270, 332

- Helps the respective Treasurers R 438

- Enjoy executive administrative power R 270, 332

2. Provincial (and from other kind of Demarcations)

- Existence R 150, 268, 269, 270, 438,

- Establishment R 269, 438.1º

- Activities they perform (pedagogical, pastoral, etc.) R 269

- May be presided by a Provincial Assistant or an expert R 269.1º

- Their proposals have a consultative character R 269.1º

- Enjoy executive administrative power R 270

- Of Economy

- Establishment R 438.1º

- It is convenient for them to have the help of an external consultancy R 438.3º

3. General

- Definition and mission R 329, 438.2º

- The Fr. General appoints their members R 329

- Promote meetings and other initiatives R 330

- Establish contacts with the Inter-Demarcational Secretariats R 331

- Enjoy executive administrative power R 332

- Their expenses are supported by the Common Fund of the Order R 448 a)

- General Assistants may be presidents of the General Secretariats R 310

- General Economic Secretariat

- Establishment R 438.2º

- Is presided by the General Treasurer, or a General Assistant, or an expert R 438.2º

- Make proposals regarding the taxes for the Common Fund of the Order R 449

4. Inter-Demarcational

- Definition and mission R 333

- Intensify the relationship among religious R 331

- Enjoy executive administrative power R 334

See: Organisms

SECRETARY

1. In the Chapters

- Election and mission R 362

2. Local

- Appointment R 259 d)

- Duties R 261

3. Vice-provincial (and in other kind of Demarcations)

- Appointment and duties: cfr. Provincial Secretariat

- Is a member of the Vice-provincial Chapter R 402.3º

4. Provincial

- Appointment C 184; R 282

- Is a notary C 184

- Is a member of the Provincial Chapter R 392.1º d)

5. General

- Appointment and duties C 211; R 322

- Can be one of the General Assistants C 211

- Is a notary C 211; R 322

- When and where can exercise his right to vote R 352

- Is a member of the General Chapter R 416.4º

- By his office, he does not lose the passive voice for Provincial R 355

- He can participate in the meetings of the General Congregation to substitute absents R 30

See: Officials

SEPARATION (from the Order)

- May happen by transfer to another Institute, by departure or by dismissal C 153

- In the procedure of separation the prescriptions of universal law must be observed C 154

See: Dismissal. Departure. Transfer. Experiment. Readmission

SICK

- Care of the sick and elderly R 91

See: Sacraments

SICKNESS

- Physical as well as psychological sickness may be a motive not to admit a candidate to renew his vows or to make the solemn profession R 206

- When the candidate cannot be excluded R 206

- If the candidate of simple vows becomes insane, he cannot be dismissed from the Order R 206

See: Expulsion

SIGN

- Our Constitutions and Rules are a sign of our consecration C 13

- Our life hidden in Christ may shine in the world as a sign of the good things of the age to come C 21

- We shall become a sign of unity in the Eucharistic sacrifice of the Mass C 27

- The communal celebration of the Eucharist is a sign of fraternity C 46

- Concelebration is a special sign of our union with Christ R 64

- The evangelical counsel of chastity is a sign of the future world C 55

- The Superior is a symbol and foundation of unity in the community C 84

SILENCE

- We keep internal and external silence R 75

- The spirit of prayer is nourished and made strong by silence C 44; cfr. R 62

See: Prayer

SOCIETY

- Its reform is the aim of our ministry C 5, 74; R 100, 133

- Its operation is necessary in the field of education C 98

See: Institute. Ministry. Education. Calasanzian School

SPIRITUAL DIRECTION

- We give great importance to it C 50

SPIRITUAL RETREAT

- Must be done every year C 50; R 73

- Before the novitiate R 171

- Before the simple profession R 187

- Before the solemn profession C 116; R 208

See: Acts of piety

SPIRITUAL RETREATS

- Must be held several times a year C 50; R 74

See: Acts of piety. Prayer

STATION (or House in the broad sense)

- Definition R 10.3°

See: House

STATUTES

- Definition R 7.3°

- Directory R 143; will be drawn by the Demarcational Congregation R 143

- The Provincial Vicariate has its own Statutes R 295, that should be revised every four years R 298

- General Delegation R 345

- Inter-demarcational Novitiates and Juniorates will follow their own Statutes R 158

See: Law. Norms

STRUCTURES

- Our structures originate from the very life of the Church, in which we participate C 123

- The Order consists of Communities at different levels C 137, 138

- The house must have a sufficient number of structures C 158

- The Local Community must be equipped with the necessary offices and structures la C 160

- Rights and duties of the Provincial on these matters R 276. 3°

See: Bodies. Officials

STUDENTS

- Whenever possible it is desirable that they participate with us in Morning and Evening Prayers R 65

- They should receive an integral formation C 92

- An adequate education in faith C 96, 97

- Their natural talents must be developed C 97

- They are members of the educative community R 127

- When both sexes are present in the school, an adequate and harmonious education must be provided R 142

- Invitation to the Eucharist on feast days and week days: R 131

- We guide them with the greatest respect towards a personal encounter with Christ R 112

- We must educate them to appreciate all values R 113

See: Education. Calasanzian School. Institute

STUDIES

- Before novitiate R 165

- During novitiate R 178

- Juniors will diligently complete their curriculum of studies C 114; R 196, 197

- The theological curriculum must be followed in a Formation House or in another property established center of studies R 196

- Other studies during the theological curriculum R 196

- Juniors must study in universities or technical centers C 114; R 197

- Studies for those who do not intend to enter the clerical state R 196

- Ongoing formation after the prescribed course of studies C 120-121; R 215-220

SUFFRAGES (for the dead)

- We help our deceased ones with suffrages C 33

- For each deceased Piarist R 94, 95

- In the death of the member of an Institute of the Calasanzian Family with which we have a communion of suffrages R 94

- In general R 96

- When the Supreme Pontiff dies R 97

- For the novices and professed of simple vows R 192

- When the parents of a religious die R 97

- For our relatives, benefactors and those who received the Letter of Fraternity R 97

- For other members of the Calasanzian Family R 97

- Sometimes Morning or Evening Prayer for the Dead is required R 96, 97

- Demarcational Chapters can add other suffrages for their dead R 98

SUPERIOR GENERAL

See: Superiors

SUPERIOR PROVINCIAL

See: Superiors

SUPERIORS

1. In general

- All Superiors exercise the ministry and service of authority C 84; R 14, 18

- Superiors and their Vicars must be priests C 129; R 18

- Kinds of Superiors and definitions R 17.1º-9º

- Superiors may be Major and Local R 18

- Who are Major Superiors R 18

- Who are not Superiors strictly speaking R 19

- Conditions for their appointment C 131

- A consultation is required before their appointment C 130

- After their election they need to be confirmed C 130

- They are appointed or elected for a fixed period of time C 131; cfr. R 17.1º-9º

- At the beginning of their term in office they are to make a profession of faith C 132

- They have power of jurisdiction for both the external and internal forum C 130; R 15, 18

- They may dictate norms or precepts within the limits of their jurisdiction R 16; cfr. C 127

- They exercise a true mediation to live the mystery of Christ’s obedience C 129

- Rights and duties C 84, 85, 81, 86; for the good of the Order and its government C 133, or the Province C 173

- Order of precedence among the religious C 147; R 224

- Must encourage the enforcement of the norms by which the Order is governed R 14

- Only in the most severe cases they give orders in the name of holy obedience C 81; R 59

- In the case of a conflict of obedience C 88, cfr. C 87; R 240; CIC 696-701

- The can delegate their ordinary executive authority R 26

- Sometimes the need the vow of their Council R 27-33

- The Community helps them to discern the will of God C 77; R 55

- Who helps them in their office C 163

- The will of God is not always shown through the majority nor through pressure groups R 56

- Take care that every religious has time enough for personal prayer R 62, 63

- Encourage the frequent reception of the Sacrament of Reconciliation R 66

- Are vigilant in the admission of candidates to the Novitiate C 109

- Help the candidates to discern their option for priestly or laical life C 118

- Pastoral care of the sick and elderly religious R 91

- Promote among the religious catechetical formation R 120, and try that all our religious study in the University, or acquire a technical expertise R 197

- They can perform expenses and juridical acts of ordinary and extraordinary administration C 141; R 433.2º

- Under their direction and with his permission the administration is carried out R 436

- In economic matters they give authorizations always in writing R 446.9º

- They must take care that the cultural patrimony is kept and increased R 463

- Presents his Report to his own Chapter R 361.1º

- Poverty demands the permission and dependence on the legitimate Superiors C 68, 69; R 46

- Obedience demands submission to the orders given by the Superiors C 76, 155; R 53

- The Superior who resigns, continues in his office until the acceptance of his resignation R 22

- Continues exercising his office, once his term is finished, until the new Superior takes possession of his office R 22

- Gives to his successor all documents and other things belonging to his office R 21

- Superiors can be removed from their position and transferred to other offices R 24

- During the last three months before the Local Chapters they should not be removed from their office R 25

2. President (at the image of the Rector)

- Definition R 17.10º; Appointment R 250.4º; Rights and duties R 253

- He is not a Superior strictly speaking R 19; he is not a Rector 17.9º

- By law he is not a member of the Provincial Chapter R 392.1º f); nor in the Vice-Provincial Chapter R 402.4º

- May not be a priest R 17.10º

See: Superiors (in general).

3. Rectors

- Definition R 17.9º

- Qualities C 161, R 354. 1º

- Appointment and duration C 161, R 250.1º-2º

- Appointment for less than four years R 17.9º

- Successive appointments R 250.2º

- His appointment requires secret voting R 424.1º b) g)

- A suitable consultation is to precede the appointment C 130, 161; it is expedient that before naming the Rector the Fr. Provincial consults with the Community R 251

- Passive voice for this office R 353.2º

- He exercises his service with ordinary authority of jurisdiction R 14, 15

- He is a Superior strictly speaking R 18

- Is at the head of a religious House/Community in a strict sense R 10.1º-2º; C 161

- The Filial Community depends on him R 10.4º

- Can dispense from disciplinary norms, within the limits of his jurisdiction R 37

- When there is a legitimate reason, can allow a religious to spend some days outside the House R 80

- He may approve long and expensive trips of some religious R 81

- Notifies the death of a religious, and he himself or his delegate, with other religious should take care of the room of the deceased R 92, 93.1º

- The Vice-rector must take care of the room of the deceased Rector R 93.2º

- If that is the case, the Novitiate is under his jurisdiction in matters related to the Community family R 159

- They may allow the novices to attend to the community meetings R 227

- All assigned to his community depend on him R 230.1º, and also the guests R 231

- The Superiors of both communities must decide regarding the economic aspects of the guests R 231

- They cannot accept other offices of great responsibility R 250.3º

- Rights and duties C 162, 164; R 253

- Represents the Community C 164

- If that is the case, the Director of the Work is under him as religious R 254.1º

- Civil responsibility in the Works R 255

- Convokes the Community R 258.1º, and sometimes needs its consultative vote R 258.2º-3º, 445.3º

- Has two Consultors C 165; R 257

- Is consulted for the appointments of Officials R 259 a), and he himself appoint minor Officials R 259 d)

- Has the duty of watching that the obligation of Masses is properly fulfilled R 260, 460

- Who help him in the exercise of his office and in the pastoral activities C 163; R 264

- Is a member of the Council of Local Superiors C 181

- May be a member of the Council of the Province R 271.1º

- Sometimes needs the vote of the Community R 258, 445.3º

- May not allow the professed of simple vows to attend to the Community meetings R 350.1º

- Presides the Local Chapter R 360; presents in it his Report R 361.1º, 380.1º

- Is a member of the Provincial Chapter or, respectively, of the Vice-Provincial Chapter C 188 d), R 392.1º f); C 196 b), R 402.4º

- Under his direction is carried out the local administration C 166; R 436, 439,

- Is answerable for the debts contracted with his permission R 432

- May perform acts of ordinary and extraordinary administration C 141; R 433

- In economic matters, gives his permissions in writing R 446.9º

- Takes care that the books of domestic Administration and the book of Masses are inspected, and he signs them R 460.1º-2º

- Takes care that the Treasurer informs the Community about the economic situation of the House R 460.3º

- Takes care of the cultural patrimony R 463

- When a House or a Work is suppressed or temporarily abandoned, he makes an inventory of all properties, not excluding the library and archives R 467

- In case of resignation, he presents it to the Major Superior R 427

- If it is a General House, the resignation is presented to the Fr. General R 426

See: Superiors (in general)

4. Major Superior

- Who are Major Superiors R 18

- They possess ordinary ecclesiastical power of jurisdiction C 130; cfr. R 15, 18

- A suitable consultation is to precede their appointment C 130; When they are elected they need the confirmation C 130

- Before their election there is an exploratory non-canonical voting R 367. 1º

- Outside Chapter time, their appointment requires a secret voting R 424.1º d)

- Qualities and duration in the office, determined in our law C 131, R 354.1º

- It is not expedient that the Major Superiors be appointed Rectors R 20

- Exercises the service of authority in his own Demarcation R 14

- Sometimes he needs the vote of his Council R 27-33, 445.2º

- May dispense from disciplinary norms R 37

- Is informed when the family of religious needs help, so that he can decide what to do R 50

- Decides about the expediency of buying means of transportation or expensive appliances R 51

- Gives norms regarding the use of our buildings outside of school time C 73; R 52

- Can transfer Superiors and Officials, and all religious, within his Demarcation R 24, 58

- Gives guidelines about the Community programs R 61

- Approves the programs of the Communities R 61

- Gives permission for long and expensive trips R 81

- Grants permission to live outside the religious House, but not for more than a year, unless it is to recuperate from sickness, to study or to practice some apostolic work of the Order R 82, 238.1º a), 239.2º, cfr. CIC 665, par. 1

- What to do when he gives permission directly to a religious R 83

- Promotes meetings with other Communities R 86

- Gives permission and the “nihil obstat” to publish works C 80; cfr. R 87

- Notifies the death of a religious from his Demarcation to the Fr. General and to his own Demarcation R 92

- When he dies, his Council takes care of his room R 93.3º

- Prepares the Declaration of Ideals of the Demarcation R 128

- Approves the Educative Project R 129

- Gives his permission for special activities R 144

- Appoints:

- Coordinators for vocational pastoral R 156

- Assistants to the Masters R 161

- Professors for the Formation Houses R 161

- Treasurer for the Demarcation C 182, 194, cfr. R 282

- In the Local Communities, Vice-rectors R 256; and Consultors R 257, cfr. C 165

- Major Officials in Communities and Works R 259 a), b), c)

- Appoints or presents the Director of the Work or gives the “nihil obstat” for his appointment R 254

- Presents to the Bishop the religious candidate for Parish Priest R 259 c)

- There are matters of his particular concern in the promotion of the vocational pastoral R 155

- He prepares some religious to become formators R 155 b), 160

- Can create Secretariats of Pastoral and Pedagogy and other organs of government R 150

- Orients, approves and y evaluates the activity of the Works R 151

- Prepares Communities ready to receive young men who may have religious vocation R 164

- Determines about studies before Novitiate R 165

- Decides about the activities, place and duration of the Pre-Novitiate R 166

- Appoints a religious in charge of the Pre-Novitiate R 167

- Checks the aptitude of the candidates before the admission to the Novitiate R 168

- Admits to the Novitiate C 110, cfr. R 170

- Can dismiss novices R 182

- Can extend the duration of the Novitiate R 182

- Can establish periods of time for the Novices to exercise the apostolate C 111

- Visits the Novitiate at least three times a year R 181

- Allows the novices to spend a determined length of time in another canonical House R 172

- The Master sends him s report about the Novices, even in an Inter-Demarcational Novitiate R 181

- Admits to the simple profession C 113; R 185

- Permits that the profession be anticipated and made outside of the Novitiate House R 189

- Signs the document of the profession, if he is the one who has received it R 190

- Receives the simple profession and the renewal of vows R 191

- In very rare cases he grants permissions to some juniors for other studies while they study Theology R 196

- The Master sends him the report about the Juniors R 199

- Can extend the duration of the simple profession up to nine years C 115

- Admits to the renewal of vows R 201

- Admits to the solemn profession and receives it C 117

- May not to admit a candidate to the renewal of vows nor to the solemn profession R 202; cfr. 206

- Receives the petition of the candidate for the renewal of vows and for admission to the solemn profession R 200

- It is his responsibility to prepare especially the candidates for their solemn profession R 208

- He must discern with the candidates about their choice for clerical or laical estate C 118, cfr. C 143

- Admits to the Holy Orders R 213, and gives letters of dismissal R 212

- Notifies the pastor of the church of baptism about the solemn profession and the reception of Holy Orders R 212

- Promotes the studies in the University R 197, 219; and the permanent formation C 120, 121; R 215-220

- Assigns the religious to Communities R 229

- Assigns at least four religious to each Community R 242, 243

- Those sent to his Demarcation are under his authority R 230

- Gives norms regarding the use of the Piarist habit C 67

- Admits «associates» and determines clearly their juridical situation R 233

- Promotes and coordinates the lay associations in his Demarcation R 234

- May request the Fr. General to grant Letters of Fraternity and he informs him about the granted ones every year R 237

- What to do in the case of a conflict of obedience of a religious when receiving an order from his Superior C 88; R 240; cfr. CIC 696-701

- When accepting new activities the Community, needs the permission of the Fr. Provincial R 248

- To accept permanent commitments outside our institutions or to give his name to a group or society, a religious needs the explicit permission of the Major Superior R 248

- May order our religious to accept permanent positions, offices or duties outside our institutions R 248

- Will visit thoroughly all our Houses and Works of his Demarcation and will send a report to his immediate Major Superior and to Fr. General R 348

- Is a member of the Council of Major Superiors C 172 d); R 326

- May request the celebration of a meeting of the Council of major Superiors R 327, 328

- His advice is required to designate the members of the General Secretariats R 329

- Creates the Secretariats of his Demarcation R 269, and directs their activities R 270

- Has a right to vote in the meetings of Community in his Demarcation R 352

- If in the Demarcation there is only one Community that cannot celebrate the elective Local Chapter, he designs the nearby Community where the religious may gather R 385

- If there are several Communities that cannot celebrate elective chapter, he gives norms so that the religious may exercise their chapter rights R 384

- Is a member of the General Chapter C 217 c); R 416.3º

- May perform juridical acts of ordinary and extraordinary administration C 141; R 433.2º

- The economic administration is carried out under his authority R 436

- He cannot exercise the office of Treasurer in his own Demarcation R 437

- Appoints the members of the Economic Secretariat R 438.1º

- Is answerable for the debt contracted with his permission R 432

- Sends any kind of petitions to the immediate Major Superior R 446.8º

- In economic matters, he gives his permission always in writing R 446.9º

- Gives his opinion regarding new taxes for the Common Fund of the Order R 449

- Gives norms regarding the economic centralization of his Demarcation R 454

- Inspects at least twice a year the finances of each House and Work in the Demarcation R 458

- Takes care of the conservation and increase of the cultural patrimony R 463, cfr. R 463-470

- Appoints competent people to take care of the cultural patrimony R 464

- Decides where must be transferred the library and the archives of a suppressed or abandoned House R 467

- Appoints experts, to be consulted before selling or expurgating our cultural goods R 468

- Can accept some resignations R 427, 428

- If he resigns his office of Major Superior, must present it to the Fr. General R 426

5. Vicariate Superior

- Definition C 199; R 17. 8º

- Presides over a Provincial Vicariate C 199; R 17. 8º, 293

- Is a Major Superior C 199; R 18, 294

- Appointment C 199; R 293; a suitable consultation is to precede C 130, and a secret voting R 424.1º b)

- Qualities C 199; R 354.1º

- Possess ordinary power of jurisdiction C 130; R 293

- Exercises it in his own Demarcation R 14

- By his office has the authority granted by our law R 293, 294 (cfr. Major Superior, with some reservations), and according to the Norms or Statutes of the Vicariate R 294

- Represents his Demarcation and may delegate to others this official representation R 296

- Has two Consultors R 297

- Sometimes he needs the vote of his Council R 27-33, 445.2º

- Can give norms R 16, cfr. C 127; and dispense from disciplinary norms, within the limits of his jurisdiction R 37

- Can delegate some faculties R 26

- Is a member of the Council of major Superiors R 326, of the Provincial Chapter C 188 c), R 392.1º e), and of the General Chapter C 217 c); R 416.3º

- Visits all the Houses and Works of his Demarcation and send a report to his immediate Major Superior and to Fr. General R 348

- Regarding the economic administration:

- He can perform expenses and juridical acts of ordinary and extraordinary administration C 141; R 433.2º

- Under his direction and with his authorization the administration of the Vicariate is carried out R 436

- Is answerable for the debts contracted with his permission R 432

- Forwards to Fr. Provincial any kind of requests in economic matters R 446.8º

- In economic matters, his permission must be always given in writing R 446.9º

- Secretariats and Council of the Vicariate R 269.2º, 271.2º ; cfr. R 438.1º

- May be removed from his office and transferred R 24

- With the due reservations, all faculties, rights and duties of a Superior, in general, and of a Major Superior belong to the Vicariate Superior R 294

- In case of resignation, he must present it in writing to Fr. General R 426

See: Superiors (in general). Major Superior. Voting. Vote

6. General Delegate

- Personality:

- Definition R 17.6º

- To establish his candidacy a relative majority is sufficient R 365.3º

- A secret voting is required R 424.1º d)

- Qualities R 354.1º; is a Major Superior R 18, 342

- Is at the head of a General delegation R 17.6º, 342; has its representation and may delegate it R 343

- Has two Assistants, who form the Council of the Delegation and, together with him, the Congregation of the General Delegation R 344, 17.13º

- Regarding appointments, he will follow the Statutes of the Delegation R 345

- Authority:

- He has ordinary authority of jurisdiction, by virtue of his office and by our law C 130; R 342; and the faculties that the Norms or Statute of the Delegation give him R 342

- As a Superior and a Major Superior, keeping the due proportion, he enjoys the faculties mentioned before, according to the Norms of the Delegation cfr. R 342

- Exercise of his authority:

- He exercises it in his Demarcation R 14; he needs sometimes the voting of his Council R 27-33, 445.2º

- He can dictate norms within his own jurisdiction C 127; R 16

- He may delegate some faculties R 26

- Can dispense from disciplinary norms R 37

See: Superiors (in general). Major Superior. Voting. Vote. Administration

7. Vice-Provincial

- In general (Vice-provincial in dependent or independent Vice-province)

- Personality:

- Definition R 17.5º

- Qualities C 131, 191; R 354.1º

- Is a Major Superior C 191; R 18, 287, 337

- Is at the head of a Vice-province R 17.5º, 287, 337

- Has two (or four) Assistants, that form the Council and, together with him, the Vice-provincial Congregation R 290, 340; at least one of the Assistants must be a priest R 340

- For the designation of candidates, in the Local Chapters, in the case of a Vice-province the relative majority is enough R 365.2º

- Passive voice for this office R 353.6º

- Authority:

- Has ordinary authority of jurisdiction C 130; R 18

- Has the same faculties as Fr. Provincial, except those that the immediate Major Superior reserves for himself C 191; R 287, 337

- Exercise of his authority:

- Sends the lists of those who have passive voice for Delegates and Alternates and for the office of Provincial and Vice-provincial R 384.2º

- Must be sent to him the votes for the election of Delegates and Alternates and for the office of Provincial and Vice-provincial R 380.2º a) b), 384.3º, 385

- In a dependent Vice-province

- Personality:

- In chapter time, is appointed R 407 or elected in the Vice-provincial Chapter R 408; outside chapter time, he is appointed R 289

- Canonical voting is required R 424.1º a) c)

- For a third consecutive appointment he needs the dispensation from the Fr. General R 291

- Exercise of his authority:

- Rights and duties R 287; cfr. R 276

- Sends to Fr. Provincial the votes of the candidacies for Provincial and Vice-provincial R 380.2º f)

- Administration:

- Transfers to the Fr. Provincial any petitions R 446.8º

- Is a member of the Provincial Chapter C 188; R 392.1º c)

- In an independent Vice-province

- Personality:

- In and outside chapter time, is elected or appointed according to R 274, 339; cfr. R 397

- Is elected with a canonical voting R 364.4º, 369-372, cfr. R 424.1º a)

- Is appointed with a canonical voting R 424.1º d)

- Exercise of his authority:

- Has the same faculties as Fr. Provincial, except those that the Fr. General reserves for himself; cfr. Superior Provincial R 337

- Rights and duties R 337, cfr. R 276

- Sends to the Fr. General the votes of the candidacies for Vice-provincial R 380.2º e)

- Administration:

- Transfers to the Fr. General any petitions R 446.8º

See: Superiors (in general). Major Superior. Superior Provincial. Voting. Vote. Administration

8. Superior Provincial (in a formed or non-formed Province)

- Personality:

- Definition C 170; R 17.3º

- Appointment: in chapter time, he is elected C 174, 175; R 274, 391.2º a), 394; outside chapter time he is appointed C 175; R 274; passive voice for this office R 353.15º

- For the election of candidates, relative majority is enough R 365; his election is done with a canonical voting R 364.3º, 369-372, 424.1º a); he needs to be confirmed C 130; R 394

- Appointment C 175; R 274, 424.1º a); is done by secret voting and needs a suitable consultation C 130

- Is a Major Superior and the Ordinary of his Demarcation C 174; R 18

- Has four Assistants (in a non-formed Province, two, or also four) R 279, who form the Council R 17.13º, and together with the Provincial Superior, the Congregation R 15.13º; one at least must be a priest R 279.2º

- Is elected for four years R 397, cfr. C 131; and for the third consecutive election, he needs a qualified majority R 374, 397; before the election an exploratory scrutiny is done R 367.1º

- As a Superior and a Major Superior, he enjoys the faculties mentioned before, (cfr. Major Superior)

- Authority:

- Possess ordinary ecclesiastical power of jurisdiction C 130; R 18

- Exercise of his authority:

- He is fully dedicated to the service of his Demarcation R 276

- Rights and duties C 174, 176-179; R 276 (pastoral, vocations, structures and use, problems, union with the Order), 277 (residence)

- May reserve for himself some faculties (regarding Vice-provinces and Vicariates) R 287, 294

- Presents the plan to open or to close Houses and Works R 244, 245, 246, 247

- Puts into practice the decisions of the Chapter C 187

- Appointments. He appoints:

- Rectors and Presidents C 161; R 250

- Directors of Works R 254, 259

- Major Officials: for the Community R 259 (Vice-rector R 256 and R 259 a), Consultors R 257 and 259 a), in charge of the Masses R 260 and 259 a), Treasurer C 166 and R 259 a)); for the Work R 259 (Director R 254 and R 259 b), Administrator R 259 b), Coordinator of Pastoral, Secretary of Studios, Rector of the Church R 259 c)); he also presents the religious to be appointed parish priest R 259 c)

- in the Province: Provincial Vicar R 278; Provincial Treasurer C 182, R 282; Provincial Secretary C 184, R 282; Archivist R 464; Historian R 282, 470

- Vice-provincial outside chapter time and in some cases, in chapter time R 289, cfr. R 404-409; C 191

- Vice-provincial Assistants outside chapter time and, in some cases, also in chapter time R 289, cfr. R 404-409

- Vicariate Superior and his Consultors C 199; R 293, 297

- Provincial Assistant outside chapter time R 279.2º

- Master of Novices and Juniores C 161; R 159; and his Assistants R 161

- Directors of the Aspirancy, Vocational Center, Pre-novitiate R 163, 167

- Professors for the Formation Houses R 161

- Appoints the members of the Secretariats R 269

- Chapters:

- Convokes, with the permission of Fr. General, the Provincial Chapter C 180

- Announces the Vice-provincial, Vicariate and Local Chapters C 180, 135; R 357

- Accepts resignations of Delegates to the Provincial Chapter R 376.2º

- Considers the reasons to refuse to attend to the Local Chapter R 376.3º

- Notifies the number of Delegates and Alternates to be elected, and send the list of the religious who have passive voice for the office of Provincial and Vice-provincial R 384.2º

- Give norms about the Vicariate Chapter R 411, 412

- The votes for the election of Delegates and Alternates and the candidates for Provincial and Vice-provincial must be sent to him R 380.2º a) d) f), 384.3º, 388.1º

- Send to the Fr. General the lists of candidates for Provincial and Vice-provincial R 388.2º

- Is a member of the Provincial Chapter C 188; R 392.1º a)

- May propose names for the office of Assistants R 396

See: Superiors (in general).Major Superior. Voting. Vote

9. Superior General

- Personality:

- Definition: C 202, 204; R 17.1º, 301; receives different names R 17.1º

- Election: is elected in a General Chapter C 202; R 301, 415.2º; for a fixed time, and he doesn’t need to be one of the members of the Chapter C 203; for six years R 420

- A canonical voting is required R 364.5º, 369-372

- Passive voice for this office R 353.6º

- For a second consecutive election a qualified majority is required C 136; R 420

- Is the Supreme Moderator, Major Superior and Ordinary for the whole Order R 17.1º, 18, 301; C 204

- Qualities C 202, 204; R 301, 354.1º

- Is at the head of the whole Order C 202; R 17.1º, 299

- Has four Assistants, one for each Circumscription C 206; R 310; who form the Council, and with Fr. General, the General Congregation R 17.12º

- Sometimes he needs the voting of his Council R 27-33

- Authority:

- Possess ordinary ecclesiastical power of jurisdiction in the whole Order C 130, 202, 204; R 301

- Represents officially the Order C 202; R 301; and can delegate this representation R 301

- Main rights and duties C 204, 205; R 302

- Can delegate some faculties R 26, 301

- Can dictate norms and precept R 14, 16; cfr. R 7.1º-11º

- With delegated legislative power he can also issue general decrees C 128

- Can give practical interpretations about the Constitutions C 126

- Interprets the Rules R 36

- Dispense from disciplinary norms R 37

- In a serious case he can ask the Holy See for the dispensation or suspension of the Constitutions C 126

- Notifies the whole Order about the decease of religious R 92

- Approves the Declarations of Ideals of the Demarcations R 128

- Confirms and, in case of disagreement, decides about excardination - incardination C 152

- May impose the excardination R 226

- Give letters of obedience to pass from a Demarcation to another R 230

- Grants Letters of Fraternity R 237

- Receives reports from the Provincial Superiors (Major Superiors) C 178

- May reserve for himself some faculties regarding non-formed Provinces R 267; independent Vice-provinces C 191, R 337; and General Delegations R 342

- Gives the “nihil obstat” for many appointments; cfr. Nihil obstat

- Gives permission to transfer the residence of the Fr. Provincial R 277

- Makes canonical and pastoral visitations to the whole Order C 205; R 303-305

- Exceptionally can give permission to somebody different from the General Procurator, to deal business with the Holy See R 318

- Accepts resignations R 426, 428

- Governs as a Provincial the Houses and Demarcations under his direct jurisdiction C 213; R 302 l), 424.1º f)

- Procedure to follow in the case the Fr. General decides to present his resignation R 425

- Appointments. He appoints :

- General Vicar R 17.2º, 306; Vicar successor C 208; and Vicars of Fr. General R 307

- Masters of Novices and Juniors in the General Houses R 424.1º f)

- Rectors in the General Houses R 250, 424.1º f)

- General Assistant outside chapter time R 311, 424.1º e)

- General Procurator C 207; R 317

- General Treasurer C 209; R 321

- General Secretary (of the Order) C 211; R 322

- General Postulator R 323

- General Archivist R 324, 464-465

- General Historian R 324, 470

- General Delegate C 213; R 17,6º, 345

- Delegates of the Fr. General R 17.7º, 308, 309

- Major Superiors and General Delegate outside chapter time (except dependent Vice-provincial and Vicariate Superior) R 424.1º d); C 169

- Gives dispensation for the Vice-provincials in a dependent Vice-province may be confirmed for a consecutive third time R 291

- Appoints or confirms in his offices the Superiors and Officials in the Houses and Demarcations under his direct jurisdiction C 213

- Establishments and suppressions:

- Of Novitiates and Juniorates R 157

- Of several Novitiates in the same Demarcation R 157

- Of Houses and Works C 159, 212; R 10.1º, 244, 247

- He is the only who can dispense for the establishment of a House with less of four religious R 243

- Of Provinces C 171; Vice-provinces C 190; Provincial Vicariates C 198; Houses and Demarcations under his direct jurisdiction C 212

- Reductions:

- From formed Province to non-formed R 267

- From Vice-province to Provincial Vicariate R 286, 336

- From canonical House to Filial Community R 243

- Formation Houses:

- As Supreme Moderator, He is the only who can permit that a candidate makes his Novitiate in a canonical House different from the Novitiate R 172

- He is the only who can reduce to less than six years the time of simple profession C 115

- He is the only who can dispense of the simple vows R 205

- He is the only who can readmit those who left the Order R 207

- He is the only who can dismiss a professed religious R 205; cfr. Dismissal

- Assigns religious to the Houses and Demarcations under his direct jurisdiction C 213

- Chapters:

- Convokes them or gives permission to convoke them C 135, 213; R 357, cfr. C 180

- Announces the time for the celebration of the Provincial Chapters C 180; R 358

- Can preside any Chapter in the whole Order R 360

- Admits resignations from Delegates to the General Chapter R 376.2º

- The votes for the candidates to the offices of Vice-provincial in an independent Vice-province and of General Delegate must be sent to him R 380.2º e), g)

- The lists with the candidates to the offices of Provincial and Vice-provincial in a dependent Vice-province must be sent to him R 388.1º-2º

- Provincials and Provincial Assistants are confirmed in his name, alter the election R 394, 395; and the same, a pari, in independent Vice-provinces R 399

- Decides the time for the celebration of the General Chapter R 413

- Is a member of the General Chapter C 217; R 416.1º

- Promulgates the prescriptions and Minutes of the General Chapter R 419

- Organs of government:

- Creates organs and general offices C 214; R 150

- The General Chapter C 216; R 300

- The General Council, the General Congregation and the General Curia R 17.12º, 300

- The Council of Major Superiors C 215; R 326-328

- The General and National Secretariats R 329-332, 438.2º

- Administration:

- Performs acts of ordinary and extraordinary administration C 141; R 433

- Under his authority the administration of the whole Order is carried out R 436

- Is responsible for the debts contracted with his permission R 432

- Gives norms and permissions in economic matters for the Demarcations under his direct authority R 444.4º

- Sends to the Holy Order the petitions from Houses, Demarcations and the Order R 446.8º

- In economic matters, he gives permissions always in writing R 447.9º

- Imposes taxes for the Common Fund of the Order C 210; R 449

- Gives norms for the economical centralization R 454

- Permits loans among Demarcations R 456.2º

- His approval is required for the Provincial Chapters or Provincial Superiors should limit the right of property of the Houses C 140; R 452; he himself can limit it R 452

- At least twice a year examines the administration of the Houses under his direct authority R 458

- Takes care of the cultural patrimony R 463-470

- When his term ends, he transfers to his successor everything related to the administration R 21

See: Superiors (in general). Major Superior.Voting. Vote. Administration

SUPREME PONTIFF

See: Roman Pontiff

SUPRESSION (of Houses and Works)

- Procedure to follow R 246; C 159

- The diocesan bishop must be consulted R 246

- A specific formal decree is required R 244

- We will see whether it can be assumed by another Community or ecclesial institution R 247

SUSPENSION

- Of the Constitutions, we have to ask for it to the Holy See C 126

See: Law. Constitutions. Rules

TAXES

- The Fr. General may levy ordinary and extraordinary taxes C 210; R 451

- Also the FF. Provincials R 450, 451

- With the permission of their own Provincial also the Vice-Provincials and Vicariate Superiors R 451

See: Administration

TEACHING

See: Education

TEXT

- The Latin text is the authentic text of our Constitutions and Rules R 6

- Translations to vernacular language need the approval of the General Congregation R 6

TIME

- To relax, attend to the community meetings and have personal prayer R 48, 62

- Of Novitiate can be extended, but for no longer than six months e R 182

- Between the end of the Novitiate and solemn profession C 115

- Who can reduce or extend it C 115

- Educate to the good use of leisure time R 135

See: Novitiate

TITLE (of the Order)

- The name of Mary us the Title of the Order R 4

TRANSFER (inside the Order)

- To another House or Demarcation C 151; R 230.1°

- Passive voice of the religious assigned by obedience to a General Delegation R 230.3°

- Superiors and Officials may be transferred to another office or position R 24

See: Inscription in another Demarcation. Residence

TRANSFER (outside of the Order)

- To another religious Institute C 153; R 238.1° e)

- Procedure and effects R 238.1° e)

- To a secular Institute R 238.1° e)

- Loss of active and passive voice R 239.1° a), b)

- Right to spiritual privileges R 239.1°

See: Separation

TREASURERS (ADMINISTRATORS)

1. In general

- Treasurers must be appointed in order to administer the economic patrimony R 435

- Kinds of Treasurers R 435

- They must be appointed in each House and Work, Demarcations, and in the whole Order R 435

- They can perform expenses and juridical acts C 141; R 433

- They must administer with fidelity R 435

- They have their own responsibility under the Superiors R 436

- Mission R 439

- The Secretariats of Economy help the Treasurers R 438

- Major Superiors cannot be Treasurers R 437

2. Local Treasurer

- Appointment C 166; R 259 (by the Major Superior)

- There may be two: one for the Community and another for the Work R 259

- Is the single or main administrator, under the direction of the Superior C 166; R 439

- Procedure according to the norms of the Congregation or the Demarcation R 430; cfr. R 143

- He must prepare the annual budget R 442

- Every three months he will give to the Community an account of the economic matters R 460.3º

3. Vice-provincial Treasurer (of a General Delegation, of a Provincial Vicariate)

- Is appointed by the immediate Major Superior C 194; R 435

- Has some responsibilities, under the direction of his own Superior R 436

- He can perform expenses and juridical acts, in ordinary as well and in extraordinary administration C 141; R 433, cfr.441

- Regarding ordinary administration R 441, 442

- Regarding extraordinary administration R 441, 444, 445.2º, 446

- He has the help of the Secretariat of Economy cfr. R 438

4. Provincial Treasurer

- Is appointed by the Major Superior C 182; R 282

- One of the Provincial Assistants can be appointed to this office C 182

- Has some responsibilities, under the direction of his own Superior C 182; R 436

- He must report to the Provincial Congregation when economic matters are being considered C 182

- Regarding ordinary administration R 441, 442

- Regarding extraordinary administration R 441, 444, 445.2º, 446

- Regarding the communication of goods R 450-451; economical centralization R 453; He can perform expenses and juridical acts, in ordinary as well and in extraordinary administration C 141; R 433, 441

- He has the help of the Secretariat of Economy, cfr. R 438

- Renunciation R 428

5. General Treasurer

- Is appointed by the Superior General C 209; R 321

- It is not expedient that he be one of the General Assistants R 321

- He has authority under the Superiors C 209; R 436

- He can perform expenses and juridical acts, in ordinary as well and in extraordinary administration C 141; R 433, cfr. R 441

- Regarding ordinary administration R 441, 442

- Regarding extraordinary administration R 441, 444, 445.1º, 446

- Regarding the communication of goods R 448-449

- He must report to the General Congregation when economic matters are being considered C 209; he renders an account to the General Congregation every year, and also to the General Chapter C 209

- He has the help of the General Secretariat of Economy R 438.2º

- The General Treasurer himself presides the General Secretariat of Economy R 438.2º

- He does not lose the passive voice for the position of Provincial during his office R 355

- He can be removed or transferred to another office R 24

- Resignation R 426

TRIPS

- Long and expensive R 81

- Requirements to give permission R 81

USE

- We will allow a greater use of our facilities C 73; R 52

- The novice must give up the use of his goods before the profession C 113; R 184

See: Cession. Resignation

USUFRUCT

- The novice is to cede the revenue of his goods before the profession C 113; R 184

See: Cession. Resignation

VACATIONS

- We will schedule summer vacations according to the needs of the House R 80

- Fr. Provincial will give instructions regarding summer vacations R 276.3° e)

See: Trips

VEHICLES

See: Means of Transportation

VICAR

- Must be a priest R 15, 18

1. General Vicar

- Definition R 17.2º

- Appointments and duties R 306

- Successor Vicar C 208

- Vicar of the Fr. General R 307

2. Provincial Vicar (permanent)

- Definition R 17.4º

- Appointments and duties R 278

See: Superiors

VICE-PROVINCE

- Can be dependent or independent C 189; R 284

1. Dependent

- Is a part of the structure of the Order C 137; R 225, 299

- May be established C 189; R 284

- Conditions to establish it R 285

- Its establishment belongs to the Fr. General C 190

- Has juridical personality C 139; R 284, 431

- Has the capacity to acquire, possess and administer goods C 139; R 431

- If it loses the conditions to be a Vice-province, keeps the same rights until Fr. General declares it a Provincial Vicariate R 286

- What has been said about the Province applies to it, provide adequate adjustments C 189

- Should have a Formation House C 193

- The Fr. Vice-provincial heads it R 17.5º, 287

2. Independent

- Is a part of the structure of the Order C 137, R 225, 299

- May be established C 189, 212; R 335

- Conditions to establish it R 335

- Its establishment belongs to the Fr. General C 190, 212

- If it loses the conditions to be a Vice-province, keeps the same rights until Fr. General declares it a Provincial Vicariate R 336

- Has juridical personality and has the capacity to acquire, possess and administer goods C 139; R 284, 335, 431

- Depends on the immediate jurisdiction of the Superior General C 212; R 335

- What has been said about the Province applies to it, provide adequate adjustments (more adequately than in the case of a dependent Vice-province) C 189

- Is to have Formation Houses C 193

- The Fr. Vice-provincial heads it R 17.5º, 337

See: Vice-provincial Community. Superiors (Vice-provincial). Chapters

VICE-PROVINCIAL

See: Superiors (Vice-provincial)

VICE-RECTOR

- Appointment and duties 163; R 256, 259

- Is not a Superior in the strict sense R 19

- Does nor have authority of jurisdiction R 256

See: Officials

VIRGIN MARY

See: Mary

VIRTUES (and qualities)

- Affection C 30

- Affinity with the poor C 93

- Austerity C 66

- Brotherhood C 106, 137

- Charity C 4, 7, 9, 29, 30, 47, 53, 78, 83, 88, 97, 138, 156

- Chastity, poverty, obedience C 3, 53, 55, 56, 59, 61; C 63, 64, 66, 68, 69, 70, 72, 75, 76, 79, 83, 81, 89, 93; C 119 (formula of the profession)

- Collaboration C 98

- Continence C 55

- Contrition C 43 (frequent acts)

- Correction (mutual) C 30

- Determination and action C 103

- Devotion C 58

- Diligence C 69

- Discipline C 106

- Docility C 84

- Faith C 25, 48, 61, 92, 96, 97, 107, 138

- Fidelity C 58, 89, 107

- Freedom C 97

- Friendliness C 29

- Friendship C 61

- Generosity C 104

- Holiness C 97

- Hospitality C 73

- Humility and gratitude C 1, 6, 43, 57, 64, 107

- Joy C 59, 104

- Justice C 74

- Love C 17, 18, 20, 21, 25, 30, 53, 56, 59, 65, 102, 107, 162

- Moderation C 61

- Patience C 7, 9, 17

- Prayer C 59, 88, 106

- Qualities and talents:

- Personal C 82, 93, 97

- Of the candidates C 109

- Of the Local Superior C 161

- Of the Major Superiors C 130

- Of the Vicariate Superior C 199

- Of the Vice-provincial C 191

- Of the Provincial Superior C 174

- Of the Superior General C 202

- Respect C 29, 30

- Serenity C 88

- Silence C 44

- Silence and prayer C 116

- Simplicity C 19

- Sincerity C 29, 104

- Solidarity C 93

- Truth C 6, 19, 97; R 114

- Watchfulness C 61

- Work C 59, 66, 69, 106, 138

- Virtues and qualities in community life C 29, 30

- Specific Calasanzian virtues R 39, 40

- Virtues that Calasanz taught by word and deed R 117

VISITATION

1. Canonical

- Of the Superior General C 205; R 303, 304, 348-349; procedure R 304

- Of the Superior Provincial (Major Superior) C 179; R 348; report that must be sent to the Superiors R 348

2. Pastoral

- The Fr. General will make it several times C 205; R 305

- The General Assistants will visit their own Circumscription and the whole Order, in case of need R 310

- The Fr. Provincial (Major Superior) will make it frequently C 179; R 276.1º a)

3. Novitiate

- The Major Superior will visit the Novices at least every four months R 181

- Before this visitation, the Master of Novices will send a report about the Novices R 181

4. Juniorate

- The Superior Mayor will visit R 199

VISITORS

- Definition and types R 17.11°

- Mission R 348

VOCATION

- God called us to work in this most fruitful harvest C 6

- Our Constitutions help us walk more securely along the path of our vocation C 13

- Christ calls those he desires C 15

- Through Baptism we are called to the summit of perfect charity C 16

- Joined together into a community by the same Piarist vocation C 25

- We are called to communal life by the Word of God C 27

- We accept our brothers and we help them live their vocation C 28

- We answer the call of the Lord more easily by our community way of life C 39

- According to the spirit of our vocation we engage in activities that foster education C 99

- We help those who live with us to respond to their vocation C 104

- In all Formation Houses all should live in brotherhood so that they work the growth of their vocation C 106

- The formation of the candidates achieves awareness and growth of their vocation C 105, 108

- With the ongoing Formation try to meet the responsibilities of their vocation C 120

- Structures are at the service of the vocation C 123

- Superiors with their authority confirm their brothers in attaining the goals of the Piarist vocation C 129

- The Order helps the professed of solemn vows to accomplish the progress on their vocation C 148

- The Local Community is established to express the intimate nature of religious vocation C 157

- Fr. Provincial confirms the religious in their vocation with example and word C 174

- All Piarist Communities participate in the same vocation and constitute one single body in which our common vocation and special charism are better maintained, promoted, developed and adapted to the circumstances of different times and places C 201

VOCATIONAL PASTORAL

- Need R 152

- Prayer and action are needed R 76, 152; C 39, 103, 104

- Common and personal responsibility R 154

- Responsibility of Major Superiors and their Councils, and also of the religious R 155

- Special duty of the Provincial Superior (i.e. of the Demarcation) R 276.2°; and the Superior General R 302 e)

- Directory for Vocations R 155 c)

- A Delegate of the Fr. General for Vocational Pastoral should be appointed R151

- Every Demarcation and House should appoint a coordinator for vocational pastoral R 156

- The Patrimony of the Order must support the Work of Vocations R 448 e)

- An amount of money must be assigned for this purpose in the budget R 156

VOCATIONS

- Every day we apply ourselves with determination to foster vocations C 103

- Fr. Provincial shall promote vocational work with the greatest interest C 176

- Fr. Vice-provincial will work diligently for the increase of local vocations C 192

- Fr. General takes care that our vocations are properly tended C 204

- The vocational work is supported by the Common Fund of the Order R 448 e)

See: Vocational Pastoral

VOICE

1. Voice without vote

- In the Community meetings R 350. 1º

- In the Local Chapter R 350.2º

- In the Demarcational Chapter R 350 3º; Proportion to be kept R 350.3º

2. Active voice

- In Community meetings and in the Local Chapter R 351.1º

- In Vice-Provincial, Provincial and General Chapters R 351.2º; C 196; R 402; C 188; R 392.1º; C 217; R 416

- In the Chapter of the Delegation, according to the Statutes R 345

- In the Vicariate Chapter R 411

- Who are deprived of it R 239

3. Passive voice

- For different positions R 353.1º-7º

- Are deprived of it:

- Religious in a special situation R 239

- Those who refuse to attend to the Local Chapter R 376.3º

- For the position of Provincial: the Fr. General, the General Assistants and the General Procurator, during their term in office R 355

- Those who don’t obtain a qualified majority C 136; R 371; cfr. R 397, 420, 423

- Those who are assigned to a General Delegation don’t lose the passive voice for some offices in their own Demarcation R 230.3º

4. Active and passive voice

- Only the professed with solemn vows can have it R 228

- Resignation:

- To one of the or to both R 376.1º

- The Delegates to the General or Provincial Chapter R 376.2º

- Who are deprived of both R 239

VOTE

- The faculty to vote by letter or by proxy is excluded R 377

1. General Norms

- Can be consultative, deliberative y collegiate R 27.1º

- Superiors need, sometimes, the vote of their Council R 27.2º-3º-4º

- The Superior has the right to vote in the councils celebrated to ask for the deliberative vote R 27.5º

- How to know what kind of vote it is about R 28.1º

2. Consultative Vote

- a) The religious Community. Its vote is required:

- To admit the candidate to the simple profession R 185

- To admit for the renewal of vows R 201

- To suppress the religious House R 246

- To accept new activities R 248

- To limit the right to possess R 452

- To contract a loan within the same Demarcation or between different Demarcations (if they are concerned) R 456

- Appoint:

- Officials in the Community and in the Work R 259; cfr. R 256, 257

- Rectors and Presidents R 251

- In some particular cases R 258.2º (cfr. Voting)

- b) Consultors (of the Rector)

- The Rector will ask their advise or consent C 165; R 257

- Votes are cast according to R 27-33

- Practically is always a consultative vote, if that is the will of the Superior R 28

- cfr. Deliberative Vote

- c) Consultors of the Vicariate Superior

- cfr. d) Vice-provincial and General Delegation Assistants, according to the faculties attributed to them

- d) Vice-provincial and General Delegation Assistants

- Their vote is required:

- To remove from their office, or to transfer, those appointed with consultative vote R 24

- To approve the program of the Communities C 32; R 61

- In vocation matters, to create Formation Houses and structures, to prepare formators and to write the Directory R 155

- To admit the candidates for the renewal of vows R 201

- To admit the candidates for the solemn profession C 117

- To exclude the candidates from the renewal of vows or from the solemn profession R 202

- To accept resignations from Officials appointed with consultative vote R 428

- To create the Economic Secretariat of the Demarcation R 438.1º

- To give their opinion about loans among Demarcations R 456.2º

- To give their opinion about some appointments R 424.1º b), 250.1º b), c)

- To appoint Vice-Rectors R 256 and other Officials of the Community or the Work R 259

- e) Provincial and Vice-Provincial Assistants in an independent Vice-province

- Their vote is required:

- To remove from their office, or to transfer, those appointed with consultative vote R 24

- To approve the program of the Communities C 32; R 61

- In vocation matters, to create Formation Houses and structures, to prepare formators and to write the Projects of the Demarcation and the Houses R 155

- To admit the candidates for the renewal of vows R 201

- To admit the candidates for the solemn profession C 117

- To exclude the candidates from the renewal of vows or from the solemn profession R 202

- To appoint Vice-Rectors R 256 and other Officials of the Community or the Work R 259

- To accept resignations from Officials appointed with consultative vote R 428

- To create the Economic Secretariat of the Demarcation R 438.1º

- To give their opinion about loans among Demarcations R 456.2º

- To put into practice Chapter decrees and propositions C 187

- f) General Assistants

- Their vote is required:

- To give their permission for the transfer of Fr. Provincial’s residence R 277

- To appoint a General Treasurer R 321

- To designate religious for the General Secretariats R 329

- To create the General Economic Secretariat R 438.2º

- To create bodies or offices of government C 214

- To accept resignations from Officials appointed with consultative vote R 428

- To give permission for the appointment of Rectors for a period of time inferior to four years R 17.9º

- g) Council of Major Superiors

- Its vote is required:

- In the case of resignation of the Superior General R 425

3. Deliberative Vote

- a) The Community. It is required:

- To acquire means of transportation R 51

- To acquire costly appliances R 51

- In some specific cases R 258.3º (cfr. Voting)

- In some specific cases in economy and other matters R 445.3º; cfr. R 446.1º

- b) Consultors of the Rector. Their vote is required:

- In the case mentioned in CIC 703 (cfr. R 257)

- c) Consultors of the Vicariate Superior

- cfr. d) Vice-provincial and General Delegation Assistants, according to the faculties attributed to them

- d) Vice-provincial and General Delegation Assistants

- To establish juridical norms R 7.3º

- To remove from their office, or to transfer, those appointed with deliberative vote R 24

- To designate the religious that will replace the absent members of the Demarcational Congregation R 31

- To give permission to live outside the community, but not longer than one year, and in some cases, even longer R 82

- To prepare the Declaration of Ideals R 128

- To approve the Educative Project R 129

- To draw the Directory for Works R 143

- To plan the Permanent Formation R 220

- To prepare the project to open or to close Houses or Works R 245, 246

- To approve ant to implement the proposals from the Secretariats R 269.2º, 270

- To constitute the Council of the Demarcation R 271.2º

- To program the General Visitation R 303

- To appoint or to designate:

- Masters of Novices and Juniors in independent Vice-provinces R 159

- Assistants to the Masters R 161

- Rectors (in independent Vice-province) R 250.1º a)

- Gives its opinion about the appointment of Masters of Novices and Juniors (in dependent Vice-provinces) R 159

- Directors of Works R 254

- candidates for the office of General Assistant outside chapter time C 206; R 311

- To admit candidates to the Novitiate C 110

- To admit novices to the simple profession C 113; R 185

- To admit «associates» R 233

- To establish apostolic activities for the novices C 111

- To give norms about the use of the religious habit C 67

- To approve the excardination-incardination (Independent Vice-province) C 152

- Chapters:

- To scrutinize the ballots or to appoint a committee to do it in the election of Delegates and Alternates with the system of single list R 384.4º

- Also, to scrutinize the ballots in the election of candidates for the offices of Provincial and Vice-provincial R 388.2º

- To designate an Alternate to replace a Delegate by right when he is not a member of the Congregation of the Demarcation R 386.2º

- To prepare the Report and propositions for the Demarcational Chapter R 400.1º.3º

- Administration:

- To permit two possibilities in appointing Treasurer in a small Community R 439

- In different economic cases R 445.2º

- To give norms about the economic centralization R 453, 454

- To permit loans within the Demarcation R 456

- e) Provincial Assistants

- Their vote is required:

- To establish juridical norms within the limits of their jurisdiction R 7.3º

- To remove from their office, or to transfer, Officials or Rectors appointed with deliberative vote R 24

- To designate the religious that will replace the absent members of the Demarcational Congregation R 31

- To give permission to live outside the community, but not longer than one year, and in some cases, even longer CIC 665, par. 1 (R 82)

- To prepare the Declaration of Ideals R 128

- To approve the Educative Project R 129

- To draw the Directory for Works R 143

- To give norms about the use of the religious habit C 67

- To give norms about the official representation by the Rector (or other) and the Director of the Work R 255

- To admit alternates R 233

- To plan the Permanent Formation R 220

- To prepare the project to open or to close Houses or Works R 245, 246

- To approve and to implement the proposals from the Secretariats R 269, 270

- To prepare the Statute or Norms for the Provincial Vicariate R 295

- To express their opinion about the reduction of a Vice-province to Provincial Vicariate R 286

- To admit candidates to the Novitiate C 110

- To admit novices to the simple profession C 113; R 185

- To establish apostolic activities for the novices C 111

- To appoint or to designate:

- Masters of Novices and Juniors R 159

- Assistants to the Masters R 161

- Rectors in Provinces and Vice-provinces R 250.1º a) b), c)

- Presidents R 250.4º

- Directors of Works R 254

- Provincial Assistants outside chapter time R 279.2º

- Vice-provincials R 289, 404-408

- Vice-provincials Assistants R 289, 404-408

- Vicariate Superiors C 199; R 293

- Consultors of the Vicariate Superiors R 297

- Candidates for the position of General Assistant, outside chapter time C 206; R 311

- Regarding appointments: cfr. R 424.1º- 2º

- To accept the resignation of those appointed with deliberative vote R 427

- To approve the excardination-incardination C 152

- To express their opinion about:

- Changes in the Province C 171

- Time for the celebration of the Provincial Chapter C 186; R 358

- Establishment of a Vice-province C 190

- Establishment of a Provincial Vicariate C 198

- New constitution of the Provincial Chapter R 392.2° and Vice-provincial Chapter R 403

- Chapters:

- To scrutinize the ballots or to appoint a committee to do it in the election of Delegates and Alternates with the system of single list R 384..4º

- To scrutinize the ballots in the election of candidates for the offices of Provincial and Vice-provincial R 388.2º

- To designate an Alternate to replace a Delegate by right when he is not a member of the Congregation of the Demarcation R 386.2º

- To prepare the Report and propositions for the Provincial Chapter R 391.1º.3º

- To determine whether the provision of offices in the Vice-province must be done by appointment or by election R 406

- To present candidates for the position of Vice-provincial R 407.1º, 408.1º-2º; and some candidates for the office of Vice-provincial Assistant R 408.3º

- To inform the candidates about their condition as candidates R 407.2º

- To plan the General Visitation R 303

- When the attendance of the full Provincial Congregation is required R 281

- Administration:

- To permit appointing two Treasurers in a small Community R 439

- To give norms to solve economic problems, in the Demarcation R 444.4º

- In matters of economy R 445.2º

- To limit the right of property of the Houses R 452

- To give norms about economic centralization R 454

- To grant loans within the Province R 456.1º

- f) General Assistants. Their vote is required:

- Normative Acts:

- To establish juridical norms in the Order or in Demarcations R 7.1º-1lº, according to cases C 128

- To ask the Holy See in a severe case for the suspension, dispense or interpretation of the Constitutions C 126

- To resolve doubts or to give concrete interpretations about the Constitutions C 126

- To give concrete interpretations about the Rules R 36

- To prepare the Declaration of Ideals R 128 (if that is the case)

- To approve the Educative Project R 129 (if that is the case)

- To draw the Directory for Works R 143 (if that is the case)

- To approve the formative Plans for vocations R 155 c)

- To give norms about the use of the religious habit C 67

- To give norms about the official representation by the Rector (or other) and the Director of the Work R 255

- To give a decree for the reduction of a formed Province to non-formed R 267

- To give a decree for the reduction of a Vice-province to Provincial Vicariate R 286, 336

- To promulgate the Statute of a General Delegation R 342

- To establish the norms for the Council of Major Superiors R 327

- To give norms about the General Secretariats R 330

- To approve the Chapter Directory R 379; cfr. R 7.2º

- When the attendance of the full General Congregation is required R 315

- To confirm the propositions approved in a Provincial Chapter, and so they become Chapter Decrees C 187; cfr. R 7.6º

- The case when the General Congregation votes in a strictly collegiate way R 316

- To appoint or to designate:

- Masters of Novices and Juniors in General Houses R 159

- Assistants to Masters in General Houses R 161

- Rectors in Delegations and General Houses R 250.1º c), d)

- Presidents in General Houses R 250.4º

- Provincials, outside chapter time C 175; R 274

- General Assistants, outside chapter time C 206; R 311

- General Procurator C 207; R 317

- General Visitors C 205

- Gives the “nihil obstat”:

- To appoint Masters R 159 and Rectors R 250.1º a), b)

- To elect or appoint, as Provincials or Provincial Assistants, religious assigned to General Delegation R 230.3º

- To appoint Provincial Assistants, outside chapter time R 279.2º

- To designate Vice-provincials, in chapter time and outside chapter time R 289, 404-408

- To appoint Vice-provincial Assistants, outside chapter time R 289, 404-408

- To appoint Vicariate Superiors R 293; to accept some resignations R 427

- cfr. R 424.2º

- Establishments and suppressions:

- To establish, suppress, reduce or to change the limits of the Provinces C 171, R 267

- To establish Vice-provinces C 190

- To establish Houses, Demarcations and General Delegations, Under their immediate jurisdiction C 212

- To establish Provincial Vicariates C 198

- To establish or to suppress Houses and Works C 159; R 244, 246

- To establish, transfer and suppress Novitiates and Juniorates C 110, R 157 even several in the same Demarcation R 157; Demarcational and Inter-Demarcational R 157

- To reduce a formed Province to non-formed R 267; a Vice-province to Provincial Vicariate R 286, 336

- To permit the establishment of a religious House with less than four members R 243

- To reduce a canonical House to Filial Community R 243

- Chapters:

- To designate candidates for the office of Provincial R 274, 393.1º

- To permit, in non-formed Provinces, the election of four Assistants R 279.1º, 395

- To permit the appointment of four Assistants in Vice-provinces R 290, 340

- To allow the confirmation for the third consecutive time of Fr. Vice-provincial in a dependent Vice-province R 291

- To designate a religious to replace a Delegate member of the Congregation in a Demarcation R 386.2º

- To inform the candidates to the office of Provincial about their condition as candidates R 393.2º

- To take a decision in the case of a resignation R 393.3º

- To approve, if that is the case, the new constitution of the Provincial Chapter R 392.2º

- To approve, if that is the case, the new constitution of the Vice-provincial Chapter R 403

- To prepare the Report and propositions to the General Chapter R 415.1º.3º

- To designate some experts for the General Chapter R 418

- Formation Houses :

- To give permission for a candidate to make his Novitiate in a canonical House different from the Novitiate R 172

- To reduce the time of the simple profession to less than six years C 115

- To dispense from the simple vows R 205

- To dismiss a professed of simple vows R 205

- To dismiss a religious of solemn vows R 316

- To readmit those who left the Order R 207

- Other matters:

- To give permission to live outside a House of the Order, but not for more than a year, unless there are special reasons R 82 (cfr. CIC 665, par. 1)

- To admit «associated» R 233

- To plan the General Visitation R 303

- In the Houses and Demarcations under their immediate jurisdiction, in all the cases when the Provincial Assistants have deliberative vote cfr. C 213, 214; R 302 l)

- To decide, if that is the case, about excardination – incardination C 152

- Administration:

- To give permission for acts of extraordinary administration R 444.1º-2º

- To approve norms of the Provincial Congregation in economic matters R 444.4º

- Miscellaneous cases R 445.1º

- To impose taxes for the Common Fund of the Order C 210, R 449

- To limit the right to possess C 140; R 452

- To give norms about economic centralization R 454

- To permit loans among different Demarcations R 456.2º

See: Assistants. Consultors. Congregation. Voting. Administration

VOTING

- May be secret and non-secret R 27.2°

- A secret ballot is required in the cases mentioned R 364, 424.1°, 446.1°; cfr. 27.2°

See: Vote

VOW (to teach)

See: Fourth Vow

VOWS (religious)

- We promise publicly to fulfill them R 40

- Experience the Calasanzian religious life style R 38, 39

- We must live the four vows in an apostolic Calasanzian Community R 78

- Calasanz proposed to his companions the practice of the evangelical counsels C 3; and he added a fourth vow C 3

- The vow of chastity entails the obligation of perfect continence in celibacy C 55; R 41

- By the vow of poverty we give up the right to use and dispose of temporal goods C 68

- By the solemn vow of poverty we lose the right to acquire and to possess C 69; R 46, 209

- By the vow of obedience we submit ourselves to the Superiors C 76; R 53 and to the Roman Pontiff C 79

- The Superior will give commands by virtue of obedience only in the most grievous cases C 81; cfr. R 59

- Charismatic aspect of the vows C 16

- Pedagogic aspect of the vows C 93

- Communitarian aspect of the vows C 26

- Twice a year we renew them in a more solemn way C 24

See: Chastity. Poverty. Obedience. Fourth vow. Institute (or Ministry)

WORD OF GOD

- The Word of God calls us to live in a community C 27

- Assiduous familiarity with the Holy Scriptures C 42

- We persevere in the Word of God C 46

- The Virgin Mary pondered in the heart of the Word of God C 42

- And Formators C 107

See: Holy Scripture

WORK

- Definition R 11; on whom it can depend R 11

- We commend our Works to the Heavenly Father in our prayers C 51

- The Superior keeps in mind the Works when he organizes community life C 85

- No more works should be opened than those the Order is able to provide with the necessary religious C 158

- Requirements to open and close Works C 159; R 244, 245, 246, 248 (a pari): permission by the diocesan bishop R 244; consulted or informed the diocesan bishop R 246, 248

- Officials must be appointed according to the needs of the Works C 163; R 259

- Separation of the duties of Rector of the Community and Director of the Work R 254

- Director of the Work R 254, 255, cfr. R 151

- Official representative of the Work R 255

- The Fr. Provincial coordinates the activity of the Works C 177

- Send to the Supreme Moderator a report about the activity of the Works C 178

- The Provincial Chapter has to examine the state of the Works C 186; R 361.1º, 391.1º

- The same for the Vice-provincial Chapter (and in the Chapters of other Demarcations) C 195; R 361.1º, 400.1º

- The state of the Works must be examined also in the Local Chapter R 361.1º, 380.1º, and in the General Chapter R 361.1º, 415.1º

- Annual budget of the Work R 442

- Administrator of the Work R 259 b), 435

See: Religious House

WORK (action)

- And chastity C 59; R 43

- And Poverty C 66; R 46, 47

- The growth of the vocation is nourished with prayer and work C 106

- Communion of life and work requires norms and organs C 122

- The fundamental community, in which the life of the religious in faith and work is best manifested, is the Local Community C 138

- We will avoid endless alienating work R 48

See: Virtues

WILL OF GOD

- Ways to know it C 42, 77

- Neither majority nor pressure groups are in themselves a sign of the will of God R 56

- Superiors try to discover what is the Divine Will concerning their brothers C 84

- The Community helps the Superior to discern the will of God R 55

- The profession of obedience demands from us to devote ourselves totally to do the will of God R 53

- In the General Chapter our religious manifest their effort to seek the will of our Heavenly Father C 218

- In case of conflict, both parties must try to discern the will of God C 88; R 240

YOUTH

See: Children

Table of Contents

DECREES

COMMON RULES

Chapter I

OUR ORDER AND ITS LAW

Chapter II

CONSECRATED LIFE IN COMMUNITY

Chapter III

OUR MINISTRY

Chapter IV

VOCATIONAL PASTORAL AND FORMATION OF THE RELIGIOUS

Chapter V

THE ORGANIZED STRUCTURE OF OUR ORDER

Chapter VI

THE PARTICIPATION OF THE RELIGIOUS IN THE GOVERNANCE OF THE ORDER

Chapter VII

THE ADMINISTRATION OF TEMPORAL GOODS

INDEX

INDEX OF SOURCES RULES

ANALYTICAL INDEX